CN101409021A - Sound music reading material and pick-up device - Google Patents

Abstract

The invention relates to a sound music reading material and a sound pick-up related to a splicing mode, wherein a code word is arranged on a page of the sound reading material, one code word is generally printed beside each or a plurality of printed music sections, the value of the code word is generally related to the value of splicing information of a plurality of music sections, and the splicing of the music sections is completed by phonemes. The microphone reads this code word and decodes the play-out musical piece pronunciation. The code reading head of the sound pick-up can use a bar code reading head or a conductive code reading head, and the corresponding code word is a bar code or a conductive code and the like.

Description

Audible music books and pickups involving splicing

Technical field:

The invention relates to a solution to audio music books and sound pickups in a splicing mode.

Background technique:

In the prior art, there is a scheme for pronouncing music score, as the Chinese patent number is: the patent of 96100915.2,

The solution is to record the score on a piece of paper in a format similar to staves by punching, blackening, etc. The device senses the record information of the stave on the special score page, and uses the motor to scroll the special score page, sequentially reads the score information recorded on the page, and makes a musical sound. In this way, no additional memory is needed to record the spectral data, and what the reading device reads is the spectral data. The disadvantages are that the reading device is large, the reading operation is cumbersome, the cost is high, and the use is inconvenient. The special score page and the conventional score page need to be made of different papers, and it cannot be pronounced arbitrarily according to the position.

Invention content:

The task of the present invention is to provide a simple structure, low cost, and easy-to-use audio music reading system, including audio music books and pickups.

The present invention involves two aspects:

One is audio music books with codes printed on the entire page: on the entire page of audio music books, code words are formed by printing or other means; each code word can be read by the corresponding pickup for the pickup to play music , the information represented by the value of each codeword is information related to the value of the combined information; the codeword can generally be a conductive code or a barcode.

The 2nd, be used for reading the code word in the code word in all code words in all code words on the entire page of audio music book and play music: it generally comprises a reading terminal, a single-chip microcomputer chip, a pronunciation device, memory, button modules etc. The sounding device is used to play music. The pickup is used in conjunction with the audio music book. When in use, the reading dock is made to approach or touch the code words on the entire page of the audio music book. The single-chip microcomputer chip uses the reading dock to read the code value. The code value obtains the value of the combined information and decodes the obtained value of the combined information to make the sounding device emit music sounds.

The value of a codeword of the entire page of the audio music book can be or contain or can be converted to obtain the value of stitching information of several music sections, or other situations.

The code word on the entire page of the audio music book can adopt the conductive code, and the reading terminal of the corresponding pickup can adopt the electromechanical conductive code reading terminal. The code word on the entire page of audio music book also can adopt bar code etc., and the reading dock of corresponding pickup can adopt photoelectric type to read dock or other forms to read dock.

The reading materials as the main body of audio music reading materials can be music teaching materials, music appreciation reading materials, music score books for students and music score books for bands, etc.

Description of drawings:

Figure 1: Illustration of an example of an audiobook with conductive codes printed on the entire page

Figure 2: A circuit diagram of a pickup using a photoelectric reading dock

Figure 3: The circuit diagram of the pickup using the music chip connected to the MCU

Figure 4: A pickup in the form of a large-body continuous reading dock (the shape of the body is suitable for putting audio music books into the body) appearance examples and examples of audio music books

Figure 5: The pickup in the form of a large body continuous reading dock (the shape of the body is suitable for allowing audio music books to be placed on the body) appearance examples and examples of audio music books

Figure 6: Example of a handheld pickup and an example of an audio book

Figure 7: An example of the appearance of a pickup in the form of a small shell continuous reading dock and an example of an audio book

Figure 8: A repeated sound can be defined as a phoneme (this example phoneme contains 3 tones)

Figure 9: A section of scale tone can be defined as a phoneme (this example phoneme contains 4 tones)

Figure 10: A chord decomposition can be defined as a phoneme (this example phoneme contains 3 tones)

Figure 11: Two example tones with octave crowns

Figure 12: Schematic diagram of repeating a localized phoneme twice

Figure 13: An example of a music score (piano score) of the combined encoding and decoding

Figure 14: Another musical score example (piano score) of the coded and decoded pieces

Figure 15: Example of two phonemes interleaved

Figure 16: An example phoneme

1: Electromechanical conductive code reading terminal

2: Level on-off detection circuit

3: MCU

4: Button module

6: External data memory

10: conduction code

44: Sheet music printed on a full page of an audiobook

45: light pen

55: Program memory

56: Phonemes of music

57: barcode

Detailed ways:

The reading materials involved in this application document are generally common music reading materials, such as music score books. Code words can be formed on the entire page of the reading material. There can be multiple code words, and the positions can be arbitrary. The code words can be conductive codes, bar codes or other code words. Each code word can be read by the corresponding pickup. It is used for the pickup to play music. The information represented by the value of the code word is information related to the value of the combined information. The code word can be at the position where the music needs to be played on the page of the reading material. The position of the code word on the page is generally Next to the music scores of the music played corresponding to the codewords printed; all codewords related to the value of the combined information on the entire page of the reading material and the reading material together form an audio music reading material.

The code value of each code word in all or part of the code words in the code words on the whole page of the audio music book can be or contain the value of a music segment splicing information, read all the code words on the whole page of the audio music book by the pickup Codewords in all codewords in the word and decode the value of the music segment combination information in the value of the codeword and play the music segment pronunciation; of course, the different codewords in different pages or different positions, the code value expression or contained The value of a piece of combination information is generally different (here the word 'expression' has the same meaning as 'is' in 'is or contains').

The 'many' mentioned in the 'multiple' throughout this application refers to a numerical value equal to or greater than 2. The "many" in the "multiple copies" mentioned in this application document also refers to a numerical value equal to or greater than 2. The "multiple" in the "multiple" mentioned throughout the application documents also refers to a numerical value equal to or greater than 2. 'Multiple' mentioned elsewhere in this application document as a numeral also refers to a numerical value equal to or greater than 2. The 'several' mentioned as a numeral elsewhere in this application document refers to a numerical value greater than 1 and less than ten, which is common sense. The 'number' in 'several' mentioned in various places in this application document refers to a numerical value equal to or greater than 1. The 'number' in 'several' mentioned in various places in this application document refers to a numerical value equal to or greater than 1. References to 'number' as a numeral elsewhere in this application document also refer to a numerical value equal to or greater than 1.

The reading materials involved in this application document can be books, graphic cards, maps, music books or newspapers and magazines, etc., and can also be music teaching materials (belonging to books) in schools at all levels. The music scores in the music score book can be staves, numbered notation, guitar notation, electronic piano notation (some electronic notation is different from stave notation) etc.

Unless otherwise specified, the reading materials mentioned in this application document refer to the reading materials of a unit of measurement, such as a book, a music score book, and a magazine. This is obvious and common sense. If there is no special indication when mentioned, the audio music books mentioned everywhere in this application document refer to the audio music books of a unit of measurement, such as a music score book (the music score book itself does not include code words, and the music score book is Reading material) and all its code value on its whole page is to form an audio music reading material together with the code word relevant with the value of splicing information, this is obvious, also is common sense.

The audio music readings mentioned in this application document are mainly reading materials, and there are code words on the entire page of the reading materials, and the information represented by the value of the code words is information related to the value of the spliced information. The audio music reading material that this application document mentions everywhere generally is to use the page as the code word carrier as the reading material of audio music reading material main body.

The position of code word is on the whole page of reading material (such as music score book). There may be no codeword on any page of the reading material, or one or more codewords in any different positions; the pickup can read a codeword on the entire page of the reading material, and process and emit music sounds according to the code value, which can be It is to perform the music score content printed next to the code word on the reading material page with sound. The music score played here can be a section of music score printed next to this code word, or the music score printed on that whole page, or the music score printed on this page and the following pages, etc.; Word, and according to the code value of these a plurality of code words, process and send out musical sound, can be that the musical notation content printed next to these a plurality of code words on the reading material page is played out with sound. The music score played here can be a section of music score printed next to these multiple code words, or the music score printed on that whole page, or the music score printed on this page and the following pages.

The readings (readings can be books, music books, maps, newspapers, magazines or cards printed with pictures, etc.) as the main body of audio music readings are referred to in this application document. There are code words on the entire page of the readings, generally A reading material contains multiple pages (that is, a reading material contains multiple pages), and any page may not have or have one or a plurality of code words in different positions, and of course the code words of the code words of each page Values are generally different, such as the value of its single codeword is or contains the value of a music section splicing information, then the value of the music section splicing information on the value of each codeword is generally different; The information represented by the value of the codeword is the information relevant to the value of the combined information, and the music pronunciation is played by the pick-up according to the code value of the codewords in the codewords of the part codewords in the codewords read, even every page There may be codewords, and some pages may not have codewords if they do not need to be pronounced; for a book containing multiple pages, there may be codewords on multiple pages (the "many" mentioned in this sentence is less than or equal to The 'many' mentioned in the previous sentence) and each page has several codewords, or only one of the pages has codewords, and the number of codewords on this page can be one or more; "There are various codewords on the whole page of the reading material" may be that there are codewords on every page of the reading material, or there may be codewords only on some pages of the reading material; even a reading material itself has only one page ( There is only one page and only one side is used), there are one or more code words on this one page; a card can be regarded as a reading material with only one page or two pages on the front and back, on one or two pages There are code words on it; for a stack of cards, a stack of cards can be regarded as a reading material, and each card in a stack of cards can also be regarded as a reading material with only one page or two pages; Read several codewords on each page and process playing music. Each code word among the code words on the entire page of an audio music book may all belong to the same code type (for example, they are all bar codes) or have multiple code types (for example, there are both bar codes and conductive codes in the code words) Yes, as each code word in the code words has a plurality of code types, the code words of each code type should generally use different pickups with different reading docks to read codes and play music.

The value of each codeword among the codewords is generally the value of several pieces of musical segment splicing information.

Regarding the available codewords and the form of reading terminals:

One: Use one-dimensional barcodes. Generally, a codeword can represent at most about 15 decimal digits, and there are about 50 binary digits when converted into binary, with fewer digits; this kind of codeword can be read using a light pen or a ccd reading dock, etc. .

Two: Use two-dimensional barcodes. Generally, row-type two-dimensional barcodes can be used. If there are two rows, it can be expressed to more than 100 binary digits; this kind of codewords can generally be read using linear ccd reading docks, using linear When the ccd reads the dock, it needs to drag along the vertical direction to read the dock.

Three: Using the conductive code described in this manual, generally each code word can represent more than 100 binary digits; this kind of code word can be read using the electromechanical conductive code reading terminal described in this application document.

Four: Use graphic codes or magnetic codes, and the corresponding reading terminals should be used for code word recognition.

Five: Use barcodes, conductive codes, etc., and use photographic reading docks to read these codes.

Six: Use invisible barcodes, and the corresponding invisible barcodes should be used to read the code words.

Seven: Use code words of other code types, and the reading of the code words should use the corresponding reading terminal.

Characteristics of the codewords used:

The code word can be read by the corresponding pickup for the pickup to play music, and the information represented by the value of the code word is information related to the value of the spliced information.

The value of a codeword can be or contain or can be converted to obtain the value of a piece of musical composition information, and the value of a codeword can also be other situations, and the value of the musical composition information can be according to the coding rules of the score combination described later to form.

For the method of expressing the code value of the conductive code, please refer to the explanation of the conductive code technology in the application No. 2006102010785. The conductive code can generally represent the binary code value directly or through the number of on-off code names, and the value of the segment combination information or the segment combination information The conversion value of the value or the part of the value of the segment combination information is generally in binary format, so the binary code value represented by the conductive code directly or through the on-off code name code number can be the value of several segment combination information in binary format Or the transformation value of the value of several piece combination information in binary format or a part of the value of piece combination information in binary format, etc.

The character set represented by the code system of the general barcode is 10 decimal values (0-9), or the character set represented is dozens of ascii characters, you can build a table to store 10 decimal values (0-9) or dozens of ascii Characters are assigned binary numbers in order, that is, the corresponding relationship between the barcode and the binary value is established; in this way, the value of several pieces of music information in binary format or the transformation value of the value of several pieces of information in binary format or A part of the value of the music piece combination information in binary format, etc. is converted into a value in barcode format, and put into the barcode. For example, if the character set represented by the code system of the barcode is 10 decimal values (09), then the decimal 07 in the character set represented by the barcode can be used to correspond to the binary 000-111, such as the value of the music piece combination information is 011101001101110010 ( The value here is just an example), then each group of 3 BITs is converted into a decimal value 351562, and this 351562 is the value put into the barcode. Correspondingly, if the decimal value in the barcode is 351562 when reading the code, you can Convert each of its decimal numbers into a 3BIT binary value, that is, 011101001101110010, which is the value of the segment combination information. This paragraph is also technical common sense.

Apparently, the value of several pieces of combination information, the part of the value of one piece of combination information, the transformation value of the value of several pieces of combination information, the transformation value of the value of several pieces of combination information, etc. can all be binary formatted.

As shown in Figure 1, be a kind of example of audiobook, the reading material as the main body of this audiobook is music book, the code word that is printed on the page of music book is bar code 57, each page of current two pages has 2 barcode (certainly in other cases such as 3 barcodes on the left page and 2 barcodes on the right page, all possible), 44 in Fig. 1 is obviously the score printed on the page of the audio music book, this audio music Each barcode on the page of the reading material can be read by the corresponding pickup for the pickup to play music. The information represented by the value of each barcode on the page of the audio music book is information related to the value of the combined information. This audio music book The value of each barcode on the page is part of the value of the stitching information for a certain passage of this audiobook.

All the information represented by the code value on all the pages of the audio music reading is the code words of the information related to the value of the combined information, which is exactly all the code words on the entire page of the audio music reading mentioned in this application document. Codewords, the codewords on the entire page of the audiobook and the codewords on the entire page of the reading material are the same concept (this reading material is the main body of the audiobook), that is, all the codewords on all pages of the reading material The information represented by its code value is that the code words of the information related to the value of the combined information are all assembled, which is exactly the code words on the entire page of the reading material mentioned in this application document everywhere, and each code word in the various code words The information represented by the code value of the word is the information related to the value of the combined information, and each code word can be one or more code words, such as a certain audio music book has 4 pages, and each page has 2, 3, 0 pages respectively. , 1 codeword, if the code values of these 6 (2+3+1) codewords are all related to the value of the combined information, then the whole page of the audio music book (the whole page only includes those 4 pages) The code words on the above are exactly these 6 code words; each code word in the code words on the whole page of an audio music book is generally the code words of the same code type, such as all bar codes, but as in It is also possible to have code words of multiple code types on the entire page of an audio book (that is, code words of multiple code types in the code words), for example, there are both bar codes and graphic codes. The pickup of the reading dock and the pickup with the photoelectric graphic code reading dock read these two codewords respectively; the concept of "codewords" is used in this application document for the purpose of making it easy to distinguish from the codewords mentioned throughout the application document. and a single codeword.

The codewords can obviously be one or more codewords. Each code word among all code words can obviously be all on one page of audiobook or be scattered on a plurality of pages of audiobook; On all or part of the pages of a music book.

The "all codewords" mentioned in the claims and this specification are a kind of appellation, referring to all the codewords in the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book or the entire audio music book A part of the codewords in the codewords on the page, each codeword in the codewords of the part can be read by the same pickup for the pronunciation of the pickup playing music (the pickup in this sentence refers to a certain A kind of pickup); In the claims and this description, mention the codewords in the codewords in the codewords on the whole page of the whole page of the audio music book about which the relevant pickup reads, and these codewords refer to the codewords of this audio music book All codewords on the whole page can be read by this pickup for all codewords or part of codewords in all codewords for this pickup to play music pronunciation (as for all codewords can be read by this pickup in all codewords) Which codewords in all codewords for this pickup to play music pronunciation are drawn in the collection of all codewords of this part, there is no special regulation, and it is casual to draw more and less casually; Read by a pickup to be used for the codeword of this pickup to play the music pronunciation, just these several codewords can be assembled and defined as the codewords of this pickup can be read and discussed). The reason why this application document introduces the concept of all codewords is because there may be only one codeword among the codewords on the entire page of an audio music book, or there may be multiple codewords (such as both There are graphic codes, conductive codes, and barcodes, etc.), in general, a pickup has only one reading terminal and can only read one type of code (such as electromechanical conductive code reading terminals can read conductive codes) or can read two The code word of code type (such as photoelectric reading terminal can read conductive code and bar code), and the code word that can be read by a certain pickup in various code words, its code value may not be used for this pickup to play music (such as code word The value of is the value of several pieces of information combined, and this pickup is not specially designed to read this form of codeword and does not know how each BIT in this form of codeword represents data, so this pickup reads this After the code word, although the binary BITs in the code word are read out, I don’t know what these BITs mean, and I can’t decode the broadcast music. Here, this form of code word is specially used to be read by another pickup to decode the broadcast music), That is, each code word in all or part of the code words on the entire page of the audio music book can be read by the same pickup for the playback of music by the pickup, so for the purposes of these claims Conveniently, just introduce the concept of all codewords. Each codeword in all codewords may all be codewords belonging to one codeword, or codewords belonging to multiple codewords (for example, some codewords in all codewords are conductive codes, and some codewords are barcodes. , and the reading dock of the pickup is a photoelectric reading dock, which can read these two codewords respectively). The phrases such as pickup reading code and playing music mentioned in this paragraph all refer to decoding and playing music according to the value of the spliced information in the one (or multiple) codewords after the pickup reads one (or more) codewords.

All codewords can obviously be one or more codewords. Each code word in the code words of the part can obviously be all on a page of the audio music book or be scattered on the multiple pages of the audio music book; and each code word in the code words of the part can obviously be scattered in the audio music book On all or part of the pages of a music book.

Obviously the concept of ' codewords ' and the concept of ' all codewords ' are all obvious concepts.

All code words of part may have these several situations (also may have other situations except these 3 kinds of situations): 1 is for each code word in all code words of part, has this feature: pickup reads this code word Just can broadcast music (such as the value of each codeword in all codewords of all parts is the value of a music section combination information); After a code word, also need to read other code words in all code words of this part, obtain the value of the music segment combination information by these many code words and just play music (for example, only contain 3 code words in all code words of the part, one music The BIT of the value of the segment combination information is dispersed in the value of these 3 code words, and the value of each code word in these 3 code words is the part of the value of this music segment combination information); 3 is for all codes of the part Each code word in the part code word in the word has this characteristic: just can broadcast music (such as the value of each code word in this part code word is the value of a music section splicing information) after the pickup reads this code word ), and for each code word in other part code words in all code words, this characteristic is arranged: after the pickup reads this code word, also need to read other code words in all code words by these multiple code words Only when the value of the music segment combination information is obtained can the music be played (for example, the value of each code word in this part of the code word is a part of the value of the music segment combination information), the 3rd case here can give an example: such as all codes Contains 3 codewords (codeword 1, codeword 2, codeword 3) in the word, the BIT of the value 1 of the music section splicing information is placed separately in these 3 codewords, and the BIT of the value 2 of the music section splicing information is also Put in codeword 1, then codeword 1 can be regarded as a part in all codewords of department, codeword 2 and codeword 3 can be regarded as another part in all codewords of department, read codeword 1 in the previous part After reading the value, you can decode and play the music according to the value 2 of the music segment in the code value. After reading any code word (code word 2 or code word 3) in the latter part, you need to read the other two code words to be able to play music. The values of these 3 codewords are combined to obtain the value 1 of the segment combination information to decode and play music (that is, if you read codeword 2 first, you need to read codeword 3 and codeword 1, if you read codeword 3 first, you need to read Read codeword 2 and codeword 1; generally there are BIT signs in codeword 2 and codeword 3 to indicate that multiple codewords need to be read), and because codeword 1 is also read in, the music played may also include codewords The pronunciation of the phrase corresponding to the value 2 of the combined information in word 1 (this depends on specific needs).

What is said in the last paragraph is also to the claims mentioned in many places: 'when the pickup is in use, after the single-chip microcomputer chip of the pickup reads any codeword in the codewords of the parts, it does not need to Read other codewords in the all codewords of the described part again to play music, or, when the pickup was used, the single-chip microcomputer chip of the pickup read any codeword in the all codewords of the described part Afterwards, it is necessary to read other several code words in the code words to play music again, or, when the pickup is used, the single-chip microcomputer chip of the pickup reads the code words of the pickup No need to read any other code words in the code words in the part of the code words to play music, and the single-chip microcomputer chip of the sound pick-up can read the code words in the code words of the parts. All need to read other several codewords in the codewords of the said part and just play music after any codeword in the codewords in addition;

All codewords of a part that a certain pickup can read can only comprise a codeword, and this pickup reads this codeword and just can play music, and a codeword in this part of all codewords refers to this unique codeword.

The structure and characteristics of the pickup used (the description of the structural characteristics of the pickup starts from the next paragraph and ends on page 14):

The circuit realization of the pickup: the pickup generally includes a reading dock, a single-chip microcomputer chip (the main processing chip of the pickup), a pronunciation device, a memory, a button module, and the like. (The button module is generally composed of one or more buttons. If it is composed of more than two buttons, it is generally connected in the form of a button matrix. This is common sense, and for the pickup, the button module is not necessary; the memory here is Refers to the memory in the pick-up outside the single-chip microcomputer chip. If there is no memory in the single-chip microcomputer chip, the memory in the pick-up outside the single-chip microcomputer chip is necessary. If there is memory in the single-chip microcomputer chip, the memory in the pickup outside the single-chip microcomputer chip is optional according to the situation. No, the handling of the memory selection in the pickup on the chip of the single-chip microcomputer here also belongs to technical common sense).

The single-chip microcomputer chip (i.e. the main processing chip of the pickup) referred to in this application document everywhere can be MCU, CPU etc., generally refers to MCU, so this description everywhere uses MCU as the embodiment of single-chip microcomputer chip in technical elaboration. The MCU (in capital letters, without the word 'main' in front of it) or the main MCU (in which the letters are in capital letters) or the main MCU chip (in which the letters are in capital letters) mentioned throughout this application document ) all refer to the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup, and the mcu in lowercase letters also refers to the single-chip microcomputer chip but not specifically refers to the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup; unless it is specifically specified when it is mentioned Meaning, the single-chip microcomputer chip mentioned everywhere in this application document refers to the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup by default.

The MCU chip should generally have the function of playing music (connected to the speaker to pronounce) according to the method of music synthesis (usually according to the method of broadcasting spectrum data). The foot completes key scanning, code reading and other functions.

Obviously, the memory referred to in this application document refers to the memory whose stored data does not disappear after power failure, such as ROM, which can also be EPROM, EEPROM or FLASH, etc., and the application document refers to a memory everywhere. , generally refers to a collection of a certain number of storage units that are relatively independent from the outside world, such as a memory chip; according to common sense, there can be one memory or multiple memories in different locations in a single-chip microcomputer operating system, such as inside the single-chip microcomputer chip and There are external memories, or there is no memory in the single-chip microcomputer chip and an external memory is required. The memory in the single-chip microcomputer chip that has is large enough and does not need external memory; However, temporary registers such as RAM are included in the single-chip microcomputer chip by default according to common sense or as a conventional additional chip around the single-chip microcomputer chip, and this application document does not specifically mention it separately. This paragraph is all technical knowledge.

In claim 2, mentioned in claim 6, 'each memory in this memory set can be read and used by the aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip of the aforementioned sound pick-up' means that it can be a memory (generally a memory chip) outside the single-chip microcomputer chip, It can be connected to the single-chip microcomputer chip through serial connection or parallel bus, and can be read and used by the single-chip microcomputer chip. It is also technical common sense.

The concept of memory sets in this document is an obvious one.

For the pickup, the memory sets related to it mentioned throughout the application documents refer to all memory that can be read by the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup; the memory collection can be several memories in the single-chip microcomputer chip, or can be single-chip microcomputer Several memories (usually memory chips) in the pickup outside the chip, or several memories in the single-chip microcomputer chip plus several memories in the pickup outside the single-chip microcomputer chip; the programs related to the pickup and the data related to the pickup are stored in this memory In the set; For some memories in the pickup outside the single-chip microcomputer chip, these memories can be read by the single-chip microcomputer chip, and these memories belong to the memory set, but may not store useful information.

When the pickup is in use, it needs to use a memory set. The program and data related to the pickup are stored in the memory set. The program in the memory set is executed by the single-chip microcomputer chip to run and read codes, etc., and the memory set can be adjusted by the single-chip microcomputer chip. The decoding program and decoding data to decode and play music; this is also technical common sense.

The program involved in the pickup (also refers to the program involved in the use of the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup), generally includes code reading, pickup operation master control, pronunciation and other programs, and also includes a decoding program. The data related to the pickup (also referring to the data related to the use of the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup) generally includes decoding data, and can also include other related data.

If there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, the "storage in the pickup" mentioned in this application document can generally have three situations: 1. There is a storage in the MCU chip, and there is no storage in the pickup outside the MCU. 2. The MCU There is no memory in the chip, and there is a memory in the MCU off-chip pickup. 3 is that there is a memory in the MCU chip, and there is also a memory in the MCU off-chip pickup; if there is no special indication when it is mentioned, it has other meanings, and the "in the pickup" mentioned throughout this application document No memory' means that there is no memory in the MCU chip and in the pickup outside the MCU chip.

Corresponding to the last paragraph, if there is no special indication to contain other meanings when mentioned, the 'memory in the pickup' mentioned in this application document can generally have three situations: 1 only refers to several memories in the MCU chip (required There is memory in the MCU chip), 2 means only several memories in the MCU off-chip pickup (requires that there is a memory in the MCU off-chip pickup), 3 means several memories in the MCU chip plus the number in the MCU off-chip pickup A memory (requires that there is memory in the MCU off-chip pickup and there is also memory in the MCU chip); if there is a memory in the pickup, obviously there are one or more memories in the pickup.

There must be a memory set in the pickup, and the programs and data involved in the pickup are stored in one or more memories in the memory set (as for how to disperse and store the programs and data involved in the pickup into multiple memories according to Need to decide, this is technical common sense).

In the memory set related to the pickup, the programs related to the pickup (generally including code reading, programs such as the pickup running master control, and programs such as decoding involved in pronunciation) and the data used by these programs need to be stored in the memory set related to the pickup. The above seven paragraphs are all technical common sense.

The useful information mentioned in this application document when referring to the related technology of a certain pickup obviously refers to the program involved in the pickup, or the data involved in the pickup, or the program involved in some pickups, or the data involved in some pickups, or Pickup-related program plus partial pickup-related data, or partial pickup-related program plus pickup-related data, or partial pickup-related program plus partial pickup-related data, or pickup-related program plus pickup-related data . (The pickups mentioned later in this paragraph all refer to the pickups mentioned earlier in this paragraph)

Unless otherwise specified when mentioned, the programs involved in the pickup mentioned in this application document refer to all programs involved in the use of the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup by default; unless otherwise specified when mentioned , the data related to the pickup mentioned in various parts of this application document refers to all the data related to the use of the single-chip microcomputer chip as the main processing chip of the pickup by default.

The memory set related to the pickup should store the decoding program and decoding data etc. used for decoding the value of the piece combination information obtained by reading the code with the reading dock. For the technical description of the encoding rules and encoded data, as well as the technical descriptions of the decoding rules and decoded data, please refer to the description later in this specification.

The reading terminal of the pickup is used to read the value of the code word on the entire page of the audio music book, and the reading terminal can be a photoelectric reading terminal (such as a light pen or a ccd reading terminal) to read the barcode on the entire page of the audio music book Or conductive code (if the conductive code is to be read by the photoelectric reading terminal, it is required that the color of its conductive material is different from the color of the carrier plane of the conductive code), it can also be the electromechanical conductive code reading terminal described in this manual, with Reads conductive codes on entire pages of audiobooks, or other reading codes.

The single-chip microcomputer chip (MCU) is the main processing chip of the pickup, and it is the main control of the whole machine's code reading, code value processing, pronunciation, etc. Generally, one MCU is enough.

The single-chip microcomputer chip (MCU) should generally have the function of playing music according to the method of music synthesis (usually according to the method of broadcasting spectrum data) (in this case, the MCU is generally connected to an external speaker, and the sounding device is a speaker, which is driven by the MCU). This function should generally be able to connect the MCU to an external music chip. In this case, the pronunciation device is a music chip with a speaker connected to the MCU. When using it, the decoding result (usually the spectrum data of the music section) is usually decoded by the MCU with a communication line. ) in sequence to the external music chip connected to the MCU, and the music chip uses the received decoding result to drive the speaker to produce sound according to the music synthesis method. These are all technical common sense.

The single-chip microcomputer chip (MCU) is intentionally connected with the reading terminal, and the single-chip microcomputer chip (MCU) is intentionally connected with the pronunciation device. The word "intended connection" used in this application document is for the convenience of writing claims. The so-called intentional connection refers to direct connection or indirect connection. The intentional connection between the single-chip microcomputer chip and the pronunciation device means that the single-chip microcomputer chip and the pronunciation device are directly or indirectly connected; the direct connection between the two objects mentioned in this application document means that the connection between the two is directly connected. The indirect connection between two objects mentioned throughout the application documents means that the connection between the two is connected through a relay element (it can be that all the connections between the two are through the same relay element) It can also be that different connections between the two are connected through different relay elements), and information can still be transmitted between the two through relay elements, and the indirect connection can be regarded as an equivalent replacement of the direct connection , and if some connections between the two are directly connected, and some connections are connected through relay components, then this situation is equivalent to the direct connection between the two objects mentioned above in this paragraph; For example, when the reading terminal is a light pen, it can be directly connected from the reading terminal to the MCU; it can also be connected from the light pen to the MCU through the bus buffer chip (that is, from the light pen to the bus buffer chip first, and from the bus The buffer chip is then connected to the MCU), which is an indirect connection at this time. The MCU and the sounding device are generally directly connected (for example, the MCU is directly connected to the speaker, which is the sounding device), and the MCU drives the music chip with the speaker to play music through an IO expansion chip (such as a chip similar to 8255). An IO expansion chip can be said to be an indirect connection between the MCU and the pronunciation device (the pronunciation device should be a music chip with a speaker at this time), which is an equivalent replacement of the direct connection, and this is also a conventional replacement technology for single-chip technology. In addition, there can even be a wireless connection between the single-chip microcomputer chip and the reading terminal, such as an infrared connection. The reading terminal is more complicated. It needs to read the code by itself and needs a wireless communication circuit. This infrared connection can be regarded as an equivalent replacement of the direct connection. (The 'relay element' mentioned in this paragraph can be, for example, a programmable logic device, a bus buffer chip, an IO expansion chip, etc.)

The sounding device in the pickup can be a loudspeaker (referring to the embodiment of this description, the loudspeaker as the sounding device said in this application document can be done equivalent replacement by the loudspeaker circuit etc., and the loudspeaker circuit refers to the loudspeaker and some simple resistance capacitance etc. components, such as a speaker circuit composed of a speaker, 1K resistor and 8050 to replace the speaker), if necessary, it can also be a music chip with a speaker external to the MCU, or other types of pronunciation devices; this is technical common sense. In claim 2, described in 'and make the aforementioned pronunciation device of the aforementioned pickup play the music pronunciation by the aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip of the aforementioned pickup according to the code value of the codeword in the codewords of the aforementioned parts read', can be made The MCU uses the decoding result obtained by decoding (such as the spectrum data of the music section or other forms of decoding results) to play the pronunciation of the music section. There is a hardware circuit for playing music in the MCU chip, and the MCU chip is connected to a speaker, and the MCU is obtained according to the decoding. All the decoding results are used to drive the speaker to emit music (in this case the speaker is a sounding device), in this case it is a full-step pronunciation method; it can also be the decoding result obtained by decoding by the MCU (such as the spectral data of the music section or other forms) The decoding result of the music section) to play the pronunciation of the music section. There is a hardware circuit for playing music in the MCU chip, and the MCU chip is connected to a speaker. The MCU drives the speaker to broadcast, and then completes the playback of the music section until the end of decoding (in this case, the speaker is a sounding device). In this case, it is a step-by-step pronunciation method; or the MCU is externally connected to a music chip with a speaker, which can be decoded by the MCU. The decoding result (such as the spectrum data of the music section or other forms of decoding results) is transmitted to the external music chip through the communication line (this music chip can play music according to the decoding result), and the music chip connected to the MCU is transmitted to the external music chip according to the MCU. All the decoding results obtained by its decoding drive the sound of the music section by the speaker connected to the music chip (in this case, the music chip with the speaker connected to the MCU is a sound device), in this case, it is a full-step pronunciation method; or the MCU is connected with a belt For the music chip of the speaker, when the MCU decodes the value of the combined information of the music section, every time a part of the BIT of the decoding result (such as the spectrum data of the music section or other forms of decoding results) is obtained, it is transmitted by the MCU through the communication line. For the external music chip, the music chip externally connected to the MCU drives the external speaker of the music chip to pronounce according to a part of the BIT of the decoding result sent by the MCU. The external music chip with the loudspeaker is a sounding device), this situation is a step-by-step sounding method; or it can play music with the combined sounding device described later in this manual; or other single-chip microcomputer chips can also be used to make the sounding device The way of playing music (the sounding device can be a speaker, a music chip with a speaker connected to the MCU, other types of sounding devices, etc.); these methods are all technical common sense. The above-mentioned pronunciation of the playing music section in this paragraph can be the whole pronunciation of the playing music section or the partial pronunciation of the playing music section.

Mentioned in claim 6 that the aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip of the aforementioned pickup can utilize the aforementioned reading pier of the aforementioned pickup to read each codeword in some of the codewords in the aforementioned codewords', it means that both can The code is read by the active control of the single-chip microcomputer chip, such as the code value of the conductive code obtained by reading the conductive code repeatedly described in the application for invention No. 2006102010785, or the code value of the conductive code obtained by reading the conductive code repeatedly described in the application for invention No. 2006102010785. The scanning current is output by the IO pin of the single-chip microcomputer chip, and the current flows to the code disc of the A conductive code on the page of the audio music book through the on-off electromechanical reading terminal, and then the current flows to the touch area on each code line of the A conductive code, and then Flow back to the reading terminal, and then detect whether the current flowing back from the contact area of each code line of the first conductive code is detected. The detection result is obtained by the single-chip microcomputer chip to obtain the code value of the conductive code (when reading the code, it is necessary to Make the on-off electromechanical reading dock contact with the first conductive code on the page of the audio music book; it can also be that the reading dock does not need a single-chip microcomputer chip to control when reading the code, such as the photoelectric reading dock (such as a light pen) to read the audio music Read the barcode (or conductive code) on the page of the material and output the code reading result or output the code reading information (the code reading information refers to the waveform indicating the ratio of each space on the barcode, for example), and the code reading result is obtained by the single-chip microcomputer chip (this The code reading result mentioned in the paragraph is the code value of the code word) or the code reading information is obtained by the single-chip microcomputer chip and the code reading result is obtained according to the code reading information (when reading the code, it is necessary to make the photoelectric reading terminal and the audio music reading material The barcode or conductive code on the page is contacted or approached); in addition, there are other ways of reading the code. The interpretation of the sentence of 'the aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip of the aforementioned pickup can utilize the aforementioned reading pier of the aforementioned pickup to read each of the codewords in the aforementioned codewords' in claim 6 described above in this paragraph, It can also be regarded as an interpretation of the sentence of 'each codeword in the aforementioned codewords is read by the aforementioned pickup by the reading terminal of the aforementioned pickup in claim 2.

The supply voltage (VCC) selection range of each circuit example and embodiment involved in this application document is 2.6V to 5V (check the single-chip microcomputer chip model involved in this application document and the data of other chip models can also get this operating voltage selection range value) . Actual pickups may have supply voltages outside the 2.6V to 5V range.

The single-chip microcomputer chip (MCU) uses the reading terminal (such as a light pen) to read the code value, and then decodes according to the value of the combined information obtained from the code value of one or more code words, so that the pronunciation device emits a musical sound. In general, the pickup can also have buttons (such as using buttons to adjust the volume), but the buttons are not necessary.

The information represented by the value of each codeword among the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book is information related to the value of the splicing information, for example, the value of the codeword is the value of the splicing information of the music section.

The position of the codeword is on the full page of the audio music book. There can be one or more codewords in any different positions on any page of the audiobook, and of course some pages can have no codewords.

The compatible concept mentioned in this application document is a conventional concept in the field of computer. For the combination of music scores, such as version 2.0 decoding program and decoding data, it can decode the value of the segment combination information whose encoding version is version 2.0, version 1.0 The decoding program and decoding data, which can decode the value of the segment combination information whose encoding version is version 1.0, such as the version 2.0 decoding program and decoding data can also be used to decode the value of the segment combining information whose encoding version is 1.0, then version 2.0 The decoding program and decoding data are compatible with version 1.0 of the decoding program and decoding data. For another example, the content of the phoneme database for decoding includes the content of the phoneme database for encoding, so the phoneme database for decoding is compatible with the phoneme database for encoding.

Regarding the definition of a section, the concept of a section referred to in this application document is somewhat different from the conventional concept of a section. The definition of a conventional music section usually refers to adopting a consistent musical expression technique, approximately the same rhythm and mode, and expressing the same music. The continuous melody collection of the theme, the definition of the paragraphs involved in this application document is for the convenience of voice and data organization, there is no special restriction on the definition of the music paragraphs, generally a codeword corresponds to a music section, and a codeword Corresponding to a music section, that is, the value of a codeword is the value of the combined information of a music section. Read the codeword with a pickup, and you can decode and play the pronunciation of the music section; so a music section can be a whole song , this song assigns a code word; Even an audio music book has only one code word, and the music score printed on the whole page of the whole audio music book is exactly a musical section; As a music section; For the audio music book that will be formed (staff score or numbered notation score or electronic piano score score or guitar score score, etc. are printed on its page), every adjacent few lines of music scores printed on the page can be defined as Each music section can be assigned a codeword, or even each line of music printed on the page can be defined as a music section, and each music section can be assigned a codeword, and even several non-adjacent printings on the page can be A line of score is defined as a section, and a code word is assigned (for example, the first line and the third line of music printed on a certain page are defined as a section), and the part of a certain line of score printed on the page can also be defined as a Sections, etc. Obviously, these definitions of sections can be deduced by common sense; the sections referred to in this application document can also be sections of conventional music, and a code word is assigned to each section of conventional music sections.

For the audio music book that will be formed as the music teaching material, the demonstration spectrum (as stave) that each page occurs generally only has several rows, and generally these several rows can be regarded as a music section to distribute a code word and get final product.

For different parts of the printed content of an audio music book that will be formed, different music section division methods can be adopted. For example, there are scores of 20 songs printed on its entire page, and the scores of the first 10 songs can be defined as each The song is used as a section, each section is assigned a codeword, and the scores of the next 10 songs are each page as a section, and each section is assigned a codeword.

Allocating a codeword to a music section described in the above three paragraphs means that the value of this codeword is the value of the combined information of this music section, which is obvious.

Generally, a codeword is assigned to a music section; for example, if there are three lines of music scores, these three lines of music scores can be regarded as a music section, and the value of a music section combination information is generated by encoding the three lines of music scores, and then the music score is just placed in a codeword The value of the combination information of the segment, then the value of the codeword is the value of the combination information of the segment.

There are some other ways to put the value of the piece combination information in the codeword, such as putting the values of multiple pieces of piece together information in a codeword, etc.; the code value of a codeword mentioned in this application document represents The information is the information related to the value of the combination information, which generally can be: the value of a codeword is or contains the value of several pieces of combination information (or the transformation value of the value of several pieces of combination information), or other form. This application document states that the information represented by the code value of a code word is information related to the value of the combined information. In fact, for such a code word, the form of the code value may have other forms that are not mentioned elsewhere in this specification. For example, the values of several pieces of music information are combined to transform to obtain a transformation value, and the transformation value is put into one codeword or separated into multiple codewords, and each codeword in the one or more codewords The information represented by the value of is still information relevant to the value of the combination information, and the pickup can read several such code words and play music by the value of the combination information of several sections obtained from these several code words.

Apparently, if the value of a codeword is or contains the value of a plurality of musical sections, the definition of that musical section is still not particularly limited, such as a printed page of the audio music book that will be formed. The entire song score is regarded as a paragraph, and a printed sheet of music can also be regarded as a paragraph; for the audio music book to be formed (staff score or numbered score or electronic piano score or guitar score, etc. are printed on its page) , you can define every adjacent line of music printed on the page as a music section, even define each line of music printed on the page as a music section, and even define a few non-adjacent lines printed on the page The music score is defined as a music section, and the part of a line of music scores printed on the page can also be defined as a music section, and the part of a line of music scores printed on the page and another line of music scores can also be defined as a music section, etc.

For any one of all the passages in an audio music book, the score of this passage may be printed on the entire page of the book as the main body of the audio music book, or the score of this passage may not be printed on any page.

For a section defined in an audio music book to be formed, after the audio music book is actually made (such as produced), this section is the section of the audio music book that is made, such as for a will The formed audio music book defines a certain line of music score printed on a certain page as a music section, then after the audio music book is actually made (such as produced), the music section (printed on the aforementioned certain page Aforesaid certain row music score) is exactly the musical section of this made out audio music book.

Playing music after a pickup reads one or more codewords mentioned throughout the application documents, it can be that the pickup reads one or more codewords and puts together all the sections obtained from the one or more codewords The pronunciation of each music section corresponding to the value of the information is played out (generally referring to the pronunciation of one or more music sections), and it can also be in accordance with the agreement (for example, there is a BIT mark in the code word) from the one or more codes Select the value of part of the combination information from all the values of the combination information obtained in the word and broadcast the pronunciation of each section corresponding to the value of this part of combination information, for example, it may be by agreement (such as code There is BIT mark in the word) in the value of the combination information of selecting part of the music from the value of the combination information of a plurality of music sections obtained in one or more codewords and decode them respectively and broadcast the pronunciation of this part of the music come out.

(the code words mentioned below in this paragraph are all on the whole page of the same audio music book), as a pick-up can read a code word and then play several paragraph pronunciations (such as the value of a code word with number The value of the combination information of each segment), and the pickup can also read multiple codewords and play one or more segment pronunciations (the two 'multiple' in this sentence are not necessarily the same value; the pickup reads multiple codewords) An example of playing the pronunciation of multiple sections after a codeword For example: the BIT of the value 1 of the section combination information is divided into three parts and placed in the codeword 1, codeword 2 and codeword 3 respectively, and the value of the section combination information is 2 BIT is also placed in codeword 3. After the pickup reads codeword 1, codeword 2 and codeword 3, the values of these three codewords are combined to obtain the value 1 of the segment information, which can be obtained from codeword 3 The value 2 of the segment combination information, then the pickup can decode and play the segment pronunciation corresponding to the value 1 of the segment combination information and the segment pronunciation corresponding to the value 2 of the segment combination information), and the pickup can be released to read one or more After the code words, there is a certain music section pronunciation to be played (there may also be played other music section pronunciations); a pickup mentioned in this application document reads one or more code words and then plays the music section pronunciation, which means playing a music section by default. The pronunciation of the phrase is the subordinate concept of playing the pronunciation of one or more phrases after the pickup reads the one or more codewords, and it is also the subordinate concept of playing music after the pickup reads the one or more codewords.

Obviously, according to the definition mode of the music section, after the pickup reads one or more code words, the music played correspondingly can be multiple pieces of music or a whole piece of music or a part of a piece of music, or it can be a demonstration tone (such as a section of scale ).

If there is no special meaning when it is mentioned, the pickups mentioned in this description play music according to the value of the combination information of several sections obtained from the codeword, and the default is to only play the value of the combination information of these sections The pronunciation of the corresponding several paragraphs.

If there is no other meaning specified when mentioning and the other meaning cannot be deduced from the context of the mention, the 'codeword' mentioned throughout this specification (without "all" or "parts" in front of it) ) default refers to the code word in the code words on the entire page of audio music book.

The information represented by the value of each codeword in the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book is information related to the value of the combined information (for example, the value of a piece of combined information), and for a single codeword, its codeword The form of the value of is generally: the value of the code word is or contains the value of a musical segment splicing information, etc. Here said 'the value of the codeword is or contains the value of a piece of music piece together information', wherein the meaning of the word 'yes' used refers to: all the values of the codeword except the value of this piece of piece piece together information Except for the BIT, there is no other piece of information that involves all or part of the BIT, but the value of the codeword may or may not have other information that is not related to playing music, such as related display information (such as corresponding to different codewords) Display different forms of animation actions, which requires a display such as LCD on the corresponding pickup, and the animation data is in the pickup), and can also have or not check BIT bits of codewords, etc.; the value of the said 'codeword is or contains The word "contains" used in the value of a segment combination information' means that in addition to all the BITs of the value of this segment combination information in the value of the codeword, there are other values of the segment combination information involved All or part of the BIT (such as the value of the combined information of other sections or the transformation value of the combined information of other sections), and the value of the other codeword may or may not have other information that has nothing to do with playing music, such as Relevant display information can also have or not check BIT bit of codeword etc.; Is or contains the value of several music segment splicing information', 'the value of a codeword is or contains the transformed value part of the value of several musical segment splicing information', "the value of a code word is or contains a musical segment splicing "Part of the value of the information" and "is" and "contains" in other similar sayings also have the above-mentioned meanings in this paragraph; when the value of the music segment combination information is a part of the code word, it is related to other information in the code word BIT. Coexistence format (such as who is in front of who is behind, or even how to arrange several kinds of information crossed), which is determined by the coder. After reading the code, the MCU will combine the value of the segment information and the value of other information from the code value according to the defined format content. Take them out and use them for playing music and other processing.

The value of a codeword mentioned in this application document is or contains other forms of values related to the value of the combined information, and the meanings of "yes" and "contains" involved are also understood by analogy as described in the previous paragraph. (The value of the conductive code mentioned in this application document is or contains a certain value, which is also understood by analogy as described in the previous paragraph)

As for the value of a code word, there are not only the value of several music section combination information but also the part of the value of several music section combination information. After several codewords can be read, the value of each music segment combination information can be obtained according to the values of such several codewords, and corresponding processing can be performed to play music respectively. Apparently, the values of multiple music segment combination information placed in the value of a codeword are generally arranged in order, and can also be arranged in an alternate manner according to the agreement. How to put it in a codeword and which music sections to put together the value of the information are determined according to the needs.

This application document is limited in this way: the information represented by the code value of the code word mentioned throughout the application document is information related to the value of the combined information, which means that the value of the code word is related to the value of the combined information of several music sections (no longer related to the value of the piece combination information other than the value of these pieces of piece combination information). The value of the code word is related to the value of the combination information of several music sections, generally refers to: the value of the code word is the value of the combination information of a music section or the value of the combination information containing a music section or multiple The value of the patch information of a section or the value of the patch information of multiple sections or the part of the value of the patch information of a section or the part of the value of the patch information of a section or the patch information of a section The transformation value of the value of the value or the transformation value of the value of the combination information containing one section or the transformation value of the value of the combination information of multiple sections or the transformation value of the value of the combination information containing multiple sections or a section Part of the transformation value of the value of the patch information of a section or a part containing the transformation value of the value of the patch information of one section or a part of the transformation value of the value of the patch information of multiple sections or a section containing multiple sections The transformation value part of the value of the information, or the transformation value of the value part of the value of a piece of piecewise information, or the transformation value of the part of the value of the piece of piecemeal information containing a piece of music, or the part of the value of the piecewise information of multiple pieces Transformation value or transformation value of part of value containing multiple phrase splicing information or part of transformed value of part of value of one phrase splicing information or part of transformed value of part of value containing one phrase splicing information or It is a part of the conversion value of the value part of the combination information of multiple sections or a part of the conversion value of the part containing the value of the combination information of a plurality of sections, or a part of the value of the combination information of several sections and several sections The transformation value obtained by transforming the value of the segment combination information, or the transformation value obtained by converting the value of several segment combination information and the value of several segment combination information, or the value of several segment combination information The part of the part and the value of several piece combination information are transformed into the transformed value part or the part containing the part of the value of several pieces of combination information and the value of several pieces of combination information is transformed into the part of the value obtained; If the value of the code word is related to the value of the combined information of several music sections, the value of the code word may have some other forms other than the above forms, and these other forms are essentially the same as the above forms. It involves how to put the value of the combined information into the codeword. Obviously, no matter how to put data in the value of the code word, the corresponding pickup used to read the code word should be able to obtain these data from the value of the code word (for example, knowing how to inversely transform the value of the piece information from the music segment) the value of the segment stitching information)

For the value generated by transforming the value of a piece of combination information and other values that have nothing to do with pronunciation, such as the value of display information, it can be regarded as the transformation value of the value of this piece of combination information, and the value can be transformed Perform an inverse transformation to obtain the value of the combined information of this segment; for the values of the combined information of multiple segments and other values that have nothing to do with pronunciation, such as the value of display information, the value generated by transforming together can be equivalent to these multiple The transformation value of the value of the combination information of the music segment, which can be inversely transformed to obtain the values of the combination information of the plurality of music segments.

Obviously, under the premise that the value of a codeword is related to the value of several pieces of information combined together, if the value of the combination information of several pieces here is the value of one piece of combination information, Then the value of this codeword is only related to the value of this piece of music piece combination information; obviously, as in the premise that the value of a codeword is related to the value of several pieces of music piece piece together information, as mentioned here If the 'value of combining information of several music segments' is the value of combining information of multiple music segments, then the value of this code word is only related to the value of combining information of these multiple music segments.

The conversion value of the value of the several pieces of music information mentioned in this application document, where the 'several' is to modify the 'value of the music section combination information', the number of music score data mentioned in this application document The conversion value, etc., are also understood by analogy; the conversion value of the value of the multiple music segment combination information mentioned in this application document, the "multiple" here is to modify the "value of the music segment combination information", this The conversion values of the multiple musical score data mentioned in various parts of the application documents, etc., are also understood by analogy.

When decoding the value of the segment combination information and playing music, the music is played by music synthesis. The MCU of the pickup or the music playback chip connected to the MCU must have the ability to play music by music synthesis, and the decoding can be performed by the MCU. Convert the decoding result into the spectrum data of the music section, and use the MCU of the pickup or the music playing chip outside the MCU to play the music in the way of music synthesis according to the spectrum data of the music section. As for the decoding, the MCU converts the decoding result into other form of data, and play music by the pickup MCU or its external music playing chip according to other forms of data in a music synthesis mode, then the essence of the other forms of data and the spectral data of the music section is the same here; The MCU or the music playing chip attached to the MCU plays music according to the spectrum data of the section, which is similar to playing MIDI music. The following describes the principle of playing music with the spectrum data of the section

The following section mainly describes the way the MCU plays music according to the spectrum data: music can be recorded by notation, for example, the simplest monophonic piece of music contains DO, MI, SO three tones, which can be recorded sequentially The three numbers 1, 2, and 3 are used as spectral data. When playing, the pickup can obtain the three numbers 1, 2, and 3 from the spectral data and play the three tones of DO, MI, and SO in order according to the agreement. Of course, what is said here is In the simplest case, the form of the actual spectral data is more complicated, and generally multi-channel; playing music according to the spectral data requires the MCU in the pickup to have the function of music synthesis, (music synthesis technology is a well-known mature technology, here Not to mention), the spectrum data not only records pitch information, but also records rhythm information (if necessary, it may also record timbre information, but this is not necessary), and generally records multi-channel spectrum, which can be pressed by the MCU in the pickup. Spectrum data plays music sound. The format of spectral data is similar to MIDI data format (and MIDI data format can be called a kind of spectral data format), but the specific format of spectral data is defined according to different models of MCU or different applications. And the number of channels is different; the program that can be stored in the memory set related to the pickup and used by the MCU to play music according to the spectrum data of the music section in this way is called the spectrum data playback program. Here, the MCU is required to have the function of playing music according to the spectrum data (usually music synthesis function), and the MCU plays music according to the spectrum data, which means that the MCU uses the content of each byte of the spectrum data (generally, the spectrum data is taken out one by one byte order) , to play music in the way of music synthesis, which is technical common sense; in addition, the music chip with speaker connected to the MCU can also be used to play music according to the spectrum data. The principle of playing music is similar to the principle of playing with MCU mentioned above in this paragraph , it is only necessary for the MCU to transmit the spectrum data of the music section to the music chip external to the MCU through the communication line for the music chip to play music. In addition, in some music scores, there may be special marks such as dynamics and portamento, but generally the single-chip microcomputer and music chip with the function of playing music according to the spectrum data do not have the function to process these special marks, so these marks are generally not recorded in the spectrum data , only record the data information of the main tune, and only broadcast the main tune during playback; for example, the main MCU of the pickup for playing music or the music chip for playing music has the function of processing these marks, which can be decoded When generating the spectrum data of the music section, these marks are recorded in the spectrum data of the music section, and are processed by a single-chip microcomputer chip or a music chip during playback. The value of the combination information of the music section can be placed in the codeword. After the pickup reads one or more codewords, it can be decoded directly according to the values of the combination information of several pieces of music in the one or more codewords to obtain the music section spectrum The data is combined with the obtained music spectrum data to play music (the pickup should have the function of playing music according to the spectrum data mentioned in this paragraph, for example, the MCU of the pickup or the music chip connected to the MCU has the function of playing music according to the spectrum data mentioned in this paragraph) The above mainly refers to the whole-step pronunciation mode during decoding, such as the step-by-step pronunciation mode, each step of decoding obtains the part of the music spectrum data (also the part of the decoding result) and can be used by the MCU according to the music spectrum data. part to pronounce or the MCU sends part of the music spectrum data to the music chip connected to the MCU to pronounce. ('These passages' mentioned in this paragraph refer to the 'some passages' mentioned in the second line of this paragraph)

The following is a description of how the score is put together (from the next paragraph to page 99 of this manual):

The segment combination information refers to a kind of information, which can generally be represented by a binary value, which indicates how to use phonemes to combine the sound of the segment; the value of the segment combination information is formed by encoding, and can be used for decoding to combine music The pronunciation of the segment; the format of the value of the combination information of the segment can be the continuous binary format mentioned repeatedly in this manual or other formats. The "value of the combination information" and "the value of the combination information of the music section" and "the value of the combination information of the music section" and "the value of the combination information indicating the pronunciation of the music section" mentioned in the specification and claims of this application document The value of' is the same as the value of the combination information indicating how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage'.

Each time a music score of a music section is coded with encoding rules to generate a value of music piece joining information, that is, each time a music piece is encoded with coding rules to generate a value of music piece joining information; the following score The technical description of stitching is an example of decoding the value of stitching information of a music segment each time.

The music score of a music section is encoded according to the coding rules to generate the value of the music piece combination information, and the value of the music piece combination information is decoded according to the decoding rules to broadcast the pronunciation of the music piece.

The value of the combined information that represents how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage mentioned in this application document actually refers to a value that indicates how to use multiple phonemes to combine the combined information of the pronunciation of the passage. Any of the multiple phonemes A phoneme can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information (for example, its phoneme number can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information), and these multiple phonemes are the phonemes used for the pronunciation of the combined segment.

A phoneme is a collection of information. The phonemes used for merging must contain the information of one or more sounds, and the types of phonemes can generally be the following types (the phonemes used for merging can also be of other types, of course, these other types of phonemes should also contain one or more phonemes) information for multiple tones):

Type 1: A phoneme includes the length value of a sound but does not include the pitch value of this sound and does not contain information about other sounds, or the phoneme includes the length value of this sound and the pitch value of this sound but not Contains information of other sounds, in short, this phoneme contains information of one sound and does not contain information of other sounds,

Type 2: A phoneme includes the respective sound length values of multiple sounds (these multiple sounds are pronounced at the same time), and also includes the interval relationship data between the multiple sounds, but does not contain information about other sounds , or this phoneme includes the respective pitch values of the multiple tones and the respective pitch values of the multiple tones, but does not contain information about other tones. information and does not contain information about other sounds,

Type 3: A phoneme includes multiple sounds (there are sounds that are pronounced at different times in the multiple sounds), the respective pronunciation time values of the multiple sounds, the respective sound length values of the multiple sounds, and the intervals between the multiple sounds Relational data, but does not contain information about other sounds, or this phoneme includes the pronunciation time values of the multiple sounds, the sound length values of the multiple sounds, and the pitch values of the multiple sounds, but does not contain Information about other sounds; in short, this phoneme contains information about multiple sounds and does not contain information about other sounds, and there are sounds that are not pronounced at the same time in these multiple sounds,

In the phrase "information about other sounds" in the above paragraphs, "other" is used to modify "sound"; unless otherwise specified, the phonemes mentioned in the following parts of this manual refer to the above three by default. form phonemes. However, in any of the above three phonemes, the information form contained in it may have some equivalent replacement forms, such as type 3 phonemes, where a phoneme includes the respective pronunciation time values of multiple sounds, the respective sound length values of these multiple sounds, The respective pitch values of these multiple tones, then its equivalent replacement form can be: a phoneme includes the respective pronunciation time values of multiple tones, the respective sound length values of these multiple tones, and the mutual relationship between each of these multiple tones The interval relationship data of any one of the multiple tones on the stave has a value of 2; unless otherwise specified when mentioned, the phonemes mentioned in this manual do not involve these equivalent replacement forms by default.

If the combination of sounds in Fig. 16 is defined as a phoneme, two sounds in this phoneme are pronounced at different times.

Generally, information about how many tones are contained in the phoneme can be seen from the information in the phoneme (for example, if the phoneme only contains the length value of two tones, then the information of only two tones in the phoneme can generally be deduced according to the agreement) , and the equivalent form can also be used, and some BITs are placed in the phoneme to indicate how many tones are contained in the phoneme. For example, binary 3 is used to indicate that the phoneme contains 3 tones; For any phoneme mentioned in the manual, the default is not to put BIT in this phoneme to indicate how many tones are contained in this phoneme, but how many tones are contained in this phoneme can be seen from the information in this phoneme information as an example.

The phoneme contains the information of several tones, and the phoneme may not include the pitch value of any one of the several tones, or may include the pitch value of each of the several tones or the respective pitch values of some of the tones , the phonemes defined in the following encoding rule examples and decoding rule examples in this manual do not include the pitch value of any tone, and the same is true for the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information involved in the following encoding examples and decoding examples. (the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information do not include the pitch value of any tone).

The information contained in the phoneme can be various, and the form of the phoneme can also be various; the phoneme can only contain the information of several sounds (other than that, there is no other additional information in the phoneme), the above type 1 , Type 2, and Type 3 phonemes can be the case; the phoneme can also contain both the information of several sounds and other additional information (other additional information such as rhythm information, mode, clef information, timbre information of this phoneme and sound intensity information, operation information involved in stitching together, etc., one or more), the above type 1, type 2, and type 3 phonemes can be this case; the following coding rules and decoding rules are examples and coding The phonemes involved in the example and the decoding example are all based on the example that the phoneme only contains information of several tones without other additional information, and the phonemes involved are all based on the example that the phoneme is a combination of sounds.

When phonemes are used to combine the pronunciation of a section, it can be all phonemes, or multiple phonemes and some other additional information (other additional information such as the rhythm of the coded section, mode, clef information, the number of a certain phoneme) Timbre information, sound intensity information, operation information involved in stitching, etc.), if there is no special meaning when it is mentioned, the following encoding examples and decoding examples in this manual mention the use of phonemes to stitch the pronunciation of segments, and the default is to use To a plurality of phonemes and some other additional information (some other additional information such as the rhythm information of the encoded music section).

The definition of a sound combination containing one sound as a phoneme (also can be said that this phoneme is this sound, or it can be said that this phoneme is this sound combination) said everywhere in this manual actually means that this phoneme contains this Tone information, specifically, this phoneme only contains the sound length value of this sound (there is no other information in the phoneme), or this phoneme only contains the sound length value and pitch value of this sound (there is no other information in the phoneme) ; This instruction manual is defined as a phoneme (it can also be said that this phoneme is exactly this tone combination) that a sound combination containing a plurality of sounds is said everywhere in this manual, actually means that this phoneme only includes a plurality of sounds in this tone combination ( This tone combination only includes the respective pronunciation time values of these multiple tones) and the respective sound length values of these multiple tones and the interval relationship data between each of these multiple tones (there is no other information in the phoneme), or This phoneme only includes the pronunciation time values of the multiple sounds in the sound combination and the respective sound length values of the multiple sounds and the respective pitch values of the multiple sounds (there is no other information in the phoneme).

The sound combination mentioned in this application document has a definite actual pitch value for each sound contained in it, but if the sound combination is defined as a phoneme, the phoneme may contain all or part of the sound combination. The respective pitch values may not include the pitch value of any tone in this tone combination. A sound combination can contain one or more sounds.

In the encoding rules and decoding rules, the phonemes used for splicing are generally given phoneme numbers. When encoding rules are used to encode the value of the splicing information, the phoneme numbers are generally used to represent the phonemes, and generally unique phoneme numbers are used to represent represents a phoneme. Even in the encoding rules, different phoneme numbers can be assigned to the same phoneme. When encoding the value of the combined information, according to different application needs or different application occasions, different phoneme numbers can be used to represent the same phoneme. Unless otherwise specified, this manual Everywhere is an example of assigning unique phoneme numbers to each phoneme in the encoding rules (of course, different phoneme numbers are different). Similarly, different phoneme numbers can be assigned to the same phoneme in the decoding rules. When decoding the value of , when required by different applications or in different application occasions, it may be encountered that different phoneme numbers are used to represent the same phoneme in the value of the combined information, and the decoding can be handled accordingly. Unless otherwise specified, each part of this manual The place is an example where a unique phoneme number is assigned to each phoneme in the decoding rule (of course, different phonemes have different phoneme numbers).

The phonemes mentioned in the paragraph starting with "Music segment information refers to a kind of information" on page 20 of this manual to the previous paragraph generally refer to the phonemes defined in the encoding rules and the phonemes defined in the decoding rules, from The phonemes that can be directly obtained in the value of the combined information are equivalent to those information sets of the phonemes in the value of the combined information.

The pronunciation time value and sound length value in a phoneme are generally measured in beats, and for example, a phoneme has both pronunciation time value and sound length value, and both the pronunciation time value and the sound length value are measured in beats , the beat standard for measuring the pronunciation time value is generally the same as the beat standard for measuring the sound length value. The pronunciation time value and the sound length value in a phoneme are generally measured by beats, and if a phoneme has both The pronunciation time value also has a sound length value, and both the measurement pronunciation time value and the measurement sound length value are measured by beats, and the beat standard for measuring the pronunciation time value is generally the same as the beat standard for measuring the sound length value. (The standard of beat refers to taking a fraction of a note as a beat, such as taking a quarter note as a beat).

But in different places, the shooting standards may be different, and one standard shooting can be converted into another standard shooting. Generally, the definition of shooting can be divided into these categories: abstract shooting, actual shooting, intermediate shooting, abstract shooting refers to The phonemes defined in the encoding rules and decoding rules and the value of the combined information are equivalent to the defined phonemes, involving the defined beats, and the actual beat refers to the actual beat used by the encoded segment (generally, only one actual beat is used for the encoded segment) The standard of shooting), the intermediate shooting is used as a transitional shooting in the decoding process. Generally, the standard of the abstract shooting can be converted into the standard of the intermediate shooting, and after some processing, the standard of the intermediate shooting can be converted into the standard of the actual shooting.

When decoding, it may involve the conversion of the beat standard, and if the standard of the abstract beat in the phoneme is the same as the actual beat standard of the music section (for example, the quarter note is regarded as a beat), then generally there is no need to convert, but If the standard of the abstract beat in the phoneme is different from the standard of the actual beat of the passage (for example, one regards a 4th note as a beat, and the other regards a 2nd note as a beat), then it is generally necessary to convert the standard of the abstract beat into an actual beat. The standard of beat (you can also consider converting the actual beat standard of the passage into the standard of abstract beat. For example, each phoneme that is pronounced in the merged passage uses this abstract beat standard, then you can put the value of the merged information of this passage into the value such as The actual shooting standard in the rhythm information in the encoding head has been changed, for example, the original measurement of the number of shots per minute according to the standard of actual shooting should be changed to the current measurement of the number of shots per minute according to the standard of abstract shooting), and from a combined information The standard of the abstract beats in different phonemes directly obtained from the value of the value may also be different. Generally, it is necessary to convert these abstract beat standards into actual beat standards, and if necessary, convert the abstract beat standards into intermediate beat standards. , do some processing, and then convert the intermediate shooting standard into the actual shooting standard. There may be other situations involving the conversion of the shooting standard.

However, when different standards of beats are involved in the decoding process, the standard conversion of the beats may not be performed, as long as they can be identified and processed during decoding. If the beat standard involved in an unlocated or positioned phoneme is converted to another beat standard, then the pronunciation time value (if there is a pronunciation time value) and the sound length value (if any) in the unlocated or positioned phoneme If the sound length value) is obviously generally followed by conversion, such as the beat standard involved in a phoneme is converted to another beat standard, then the pronunciation time value (if there is a pronunciation time value) and the sound length value in this phoneme (If there is a sound length value), it is obvious that it generally needs to be converted. There may be other cases involving transitions.

In this manual, there is no need to convert the beat standard in the decoding process, and the abstract beat and the actual beat involved in the decoding process are the same as the conversion case 1 (this is the case for decoding example 1 and decoding example 2 later in this manual, The actual beat used by the coded passage is a quarter note, and the abstract beat in the phonemes used is also a quarter note), this manual will not use the conversion standard during the decoding process, and Cases involving abstract beats that differ from real beats are referred to as transition cases 4 .

The sound length values mentioned in this manual can generally be measured in beats. For example, the sound length of a sound can be 1 beat, 1/2 beat, 3/4 beat, 1/8 beat, etc. The coding examples at the end of this manual, and the sound length values involved in the decoding examples are measured in beats by default. For example, the sound length of a sound can be 1 beat, 2 beats, 1/8th of a beat, etc.

The phonemes defined in the coding rules and decoding rules and the sound lengths involved in the information sets that are equivalent to phonemes in the value of the combined information are generally measured by the beat defined by agreement, for example, there is a beat defined in the coding rules standard (such as defining a quarter note as a beat), the sound length value of each phoneme defined in this encoding rule is measured by this beat (that is, an abstract beat), and defined in the decoding rule specifically corresponding to this encoding rule The beat standard is the same as the beat standard defined in the encoding rule. The sound length value in each phoneme defined in the decoding rule is measured by this beat (that is, the abstract beat), and the encoding rule is used according to this decoding rule When the value of the mosaic information generated by encoding is decoded, according to the definition of the actual beat actually used by the coded section (referring to treat a fraction of a note as a beat), the phoneme in the value of the mosaic information can be represented as an abstract beat. The measured sound length value and the sound length value measured by the abstract beat in the decoded phoneme (the phoneme is generally obtained by processing the phoneme, so the sound length value measured by the abstract beat in the phoneme may be Copy it into the quasi-phoneme), and convert it into the sound length value measured by the actual beat. For example, the abstract beat is to regard the 4th note as a beat, and the actual beat is to regard the 2nd note as a beat, such as the abstract beat. The sound length value is 1 (1 beat), so the sound length value measured according to the actual beat is 0.5 (0.5 beats). Of course, there are many forms of how to define and use the sound length value and how to convert the sound length value in practice. Need to choose what form to use. In this specification, the situation described in this paragraph is referred to as conversion situation 2.

In addition, multiple different beat standards can be defined in the coding rules. For example, the sound length value in some defined phonemes is based on a certain beat standard (for example, a quarter note is regarded as a beat), and in other defined phonemes The sound length value is based on the standard of another beat (for example, the 8th note is regarded as a beat). The beat mentioned in the above two sentences is an abstract beat. This encoding rule is specifically corresponding to the definition of the beat in the decoding rule. According to this decoding rule When decoding the value of the mosaic information generated by encoding with this encoding rule, and then according to the definition of the actual beat actually used by the coded section (referring to treat a fraction of a note as a beat), the phoneme in the value of the mosaic information can be The sound length value measured by the abstract beat in the phoneme and the sound length value measured by the abstract beat in the decoded phoneme (the phoneme is generally obtained by processing the phoneme, so the sound length value in the phoneme is measured by the abstract beat The sound length value may be copied into the class phoneme), converted into the sound length value measured by the actual beat, and the conversion situation may be different for different phonemes (because the beat standard used for the sound length value in different phonemes may be different), for different types of phonemes, the conversion situation may be different (because the beat standards used by the sound length values in different phonemes may be different, which may cause different beat standards for the sound length values in different phonemes), for example The abstract beat is to regard the 4th note as a beat, and the actual beat is to regard the 2nd note as a beat. If the sound length value measured according to the abstract beat is 1 (1 beat), then the sound length value measured according to the actual beat is 0.5 (0.5 beats), of course, there are many forms of how to define and use the sound length value and how to convert the sound length value, and you can choose which form to use according to your needs. In this specification, the situation described in this paragraph is referred to as conversion situation 3.

In addition to the above conversion situation 1, conversion situation 2, conversion situation 3, and conversion situation 4, there may be other conversion situations.

Regarding the respective pronunciation time values of multiple sounds in a phoneme, the pronunciation time values are generally defined according to the agreement, such as measuring the pronunciation time value by an abstract beat (and an abstract beat can be a 4th note, a 2nd note, an 8th note, etc. ), the sound (maybe silent) pronounced at the first moment (that is, the first) in the phoneme, its pronunciation time value is 0, and then, for example, the sound that is defined as the next sound is 2 beats behind the first moment (abstract beat) , then the pronunciation moment value of the latter sound is 2, and the encoding rule and the decoding rule relate to the sound in each phoneme defined in this way to determine its pronunciation moment value. In the decoding process, if the standard of the beat involved in the unlocated or positioned phoneme is converted, the value of each pronunciation moment in the unlocated or positioned phoneme may also be converted accordingly (for example, the standard of the beat is changed from the 4 of the abstract beat. It is a beat that one beat of fen note is changed into 2 fen note, and then the pronunciation moment value that is 1 will change into 0.5) originally, like the above-mentioned conversion situation 3, conversion situation 4, or other conversion situations are all like this. If a phoneme contains the information of multiple tones, and the pronunciation time values of two tones among the multiple tones are different, then these two tones can be called pronunciations stimulated at different time points.

The pronunciation time value of the defined sound in the phoneme (this phoneme contains information about multiple tones) is not the same as the pronunciation time value of the segment involved in decoding (such as the pronunciation time value of the segment obtained by decoding in the following decoding example) The same thing, the pronunciation time value of the defined sound in the phoneme is generally only measured by beat (abstract beat), and generally the time starting point is the first pronounced sound in the phoneme, such as the pronunciation of the first pronounced sound The time value can be set to 0, and then every subsequent sound is delayed by 1 beat (the delay here is delayed from the pronunciation time of the first pronounced sound), the pronunciation time value of this sound is just increased by 1, and every delay is 1/2 beat (delay here is delayed from the pronunciation time of the first sound), the pronunciation time value of this sound is just added by 0.5, and the music section pronunciation time value involved in decoding can be adjusted for the beat (generally the actual beat) Measurement or measurement for the actual time, and generally take the moment of the first sound of the section as the starting point of the time, and it is necessary to calculate the number of beats or time between each pronunciation time and the starting point of the time, as in the aforementioned conversion situation 1 , conversion situation 2, conversion situation 3, conversion situation 4, or other conversion situations are all like this, but when decoding, to get the pronunciation time value of the music section of the tone in the section, generally the defined sound in the phoneme is used The pronunciation time value is obtained by waiting. For any type of phoneme (or positioned phoneme) obtained by decoding, if the pronunciation time value of the music segment involved is not measured by the actual beat but by a certain intermediate beat, then the pronunciation is generally converted to the actual beat. Correspondingly, the pronunciation time value of the passage involved in this type of phoneme (or positioned phoneme) will be converted accordingly, and correspondingly the sound length value in this type of phoneme (or positioned phoneme) will generally also be converted accordingly.

And the pronunciation moment value of the sound in the class phoneme that decoding obtains, generally only use beat (the standard that beats can be various standards, such as abstract beat, middle beat, actual beat etc.) to measure, and it can be according to when decoding It needs to agree on its form, such as the pronunciation time value of the sound in the phoneme, which can be the time starting point of the first sound pronounced in the phoneme (in this case, the phoneme contains information of multiple sounds), such as the first The pronunciation time value of the sound that is pronounced can be set as 0, and then for example, the following sound is delayed by 1 beat (the delay here is delayed from the pronunciation time of the first pronounced sound), and the pronunciation time value of this sound is just increased by 1. Every delay of 1/2 beat (the delay here is to delay from the pronunciation time of the first pronounced sound), the pronunciation time value of this sound is just added by 0.5, as the standard of the beat involved in the class phoneme is converted, then still This method is used to represent the pronunciation time value in the class phoneme, but the value of each pronunciation time value generally needs to be converted accordingly (for example, the standard of beat is changed from a 4th note to a 2nd note, which is originally The pronunciation time value of 1 will be changed to 0.5), in this case, the phoneme obtained by decoding is generally used for the combination of the following steps; it can also be the time starting point of the sound that is first pronounced in the music section, in this case The pronunciation time value of each sound in the class phoneme (that is, the music section pronunciation time value), is exactly the value of the duration between the time of each sound pronunciation in the class phoneme and the first sound of the music section (this The phoneme of the situation class contains information of only one sound or information of multiple sounds), which is usually measured by actual beats. In this case, the information obtained from the previous decoding is generally combined to determine the pronunciation of each sound in this class of phonemes. The number of beats between the moment of the music segment and the moment of the sound that is first pronounced in the section, this situation is suitable for the above-mentioned conversion situation 1, conversion situation 2, conversion situation 3, conversion situation 4, or other conversion situations, this situation is generally It is to directly pronounce the phoneme obtained by decoding; it can also use the moment when any sound in the paragraph is pronounced as the starting point of the time, and the pronunciation time value of each sound in the phoneme is the time when each sound in the phoneme is pronounced The value of the duration between the starting point of this moment (in this case, the information of only one tone or the information of multiple tones in the phoneme), usually in beat (the standard of beat can be various standards, such as abstract beat , middle beat, actual beat, etc.) to measure, in this case, it is generally necessary to synthesize the information obtained from the previous decoding to determine the number of beats from the moment when each sound in this type of phoneme is pronounced to the starting point of this moment, in this case It is suitable for the above-mentioned conversion situation 1, conversion situation 2, conversion situation 3, conversion situation 4, or other conversion situations. In this case, the pronunciation time value of each sound in this type of phoneme obtained by decoding can also be converted into a paragraph according to the situation. Pronunciation moment value.

And for a positioned phoneme, it can also be processed into the pronunciation time value of the sound it contains and also can be similar to the situation of the above-mentioned class of phonemes, and the moment of the sound that is first pronounced in the positioned phoneme can be used as the time starting point , it is also possible to use the moment of the sound that is first pronounced in the music section as the starting point of the time, or the time when any sound is pronounced in the music section to be used as the starting point of the time to measure the pronunciation time value of the sound in the positioned phoneme.

The actual beats involved in the narrations of beats, sound length values and pronunciation time values in the above paragraphs are all based on the standard that only one beat is used in the coded paragraph (the standard of the beat is not changed in the coded paragraph) This is also the case in the encoding rule examples and decoding rule examples and encoding examples and decoding examples described later in this manual, all of which use the standard of using only one beat in the encoded music section as an example. If there is a situation of changing the standard of the beat in the coded musical section, it can still be described in the above paragraphs (including the standard conversion of each beat can be carried out for the convenience of processing), but when the standard conversion of the beat is involved, it may be possible Some beat standards need to be converted into a certain actual beat standard, and some other beat standards need to be converted into another actual beat standard, but the change of the sound length value and the pronunciation time value involved in each conversion The situation is all respectively as above-mentioned paragraph when there is only the change of the sound length value involved in the standard conversion of the beat when there is only one beat standard, and the situation of the change of the pronunciation time value, the calculation starts from the beginning of the music paragraph as the time point The value of the number of beats between the moment of the sound (or from the moment when any sound is pronounced in the paragraph as the starting point of the moment) to the pronunciation moment value of the sound in the class phoneme (or unlocated phoneme or positioned phoneme), You can also refer to the above, just know that different places in the coded section have different beat standards.

As for the above-mentioned decoding, it is generally necessary to synthesize the information obtained from the previous decoding to determine the number of beats from the moment when each sound in this class of phonemes is pronounced to the moment when the first sound of the music section is pronounced (this paragraph is hereinafter referred to as this class) The phoneme is the current class phoneme), and its processing method is generally: for a sound track, see from the beginning of the musical section to the current class phoneme, which phonemes and phoneme-like pronunciations are in the middle (this sentence and the above 3 sentences are suitable for decoding Use the whole-step pronunciation method and the step-by-step pronunciation method. During the step-by-step pronunciation method, it depends on what phonemes and phoneme-like pronunciations there are in this channel in each step from the beginning of the paragraph to the step of processing the current class of phonemes here), these phonemes and class Phonemes are all the phonemes and phonemes pronounced in front of the current phoneme in this channel. Look at these phonemes and phonemes (excluding the current phoneme) in the order of pronunciation. For any phoneme (positioned or unlocated), look at its The sound of last pronunciation (as finally having multiple sound pronunciations at the same time, then get the longest sound in these multiple sounds), get the sound length value of this sound, and use the pronunciation moment value of this sound as a result (this sentence What is said outside the brackets is the premise that the pronunciation time value of this sound is the first pronunciation time of this phoneme as the starting point of the time; if the pronunciation time value of this sound is not the first pronunciation time of this phoneme as the time starting point, then use the pronunciation time value of this sound minus the pronunciation time value of the first pronunciation time of this phoneme as the result mentioned here), add this result and the sound length value of this sound to get the phoneme The duration of the pronunciation of all the sounds (usually measured by beat), the above sentences are based on the information that contains multiple sounds in the phoneme (such as the type 2 and type 3 phonemes mentioned above, the phonemes in brackets here are Refers to the phoneme defined by the codec rule), for the case where the phoneme contains only one sound information (such as the type 1 phoneme mentioned above, the phoneme mentioned in the brackets here refers to the phoneme defined by the codec rule), the phoneme in the phoneme The long value is the duration of all sounds of the phoneme (generally measured by beats), and the duration of all sounds contained in it can also be calculated as above for the positioned or unlocated phonemes (generally measured by beats) , in this way, add up all the phonemes pronounced in front of the current phoneme in this channel and the respective pronunciation durations of the phoneme, which is the time occupied by the pronunciation in front of the current phoneme in this channel (usually measured by beat), thus also get The pronunciation time value of the first utterance of the current class phoneme, and the difference between the pronunciation time values between the sounds in the current class phoneme can be obtained to the first pronunciation time of each sound in the current class phoneme The time between the moments of the sound (generally measured by beat; the current class phoneme contains information of multiple sounds), also obtains the pronunciation moment value of each tone in the current class phoneme. In the above calculations, it is generally necessary to pay attention to whether the measurement units involved in each data (such as the shooting standard) are consistent. If they are not consistent, they generally need to be converted into consistency. The above principle of calculating the pronunciation moment value of each tone in the class phoneme is also suitable for calculating the pronunciation moment value of each tone in the positioned phoneme, that is, when decoding, the information obtained by comprehensively decoding in front is determined from The number of beats between the moment when each sound in the current phoneme is pronounced and the moment when the sound is first pronounced in the music section can also be processed as described above in this paragraph, and it is also suitable for decoding with a full-step pronunciation method and a step-by-step pronunciation method of. In each decoding example (decoding example 1 and decoding example 2) in the following description of this manual, the musical section pronunciation time value of the calculated sound can be calculated as described in this paragraph. (The standard of the beats mentioned in this paragraph can be various standards, such as abstract beats, intermediate beats, actual beats, etc.; unless otherwise specified, the default phonemes mentioned in this paragraph are unlocated or positioned phonemes)

For the above-mentioned decoding, it is generally necessary to synthesize the information obtained from the previous decoding to determine the number of beats from the moment of pronunciation of each sound in this class of phonemes to the moment of pronunciation of any tone in the music section (this paragraph is hereinafter referred to as this class of phonemes) is the current class phoneme), which is also similar to that described in the previous paragraph. Generally, the sound with the longest sound length among all the sounds pronounced at the last moment in the phoneme or phoneme where any sound is located is subtracted from the pronunciation time value of this sound The pronunciation time value of any sound, plus the sound length of the last sound is worth a result (the above sentences are based on the fact that this sound is not the last pronunciation in the phoneme or phoneme it is in, if this sound is the last pronunciation , that is, the sound length value of the sound with the longest sound length among all the sounds pronounced at the last moment in the phoneme or phoneme where this sound is located is taken as the result), and this result is added to the phoneme or phoneme of this vocal tract Each phoneme and class phoneme between the current class phoneme and the respective pronunciation duration of the class phoneme (this sentence is suitable for decoding with a whole-step pronunciation method and a step-by-step pronunciation method, and the step-by-step pronunciation method depends on any tone from the preceding paragraph Pronunciation moment to here to deal with the current class phoneme this step (what phonemes and phoneme pronunciations are there in this channel) is the pronunciation time value of the first pronunciation of the current class phoneme, and can be based on the current class phoneme between each sound The time difference between the pronunciation time value of each sound in the current class phoneme and the time between the time of the pronunciation of any one of the above-mentioned sounds (generally measured by beat; here the current class phoneme is the information containing multiple sounds ), also obtain the pronunciation time value of each sound in the current class phoneme; generally also pay attention to whether the unit of measurement (such as the standard of clapping) involved in each data is consistent during the above calculations, and generally need to be converted into consistency as inconsistent. The principle of calculating the pronunciation time value of each sound in the class phoneme above this paragraph is also suitable for calculating the pronunciation time value of each sound in the positioned phoneme (taking the time when a certain sound is pronounced in the music section as the time starting point), that is When decoding, the information obtained by the previous decoding is integrated to determine the number of beats from the moment when each sound in the current phoneme is pronounced to the moment when any sound is pronounced in the music section. It can also be processed as described above in this paragraph, and it is also suitable for decoding Use the whole-step pronunciation method and the step-by-step pronunciation method. (The standard of the beats mentioned in this paragraph can be various standards, such as abstract beats, intermediate beats, actual beats, etc.; unless otherwise specified, the default phonemes mentioned in this paragraph are unlocated or positioned phonemes)

The above two paragraphs are for one channel at a time. The 'these phonemes and phonemes' mentioned in the last two paragraphs may only include a few phonemes, or only a few phonemes, or even neither phonemes nor phonemes (the cumulative pronunciation duration is 0, such as The current class phoneme is exactly the first pronunciation of the music section), when adding up the duration of the pronunciation, the duration of the pronunciation of the phoneme will not be calculated if there is no phoneme, and the duration of the pronunciation of the phoneme will not be calculated if there is no class phoneme; similarly, the previous paragraph mentioned 'Each phoneme and phoneme' may only include several phonemes, or only several phonemes, or even neither phoneme nor phoneme (the cumulative pronunciation duration is 0, such as the current phoneme is music segment first pronounced), when accumulating the duration of the pronunciation, the duration of the pronunciation of the phoneme is not calculated without the phoneme, and the duration of the pronunciation of the phoneme is not calculated without the phoneme. (Unless otherwise specified at the time of mention, phonemes mentioned throughout this paragraph default to unlocated or located phonemes)

In the value of the combined information, some BITs can also be specially placed to modify the standard of the beat, determine the standard of the beat, and convert the beat to the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information or the phonemes that can be obtained during the decoding process during decoding. These operations can be regarded as a form of flattening related processing.

There may be multiple sounds at the same time in the passage, and the length values of these multiple sounds are not all the same. The processing is actually nothing special. If there is such a situation in the sound combination, then define the sound combination as a phoneme When it is time, it is still possible to record the pronunciation time value of each sound in the sound combination and the sound length value of each sound (regardless of whether the sound length values of different sounds pronounced at the same time have the same relationship), when modifying unlocated or positioned phonemes , it is also possible to add and delete the sound whose sound length is different from that of other sounds at a certain pronunciation moment. The long value and the like can be used for corresponding pronunciation operations; the examples of encoding rules and decoding rules described later in this specification can handle the above-mentioned situations in this way.

If there is no other intention when mentioning it, and it cannot be deduced from the context of the mention (for example, there is another intention when "converting the standard of the beat" is used, that is, the beat mentioned here does not refer specifically to abstract beats), this manual The 'beat' mentioned in the following places refers to the abstract beat involved in the phoneme definition by default.

The other additional information mentioned in this application document refers to the timbre information of the sound, the sound intensity information, the rhythm information (the rhythm information includes information such as how long each actual beat is), the mode information, the clef information, and the operations involved in stitching Information, etc., any of these additional information may be placed in the phoneme, or it may be outside the phoneme and placed in the value of the combined information to be used when combining, and for multiple unlocated or positioned phonemes (there are other additional information in the phoneme) to carry out the following sequential splicing, interweaving and splicing, copy processing etc. to obtain the quasi-phoneme, then those other additional information in the multiple unlocated or positioned phonemes can continue to exist in the obtained quasi-phoneme For example, it is used to indicate which sounds in the class phoneme are which sounds, etc.; when assembling, the unlocated or positioned phoneme can also be processed to process the additional information placed in the unlocated or positioned phoneme, such as the unlocated or positioned phoneme. The timbre information in the positioned phoneme can be modified, and the unlocated or positioned phoneme can also be processed to process the additional information placed in the unlocated or positioned phoneme, such as the unlocated or positioned phoneme. The timbre information in the phoneme is modified, and the operation information (belonging to other additional information) in the unlocated or located phoneme can be used to perform corresponding operations during the combination (such as controlling what to do in each combination step during the combination, or changing the mode) , rhythm, or according to the operation information to complete the processing with the form of combination, combination of related processing forms, etc.), the combination can be done according to the operation information (belonging to other additional information) in the unlocated or positioned phoneme. Corresponding operations (such as controlling what to do in each merging step during merging, or changing the mode, rhythm, or completing the processing with group merging forms, merging related processing forms, etc. according to the operation information); For example, the rhythm information, mode, and clef information (rhythm information, mode information, and clef information are other additional information) of all channels of the coded music section in the encoding header of the value of the combined information are combined with phonemes to obtain The results together form the decoding result for the playback of the music segment.

If a phoneme contains other additional information, it may contain one or more of such information as timbre information, pitch information, rhythm information, mode information, clef information, operation information involved in stitching, etc., and If it contains multiple words, then various additional information can be used for the processing involved in the combination; if there are other additional information in the value of the combination information (not referring to the phoneme corresponding to the phoneme number), it may be that there is For example, one or more of the timbre information, sound intensity information, rhythm information, mode information, clef information, operation information involved in combination, etc., and if there are multiple kinds of information, then various The additional information is used separately for stitching-involved processing.

The timbre information in a phoneme generally refers to the timbre information of the tone in the phoneme.

Other additional information contained in the phoneme is generally used for the splicing process of the sound channel where the phoneme is located (even for the phoneme). For example, the timbre information in the phoneme generally refers to the sound in the phoneme. Timbre information, other additional information contained in the phoneme, can also be used for the stitching process of one or more channels including the channel other than the channel where the phoneme is located, such as the operation information in the phoneme, It can be used only for the combination processing of the channel where the phoneme is located during the combination, or it can also be used for the combination processing of the channels other than the channel where the phoneme is located during the combination.

For the value of the combination information indicating how to use multiple phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage, it can be that there is no other additional information in each of the multiple phonemes, or it can be in each of the multiple phonemes. all have other additional information, or there may be no other additional information in each phoneme in some of the multiple phonemes, but there is other additional information in each phoneme in the other part of the phonemes, and for In any of the above three cases, there may be no other additional information or other additional information in the value of the combined information (not in the phoneme).

If there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, the "additional information" mentioned in this application document without the modification of "other" in front of it refers to "other additional information" by default; if there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, this The 'operational information' mentioned in various parts of the application documents, which is not modified by 'involving splicing', refers to 'operational information involving splicing' by default.

The operation information in a phoneme can be an operation involving only this phoneme (for example, processing by combining related processing forms), or it can involve this phoneme and other unlocated or positioned phonemes (or other unlocated or positioned phonemes) Phoneme) operations (such as the processing of combining forms, or combining related processing forms, etc.), can also only involve other unlocated or positioned phonemes (or other unlocated or positioned phonemes) operations (such as It is processed in the form of grouping or combining related processing forms). The operation information in a phoneme may even include information about what to do in each step in all steps involved in decoding the value of the entire combined information (this phoneme is placed in the value of the combined information).

For example, for a sound combination, two phonemes can be defined correspondingly, and a phoneme (this phoneme is self-positioning) only contains the information of those sounds in this sound combination (such as the sound length value of each sound, the pitch value of each sound etc.), another phoneme (this phoneme is self-positioning) contains not only the information of those sounds in this sound combination, but also an operation information (copy operation). combination, then put the phoneme number of the previous phoneme in the value of the merged information, if there are several consecutive repetitions of this tone combination in the passage, then put the phoneme number and copy of the latter phoneme in the value of the merged information In this way, after decoding the phoneme number of the following phoneme from the value of the combined information, find the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database according to the phoneme number, take out the copied operation information from the record item, and then press the button of the combined information The number of times of copying behind the phoneme number in the value is used to perform the copying operation (the definition of the phoneme database mentioned here is described later).

(The unlocated or positioned phonemes mentioned below in this paragraph are all changed into unlocated or positioned phonemes, then the following content in this paragraph is still established), when decoding, for any unlocated or positioned phonemes that contain other additional information The phoneme of positioning or positioning can have the following situation in this paragraph: the phoneme that is not positioned or positioned is processed (or the phoneme that is not positioned or positioned is processed with other phonemes or phonemes, etc.) to obtain the phoneme , then other additional information in the unlocated or located phoneme may be copied into the obtained class phoneme, such as the timbre, rhythm and other information in the unlocated or located phoneme. In addition, some other additional information in the unlocated or located phoneme may also be modified and then put into the obtained phoneme, such as modifying the timbre, rhythm and other information before putting it into the obtained phoneme , other additional information placed in the obtained phoneme after these modifications can be used for decoding processing (such as subsequent pronunciation or subsequent splicing processing) after this action (this action refers to the action of obtaining this phoneme).

When pronouncing, if there is timbre information in the locating phoneme or locating phoneme to be used for pronunciation, then generally the sound of the corresponding timbre should be issued according to the timbre information.

The meaning of "using the phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage" mentioned in this application is to be executed by the pickup by default, that is, the pickup uses a plurality of phonemes for processing (the processing includes: combining several phonemes , the phoneme is first modified and then combined with other phonemes, the phoneme is positioned, the phoneme is copied, etc. one or more of these processes) to obtain the pronunciation of the passage.

If there is no special indication when it is mentioned, there is no other meaning in this manual, when describing the technology of combining phonemes, it is mentioned that using phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a period (or similar formulations such as using phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a period, using multiple use multiple phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a segment, and use multiple phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a segment, etc.), the default is to use multiple phonemes to combine all the pronunciations of a segment, and these multiple phonemes are also used to combine the pronunciation of a segment. phoneme.

The value of the combination information that indicates how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a section mentioned in this application document actually refers to the value of the combination information that indicates how to use phonemes to combine all the pronunciations of a section, that is, when the value of the combination information is generated by encoding, It is intended that the decoding rule be decoded according to the value of the combined information to play all the pronunciations of the coded section, but when actually decoding according to the decoding rule, it may decode and play all or part of the pronunciation of the coded section according to the situation.

Use phonemes to assemble the pronunciation of a passage, which generally involves combination operations. The conventional combination method is sequential combination, that is, for example, to arrange two objects together in sequence (any of the two objects mentioned here can be a phoneme , or phoneme, etc., for example, the two objects mentioned here are phonemes, or one is a phoneme obtained by copying the previous phoneme and the other is a phoneme), and the result of this order can be used for pronunciation, such as The sequence of these two objects in the result is converted into pronunciation and played (here the pronunciation of these two objects is in sequence, for example, the pronunciation of these two objects belongs to the same channel and is pronounced in sequence), or It is to convert the two objects in the result into pronunciations and play them out (the pronunciations of these two objects belong to different channels and are pronounced at the same time), or you can combine the results of this order (that is, the order is arranged in the These two objects together) are used for the merging of the merging step after this sequential merging process. Sequential merging can also be to arrange multiple objects together in sequence. There is no other additional information in the objects involved in the sequential merging described above For example, if there are other additional information (such as timbre, rhythm information, and operation information) in the object, it can still be assembled sequentially as described above. The result of the assembly generally also contains these other additional information as agreed (For example, one phoneme contains the information of certain tones and other additional information such as the timbre information of these certain tones, and another phoneme contains the information of other several tones and contains other additional information such as the timbre information of these other tones Timbre information, the result obtained by combining the two phonemes in sequence contains information about certain tones, timbre information about certain tones, and information about other tones and timbres of these other tones. Information), the results obtained by the combination can still be used for pronunciation or for other combinations. The phonemes and phonemes used in the above sequence combination can be positioned or not positioned. The result obtained by the combination can be self-positioned. It can also be without self-positioning; the assembling form involved can also be interweaving and merging, that is, for example, to arrange two objects together in sequence (any of the two objects mentioned here can be a phoneme, or a phoneme-like, etc., For example, the two objects mentioned here are both phonemes, or one is a phoneme obtained by copying the previous phoneme and the other is a phoneme), and the pronunciation of at least one sound in the front object is the pronunciation of a certain sound in the back object (that is, at least one sound in the front object is inserted into the back object), the specific situation may be that the sound in the front object is inserted into the back object and the sound in the back object is inserted into the front object, or it may be only The sound in the front object is inserted into the back object, or it may be that only the sound in the back object is inserted into the front object, etc. When decoding, arrange the front and back two objects together in this way to form a A new phone-like element (any part of this new phone-like element can also be regarded as a phone-like element), and this new phone-like element (or any part thereof, and any part of which can also be regarded as a phone-like element) can be used for pronunciation (such as step-by-step pronunciation Step only sends out the sound of this new class phoneme, or such as this new class phoneme is exactly the whole decoding result that decodes and obtains when decoding with the full-step pronunciation mode and can press all or part of the pronunciation of this new class phoneme playing music section, The new phoneme in the situation mentioned in the above two sentences is self-positioning as an example), it can also be used for the stitching of the stitching steps behind this interweaving stitching, and the interweaving stitching can also be to arrange multiple objects in order Together, they are put together, and after being put together, each of the multiple objects has sounds inserted into other objects in the multiple objects; the phonemes and phonemes used in the above interweaving and stitching are generally all Positioned, but it can also be unlocated, and the result obtained by stitching can be self-positioned or not; for example, Figure 15 shows an example, and 8 phonemes are obtained by interleaving and stitching these two positioned phonemes The combination is just like the combination of the 8 sounds behind the phoneme 56 (3) of channel 2 shown in Figure 14, the first sound of the second positioned phoneme in Figure 15 is inserted into the first one when interweaving and stitching together Go in the phoneme of positioning, before doing interweaving and stitching here, there are two positioned phonemes for interweaving and stitching to determine the upper and lower positions on the staff, that is, the upper and lower positions are as shown in Figure 15; if used for interweaving The objects to be combined are all phonemes. When interweaving and combining, the upper and lower positions of each phoneme used for interweaving and combining are generally determined first, and then the order is followed, and then the interweaving and combining is carried out according to the agreed rules; the coding example 2 and decoding at the end of this manual For the interweaving and stitching involved in Example 2, the upper and lower positions of the two phonemes used for the interweaving and stitching on the stave are determined (that is, the positioning is performed first), and then the interweaving and stitching is carried out. The above description of the objects involved in the interweaving and stitching is an example where there is no other additional information. If there are other additional information (such as timbre, rhythm information, and operation information) in the object, then the interweaving and stitching can still be performed as described above. The results obtained by stitching generally also contain these other additional information as agreed, and the results obtained by stitching can still be used for pronunciation or other stitching; the objects used for interweaving and stitching and the results of interweaving and stitching generally belong to the same channel. The objects used for interleaving and stitching mentioned above in this paragraph and the results obtained by interleaving and stitching are all taken as examples of the same channel; obviously, in the encoded data for encoding and the decoded data for decoding, it is generally necessary to define the used Interweave and combine phonemes to indicate that these phonemes are used for interweaving and combining, and then take corresponding processing when encoding and decoding these phonemes; , can also be the phonemes that are not originally used for interweaving and mosaic) after modification and other processing to perform interweaving and mosaic. Use phonemes to put together the grouping forms involved in the pronunciation of the passages. In addition to the above-mentioned order and interweaving, other grouping forms may also be used. The 'object' mentioned throughout this paragraph may be an unlocated or located phoneme, or a phoneme-like, etc.

The positioning mentioned in this manual refers to the positioning of the upper and lower positions on the staff.

The phonemes involved in the combination forms such as sequence stitching and interweaving stitching (the phonemes mentioned here are not limited to the phonemes defined in the coding rules and decoding rules), can be unlocated, that is, no one is determined to be contained in it. The vertical position of the sound on the staff can also be positioned, that is, the vertical position of each sound contained in it can be determined. The situation of positioning may be that each sound contained in the phoneme itself The pitch value (that is, the phoneme itself is positioned, this application document is called self-positioning), it may also be the upper and lower positions of the phoneme before the phoneme number value of each phoneme in the value of the combined information in the following coding example 1 The value is 1, the up and down position of this phoneme is determined by the value 1 of the upper and lower position of this phoneme, and the up and down position of this phoneme can also be determined in conjunction with the composition of the sound in this phoneme (here, it is also determined according to the sound of the phoneme in the coded section). mode and clef of the road) the pitch value of each sound contained in this phoneme (this application document is referred to as being positioned), and then this positioned phoneme can be used for processing related to splicing; The phonemes used in combination forms such as splicing can be unlocated, that is, the position of any sound contained in it in the vertical direction of the staff has not been determined, or it can be positioned, that is, each sound contained in it has been determined. Where is the sound in the vertical direction of the staff, and the positioning can be self-positioning or being positioned (in this case, the self-positioning and being positioned of the class phoneme are similar to the self-positioning of the above-mentioned phoneme in this section, and the situation of being positioned is similar); The phonemes involved in the relevant processing forms (the phonemes mentioned here are not limited to the phonemes defined in the encoding rules and decoding rules) can be unlocated, that is, it is not determined which of any sound it contains in the vertical direction of the staff The position can also be positioned, that is, it is determined which position of each sound it contains in the vertical direction of the staff, and the positioning can be self-positioned or positioned (in this case, the self-positioning and being positioned of the phoneme are the same as the above-mentioned in this paragraph. The self-positioning of the phonemes involved in the group spelling form is similar to the situation of being positioned); the class phonemes used in the relevant processing forms of each spelling can be unlocated, that is, it is not determined that any sound contained in it is in the stave Which position in the vertical direction can also be positioned, that is, there is a determination of which position in the vertical direction of each sound it contains, and the positioning can be self-positioned or positioned (in this case, the self-positioned and positioned of the class phoneme Similar to the self-positioning of the phonemes involved in the above-mentioned combination form in this paragraph, the situation of being positioned is similar). (The phonemes mentioned in this paragraph contain sound information)

This manual has the agreement in this paragraph, if the phoneme contains information of multiple tones, then the positioned phoneme must have pitch-setting values for each of the multiple tones; if the phoneme contains multiple tones information, the positioned phoneme must have a fixed pitch value for each of these multiple tones.

If no other meaning is specified when mentioned, the positioned phoneme mentioned in this manual can be a self-located phoneme or a positioned phoneme by default; The default phoneme can be a self-positioned phoneme or a localized phoneme; in the result of each combination, if it contains information about several tones, if these tones have their own definite pitch values, Then this result is also regarded as self-localization, if at least one of these several tones has no definite pitch value, then this result is not self-localization but unlocalization.

According to the specific situation, no matter which combination form is used, the data forms involved in its operation can be various. For example, when combining sequentially, two phonemes are used to combine (these two phonemes are not located), and the What is merged is the respective phoneme numbers of the two phonemes, which can be obtained by arranging the phoneme numbers of the two phonemes in sequence (here, the merged result is not self-positioned), or the two phonemes are converted into their respective spectral format data (the phonemes are first positioned and then converted into spectral format data), and the spectral format data of these two phonemes are arranged in order to form a combined result (the combined result is self-positioning), and another example is sequential combination When combining a phoneme and a phoneme-like element, the combination can be the phoneme number of the phoneme and the code name of the phoneme-like element (for example, if the phoneme-like element is copied from another phoneme, then the phoneme number of the other phoneme can be used to As the code name of this phoneme), that can be the result of arranging the phoneme number of this phoneme and the code name of this phoneme in sequence, or converting this phoneme and this phoneme into their respective spectral format data ( Position them first and then convert them into spectral format data), arrange their respective spectral format data sequentially to form a combined result (the combined result is self-positioning), and for example, when combining sequentially, use an unlocated phoneme Combined with a positioned phoneme, the combination can be the phoneme number of the phoneme and the spectral format data of the positioned phoneme, that can be the phoneme number of the phoneme and the spectral format data of the positioned phoneme Arranged in order to form a stitching result (the stitching result is not self-positioning), or convert this phoneme into its spectral format data (first locate the phoneme and then convert it into spectral format data), combine the spectral format data of this phoneme and The spectral format data of this phoneme is arranged in order to form a stitching result (the stitching result is self-positioning), and another example is the result of interleaving stitching (the result is a phoneme), which can be in the form of spectral format data, and can also be interleaved. At the end of the stitching, convert the obtained spectrum format data into one or more phoneme numbers plus the upper and lower position values of these phonemes 3 as the result of interweaving and stitching.

The spectrum format data mentioned in the previous paragraph is the combination of several tones (the combination of several tones is also a combination of tones), and the pitch, length and pronunciation time of each sound in the combination of several tones are recorded by notation And so on, the data formed, and information such as timbre in the positioned phoneme can also be compiled into the spectral format data; when converting the positioned phoneme or positioned phoneme-like into spectral format data, the value of the combined information is generally used The rhythm of the location of the positioned phoneme or the location of the location of the location of the location of the phoneme or the location of the location of the location of the location of the coded section of the phoneme or location of the location of the location of the phoneme or the location of the location of the location of the phoneme (usually in the section of the corresponding channel of the stave), Mode, clef and other information (rhythm, mode, clef and other information can even be in the positioned phoneme or phoneme). In the "combination of several tones" mentioned in this paragraph, "several" modifies the "sound", and the combination of several tones mentioned in this paragraph can be one sound.

For the value of the combination information that represents how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage by encoding according to the coding rules mentioned in this manual, the "how to use the phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage" refers to how to use the phonemes when decoding according to the decoding rules. The pronunciation of the segment is combined, and the decoding is based on the value of the combined information mentioned in the previous two sentences. The decoding rules mentioned in the previous three sentences are specifically corresponding to the encoding rules mentioned in the previous three sentences. If the decoding rules are different in practice Existence (refers to not written on paper, etc.) that also exists theoretically. As for the statement similar to the first sentence of this paragraph in this manual, it should also be interpreted according to this paragraph.

The phonemes used in the decoding process can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information during decoding (without modification, copy operation, and without combination of combined form and other processing) (such as the following encoding example 1 and decoding example 1 relates to the encoding and decoding of the value of the combined information of the music section in Figure 13, the first phoneme 56 in the channel 2 in Figure 13 can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information, that is, directly from the value of the combined information Obtain the phoneme number of the first phoneme 56 in the sound channel 2 in Fig. 13, those sounds behind the sound channel 2 are obtained by duplicating the previous sounds, and those behind the sound channel 2 cannot be directly obtained from the value of the combined information during decoding sound), and if some data is transformed like encryption, the transformation result is placed in the value of the combined information (the result of this transformation is all or part of the value of the combined information), and it is obtained from the value of the combined information when decoding. Transform the result and perform inverse transformation on the transformation result, one or more phonemes can be obtained from the result of the inverse transformation (for example, one or more phoneme numbers can be taken out from the result of the inversion transformation), then this can also be regarded as the combination information The one or more phonemes can be directly obtained from the value of this paragraph; the phonemes used in the decoding process mentioned above in this paragraph are also the phonemes defined in the decoding rules used in decoding; about the definition of phonemes, phonemes are information Set, when decoding, it is directly obtained from the value of the combined information (directly obtained means that it can be obtained without modification, copy operation, or combination of combination forms, etc. The meaning of direct acquisition mentioned below in this paragraph is the same) It is obtained after processing a phoneme (such as combining related processing forms, changing timbre, etc., the phoneme itself may or may not be self-positioning, and the phoneme has been positioned or not positioned before processing) All of the result is a phoneme, and any part of the result is also a phoneme. When decoding, a plurality of phonemes directly obtained from the value of the combined information are processed (such as processing such as combining with a combination form, and these phonemes can be each themselves. Self-positioning can also not be self-positioning, and these phonemes are respectively positioned or not positioned before processing), all of the results obtained after the result are a class of phonemes, and any part of the result is also a class of phonemes. When decoding, logarithms The class phoneme is processed with several phonemes obtained directly from the value of the combined information (for example, combined in a combined form, or first modifying a certain phoneme and then combined in a combined form). It may or may not be self-positioning, and before processing, these phonemes and phonemes have been positioned or not positioned respectively), and the result obtained after all is a phoneme, and any part of the result is also a phoneme, decoding When processing a phoneme (for example, by combining related processing forms, changing timbre, etc., this phoneme itself can be self-positioned or not, and this phoneme has been positioned or not positioned before processing. ) is all a phoneme, and any part of the result is also a phoneme. When decoding, a plurality of phonemes are processed (for example, combined with a combination of forms, etc., each of these phonemes can be Self-positioning may not be self-positioning, and before processing, these phonemes are positioned separately or not positioned), all of the results obtained after are a phoneme, and any part of the result is also a phoneme. (For example, in the following encoding example 1 and decoding example 1, it involves the encoding and decoding of the value of the mosaic information of the music section in Figure 13, the first phoneme 56 in the channel 2 in Figure 13 can be directly obtained from the value of the mosaic information The phoneme number of the first phoneme 56 in channel 2 in Figure 13 can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information, and the first phoneme 56 in channel 2 in Figure 13 is first positioned and then copied during decoding The following three self-localized phonemes are obtained, and the composition of the sound in each self-localized phoneme is the same as the composition of the sound in the first phoneme 56 in the channel 2 in Fig. 13). A phoneme can be self-localized or not self-localized; a phoneme generally only contains the information of several sounds (such as the composition of a self-positioned phoneme and the composition of a localized phoneme). The same), the phoneme can also be in other forms such as information containing several tones and some other additional information such as timbre information and operation information. The "any part of the result" mentioned above in this paragraph can be a continuous part of the result (for example, if the result is numbered musical notation '135', the continuous part of this result can be numbered musical notation '35'), or the result The discontinuous part (for example, the result is numbered notation '135', the discontinuous part of this result can be the first sound '1' plus the third sound '5' of this result, the numbers in the quotation marks in the brackets are all refers to the simplified notation).

The phonemes mentioned in this specification may contain information of several tones, or may not contain information of any tones (for example, the result only contains the rhythm information of the entire coded section), and such phonemes may still be used later When it is mentioned in this manual that the phoneme is used to pronounce, or when it refers to the sound in the phoneme, or when it refers to the upper and lower positions of the phoneme, it is defaulted that the phoneme contains information of several tones . This instruction manual mentions the combination form everywhere, and when combining the processing of related processing forms, the 'result' mentioned can be regarded as phoneme-like.

Generally, information about how many sounds are included in the phoneme can be seen from the information in the phoneme (for example, the phoneme only contains the sound length value of two tones, then generally it can be deduced that only two phonemes are included in the phoneme according to the agreement. Tone information), the equivalent form can also be adopted, put some BITs in the phoneme to represent the information of how many tones are included in the phoneme, for example, use binary 3 to indicate the information of 3 tones in the phoneme; The phoneme mentioned above in this paragraph is the phoneme that contains the information of the sound; if it is not specified when it is mentioned, any phoneme that contains the information of the sound mentioned in this manual is defaulted to be that there is no phoneme in this phoneme. Put BIT to represent the information of exactly how many tones are included in this class of phonemes, but it can be seen from the information in this class of phonemes that how many tones are included in this class of phonemes as an example.

Do a copy operation on a positioned phoneme, and the copied sounds are placed behind the positioned phoneme (the pitch value of the copied sound is the same as the pitch value of the corresponding sound in the original positioned phoneme) ), the information of those sounds that are copied is the copied phoneme, each sound in this phoneme has a certain pitch value, and this phoneme is self-positioning.

To copy an unlocated phoneme, generally the phoneme number of this phoneme is regarded as the copy result, and the copied phoneme number is the copied phoneme, and each sound in this phoneme has no definite pitch value. This phoneme is not self-positioning; then this phoneme can be positioned (the following sentences describe an example of positioning a phoneme), for example, an upper and lower position value above 1 is placed in the value of the combined information The phoneme obtained in the decoding process is positioned (for example, the phoneme is positioned so that the upper and lower position values of the lowest tone in all sounds pronounced first in this phoneme are the upper and lower position values mentioned outside the brackets in this sentence 1), then according to the mutual interval relationship data of each tone contained in this phoneme and this upper and lower position value (that is, the mutual interval relationship data of each tone contained in that phoneme mentioned above ) to determine the pitch value of each sound in this positioned phoneme, and this just obtains a positioned phoneme. The last few sentences have said that the pitch value of each tone in this positioned phoneme can be determined according to the upper and lower position value 1 and the interval relationship data between the tones contained in this phoneme. When making a determination here Generally also according to the mode and the clef of the channel where this positioned phoneme of the coded section is located, the pitch value of the sound obtained in this way can be the pitch value of the sound, and it can not be determined according to the coded value in addition. The key and clef of the channel in which this localized phoneme-like element of the passage is located, the pitch value obtained in this way can be converted to the actual pitch value of the encoded passage at any time later, unless it can be deduced from the reference For other purposes, as mentioned elsewhere in this manual, the pitch value of each tone in the positioned phoneme is determined according to the upper and lower position values of the positioned phoneme and the interval relationship data between the sounds contained in the phoneme. Such statements can also be understood by default as described in line 9 of this paragraph "a few sentences" to line 13 of this paragraph "actual pitch value".

Carrying out location processing to an unlocated phoneme during merging refers to making each sound in the unlocated phoneme have a pitch value, and as this unlocated phoneme contains multiple sound information, it can be given to the phoneme when merging Set the pitch value of a certain tone in the unlocated phoneme, and combine the interval relationship between each tone in the unlocated phoneme to obtain the pitch value of each tone in the unlocated phoneme; A positioning (self-positioning or being positioned) phoneme is done positioning processing, refers to making each sound in the phoneme of this positioning have a new pitch value, and when the phoneme of this positioning contains the information of multiple sounds, it can be combined Set a new pitch value for a certain tone in this positioned phoneme, and combine the interval relationship between each tone in this positioned phoneme to get the new pitch value of each tone in this positioned phoneme Carrying out location processing to an unlocated class phoneme during splicing refers to making each sound in this unlocated class phoneme have a pitch value, and as this unlocated class phoneme contains information of a plurality of sounds, it can be in When merging, set the pitch value for a certain sound in the unlocated phoneme, and combine the interval relationship between each sound in the unlocated phoneme to obtain the pitch value of each sound in the unlocated phoneme. Pitch value; during splicing, a positioning (self-positioning or being positioned) class phoneme is carried out to locate, and refers to making each sound in the class phoneme of this location have a new pitch value, and as contained in the class phoneme of this location The information of multiple tones can be obtained by setting a new pitch value for a certain sound in the positioned phoneme when merging, and combining the interval relationship between each sound in the positioned phoneme to obtain the positioning The new pitch value of each note in the class phoneme.

An unlocated phoneme can be positioned (the following sentences describe an example of positioning an unlocated phoneme). Phoneme is positioned (for example, positioning this unlocated phoneme is to make the upper and lower position values of the lowest tone in all sounds that are first pronounced in this unlocated phoneme be the upper and lower position value 1 outside the parentheses of this sentence), and then According to this upper and lower position value 1 and the mutual interval relationship data of each sound contained in this unlocated phoneme (the mutual interval relationship data of each sound contained in this unlocated phoneme is also this positioned The mutual interval relationship data of each sound contained in the phoneme) to determine the pitch value of each sound in this located phoneme, and this just obtains a located phoneme. The last few sentences mentioned that the pitch value of each tone in this located phoneme can be determined according to the upper and lower position value 1 and the interval relationship data between each tone contained in this unlocated phoneme, and the determination is made here Generally also according to the mode and clef of the located phoneme of the coded section, the pitch value of the sound obtained in this way can be the pitch value of the sound, and it can also be determined not according to the coded phoneme. The mode and clef of the channel in which this localized phoneme-like element of the passage is located, the pitch value obtained in this way can be converted to the actual pitch value of the encoded passage at any time later, unless it can be deduced from the reference For other purposes, the pitch value of each tone in this positioned phoneme is determined according to the upper and lower position values of the positioned phoneme and the interval relationship data between the sounds contained in the phoneme as mentioned elsewhere in this manual. Such sayings can also be understood as described in the 5th line of this paragraph "a few sentences" to the 10th line of this paragraph "actual pitch value" by default.

When this manual refers to phonemes, phonemes, and various processing (such as sequence stitching, interweaving stitching, and copy processing), the positioning processing involved can be performed multiple times, such as for an unlocated phoneme. Do positioning processing to obtain the positioned phoneme, and then perform a new positioning process on the positioned phoneme again, for example, the pitch of each sound in the positioned phoneme is increased by 2 steps again, and the result is still A localized phoneme; another example is to perform a new localization on a self-localized phoneme to obtain a localized phoneme; another example is to perform one localization operation on a class of phonemes and another localization operation to obtain a The localized phoneme.

The self-positioned phonemes mentioned earlier in this manual, when positioning the unlocated or positioned phonemes, there may be no other additional information or other additional information in these unlocated or positioned phonemes; such as unlocated or positioned If there are other additional information in the phoneme, then process the unlocated or located phoneme (such as processing it by itself or processing it together with other phonemes or phonemes; the processing form can be a combination form or a combination of related processing forms, etc.) And in the obtained phonemes, all or part of these other additional information may also be contained by agreement; the self-positioned phonemes mentioned above in this manual may not have other phonemes involved in these contents when positioning the phonemes. The additional information can also have other additional information; if the unlocated or positioned phoneme contains other additional information, then the unlocated or positioned phoneme is processed (for example, it is processed by itself or together with other phoneme or phoneme) processing; the processing form can be a grouping form or combining related processing forms, etc.), and can also contain all or part of these other additional information as agreed; the various processing mentioned above in this manual (such as sequential combination , interweaving and stitching, and copy processing) to obtain the result that is involved in the content of self-positioning. There may be no other additional information or other additional information in the result.

If an unlocated or positioned phoneme contains other additional information, the other additional information therein will generally not be changed after the unlocated or positioned phoneme is positioned; if an unlocated or positioned phoneme contains other additional information, After the unlocalized or localized phoneme is localized, generally other additional information therein will not be changed.

There are generally clear definitions of phonemes in the encoding rules and decoding rules. On the other hand, the information about several sounds that can be directly obtained from the value of the combination information for combination should be regarded as each Phonemes (of course, the information about several tones to be regarded as phonemes here should have the characteristics of the phonemes defined earlier in this manual), and these information about several tones are generally represented by different numbers in the value of the combined information to represent them respectively (these numbers can also be regarded as phoneme numbers, and the numbering methods of these numbers are generally different from those originally defined as phoneme numbers in the codec rules). "Those" in the "information about several tones" mentioned in this paragraph are modified "information about several tones", and "these" in "the information about several tones" mentioned in this paragraph are modifiers 'Information about several tones'.

The 'combination of several tones' mentioned throughout this application document, 'several' wherein 'several' is modified 'sound', and several can be one, that is, 'combination of several tones' can refer to one sound.

The 'phoneme' and 'phoneme' mentioned in this application document are different concepts.

The pronunciation of the phoneme-joined segment for decoding is divided into one joint step or multiple joint steps to complete the joint. No matter it is one joint step or multiple joint steps, at least one of the joint steps needs to use phonemes. The way to use phonemes can be There are many kinds, such as directly using phonemes for merging, or processing a certain phoneme first (such as modification processing) and then using the phonemes obtained after processing for merging, or positioning a certain phoneme first and then Do the copy operation and then use the phonemes obtained by the copy operation for splicing. You can also take the self-positioned phonemes directly for pronunciation (such as in the step-by-step pronunciation method), or you can locate the unlocated phonemes and then put them together. The obtained positioned phoneme is used for pronunciation (such as in the step-by-step pronunciation mode), etc.; in each step of combining the pronunciation of the segment with the phoneme, in addition to using the phoneme, some other information (other information) may also be used For example, information about how to raise or lower the pitch of a sound in a localized phoneme), and may also use some other additional information (timbre, rhythm, mode, clef information of the coded section , information such as operation information involved in merging). (The 'phoneme' mentioned in this paragraph refers to the phoneme obtained directly from the value of the combined information during decoding; the pronunciation of the combined segment with the phoneme mentioned in this segment refers to the entire pronunciation of the combined segment with the phoneme)

When coding with a certain encoding rule to generate the value of the combination information representing how to use the phoneme to combine the pronunciation of the music section, it is implied that when decoding, the value of the combination information is used to combine the pronunciation of the music section with the phoneme. Some combination steps (even implicitly allowing During decoding, those stitching steps in any set of stitching step schemes in several sets of stitching step schemes can be used, here the meanings of the stitching steps in different stitching step schemes are different), and the decoding rules specially corresponding to this coding rule are used to deal with When the value of this combined information is decoded, it is generally decoded according to the above-mentioned implied combination steps (the decoding rules and encoding rules later in this specification are like this), or according to the above-mentioned sets of combination steps. It is decoded by those stitching steps in a certain set of schemes, but when decoding the value of the stitched information with the decoding rule specially corresponding to this encoding rule or the decoding rule generally corresponding, it may also follow some other stitching steps to be decoded (the above-mentioned implied merging steps are not these other merging steps, and those merging steps in any set of merging step schemes in the aforementioned several sets of merging step schemes are not these other merging steps); And as pronunciation with step-by-step pronunciation mode during decoding, then generally each time (that is, every step) is to obtain a part of the decoding result after one or more stitching steps and take it for pronunciation. The above in this paragraph is aimed at the whole pronunciation of the playing music section during decoding. If it is part of the pronunciation of the playing music section during decoding, it can be directly or modified by those stitching steps used for the entire pronunciation of the playing music section mentioned above. Afterwards, those combining steps used for partial pronunciation of the playing music section, of course, the processing in each joining step is generally changed; compared with using the step-by-step pronunciation method to play the entire pronunciation of the music section when decoding, the step-by-step pronunciation method is used when decoding When playing part of the pronunciation of the music section, it may be that there are fewer stitching steps and some steps are pronounced with less decoding data, or the stitching steps are not reduced but some steps are pronounced with less decoding data, or other situations.

During decoding, each merging step may be a decoding step, or one decoding step contains multiple merging steps, or one merging step is dispersed in multiple decoding steps, or other situations. As for how to define what to do in each stitching step and what to do in each decoding step, this is defined according to needs.

This application document stipulates that when decoding the pronunciation of a phoneme-joined passage, among all the phonemes used in all the joining steps of using the phoneme-joined passage to pronounce, there must be at least one phoneme, and this phoneme contains different pronunciation time values (This is the case with the above-mentioned type 3 phonemes, and this is also the case with the first two phonemes mentioned in the paragraph at the beginning of "unless it is specifically mentioned when it is mentioned, this" on page 49 of this manual); furthermore, this The sheet music combination method mentioned in the application document refers to the value of the combination information (that is, the value of a combination information) indicating how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a section, and any encoding rule is used to encode the combination information. There is at least one phoneme in the phoneme used when the value is involved (the phoneme mentioned here refers to the phoneme in the previous sentence "how to use phonemes to put together the pronunciation of a passage"), and this phoneme contains different pronunciation moment values; When a decoding rule decodes the value of any segment combination information, it involves at least one phoneme in the phonemes used to combine the pronunciation of this segment, and this phoneme contains different pronunciation time values; the phonemes contain different pronunciations Time value, then this phoneme contains information of multiple sounds (the "multiple" mentioned in this sentence and the "multiple" in the "multiple pronunciation time values" mentioned in the next two sentences are not necessarily the same value), the front The different pronunciation time values mentioned in the two sentences mean that a plurality of pronunciation time values are different from each other (because at least two pronunciation time values are to be compared to say that they are different), any pronunciation time value in these multiple pronunciation time values, It must be the pronunciation time value of a certain sound (it may also be the pronunciation time value of other sounds, and the other sounds mentioned here are also sounds in this phoneme), and this certain sound is a sound in this phoneme (that is, how many times this phoneme contains) The information of a sound, this certain sound is one of the multiple sounds, the "many" mentioned in this bracket is not necessarily the same as the "many" in the "multiple pronunciation time values" mentioned earlier in this paragraph is the same value), as one of the multiple pronunciation time values is the pronunciation time value of a sound in this phoneme, another pronunciation time value in these multiple pronunciation time values is another pronunciation time value in this phoneme The pronunciation time value of the sound, then these two sounds must be different sounds in this phoneme; for example, the difference between the pronunciation time value of one pronunciation time value and the other pronunciation time value is 1/16 beat, 1/8 beat, 3/8 beat , 1/4 beat or 1/2 beat, etc.; and if it is a note with a crown sound in a staff, then this note and its crown sound are stimulated at the same time point (same pronunciation time), in the staff Among them, if the sound with the same pitch and the same length is recorded twice consecutively at different horizontal positions on the stave, then these two sounds should be regarded as two sounds excited at different time points (for example, as shown in Figure 8, there are three Pronunciation stimulated at different time points, the three tones in Figure 8 can be defined as a phoneme, and the pronunciation time values of these three tones are all recorded in this phoneme, which contains different pronunciation time values), Figure 13 The rightmost phoneme 56 among the top three phonemes in the middle contains two pronunciations stimulated by different time points (represented by two notes respectively), while the top two phonemes 56 on the left in Fig. 13 6. They all contain only one pronunciation stimulated by one time point; the phoneme mentioned above in this paragraph can include the pronunciation time value of multiple sounds, their respective sound length values, and the interval relationship between each sound The data may also only include the respective pronunciation time values and respective sound length values of multiple sounds, and there may be other situations. The purpose of this paragraph is to distinguish the combination of music scores described in this manual from the usual way of recording music score data, because the way of recording music score data can also be regarded as combining some phonemes , but for any phoneme used, the tones (one or more tones) therein are all excited at the same time point. The excitation mentioned in this paragraph is equivalent to a key action on a key when playing the piano.

Therefore, compared with the usual way of recording music score data, according to the music score combination method described in this manual, the value of the music piece combination information generated by coding according to the coding rules generally has a compression coding effect (for example, in the used phoneme , a phoneme contains information such as the length, pitch, and pronunciation time value of multiple sounds pronounced at different times. A phoneme number is used to represent this phoneme, which is similar to that in the music spectrum data. than, obviously generally saving BIT), correspondingly, when using the decoding rules to decode the value of the combined information according to this segment, it generally has the function of compression decoding (because there is a compression coding function during encoding, it can be regarded as compression during decoding) decoding function).

This application document stipulates that when decoding the pronunciation of a phoneme-joined section, multiple phonemes are used in all the steps of combining the pronunciation of the phoneme-joined section (for example: when decoding, it is directly obtained from the value of the combination information in the combination step 1. For example, the phoneme number of a phoneme is directly obtained from the value of the combination information, and two phonemes are directly obtained from the value of the combination information in the combination step 2. For example, the phoneme numbers of the two phonemes are directly obtained from the value of the combination information. These three The phonemes are all used for segment combination), that is, to combine the pronunciation of the segment with multiple phonemes, so the value of the combined information mentioned in this application document is exactly the value of the combined information indicating how to combine the pronunciation of the segment with multiple phonemes . The "synthesizing the pronunciation of the music section with phonemes" mentioned above in this paragraph is to use the phonemes to combine all the pronunciations of the music section. If only part of the pronunciation of the music section is played during decoding, then it may only be used in all the joining steps of decoding. used to a phoneme. (The 'phoneme' mentioned throughout this paragraph refers to the phoneme obtained directly from the value of the stitched information when decoding).

In encoding and decoding, the mosaic forms involved may be sequential mosaic, interleaved mosaic and so on.

In actual encoding and decoding, some related processing forms of stitching can also be used, such as: 1, there are some phonemes in the phonemes defined in the coding data used by the coding rules (these phonemes can be called basic phonemes), and any basic phoneme , there are some variations. The phonemes defined in the decoding data used in the decoding rules also have these basic phonemes defined in this way. When encoding and generating the value of the combined information, if there is a basic The change form of the phoneme is to record the information of the basic phoneme (such as the phoneme number of the basic phoneme) in the value of the combination information, and also record the information about which change form to choose to combine it. When decoding, you can first base on the value of the combination information to the information of the basic phoneme, and then according to the information about which variation form to choose to combine in the value of the combined information and combined with the decoded data (this decoded data refers to the decoded data mentioned above) to obtain the basic phoneme used Actual change form (the decoding action that this sentence says and the decoding action that last sentence says can be in the same stitching step or be in different stitching steps or other situations), the actual change form (like Phoneme) can be used for pronunciation (for example, one step in the step-by-step pronunciation method only sends out the sound of the actual variation form of the basic phoneme, or such as the actual variation form of the basic phoneme that is obtained is decoded and obtained when the whole-step pronunciation method is used for decoding All of the decoding results of the basic phoneme can be played according to the actual variation of the basic phoneme or part of the pronunciation of the music section. The basic phoneme mentioned in the above two sentences is self-positioning, for example), and can also be used for this processing during decoding. In the following combination, the basic phonemes mentioned above are also the phonemes used to combine the pronunciation of the passage.

2: When encoding generates the value of the combined information, if there is a composition of the tone in a certain section component (combination of exponents of tones) in the encoded section, it is different from that of a certain phoneme (this certain phoneme is in the coded data) Defined in ) after positioning, the sound composition of the located phoneme obtained after positioning is similar but different, so the information of this certain phoneme (such as the phoneme number of this certain phoneme) and the upper and lower positions of this phoneme can be recorded during encoding The value is 1, and also records the difference information between the composition of the sound in this certain section component and the composition of the sound in the positioned phoneme. When decoding, you can directly get the information of this certain phoneme according to the value of the combined information. Get this positioned phoneme with the upper and lower position values of this phoneme (the decoding action of this sentence and the decoding action of the next sentence can be in the same stitching step or in different stitching steps or other situations), It is obtained by combining the composition of the sound in the certain phoneme obtained from the decoded data (the certain phoneme is also defined in the decoded data) and the mode and clef of the channel where the positioned phoneme of the coded segment is located. The pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme, and then according to the difference between the composition of the sound in this certain segment component in the value of the splicing information and the composition of the sound in a certain phoneme that is positioned information to obtain the composition of the sound in this certain piece of music (the certain piece of music obtained here is also called a phoneme) (for example, on the basis of all the sounds in a certain phoneme that is positioned here Add or delete some tones or modify the pitch of some tones to obtain the composition of the tones in this certain section composition. Here, adding and deleting some tones can be adding or deleting some crown tones or non-coronal tones, and the added tones can also be in the new The sound made at the time point, modifying the pitch of some sounds here can be modifying the pitch of some crown sounds or non-crown sounds), and the obtained part of this certain section can be used for pronunciation (such as when the pronunciation is in steps The first step only emits the sound of this certain music section component, or for example, the obtained certain music section component is the whole decoding result obtained by decoding when the whole-step pronunciation method is used, and the music section can be played according to this certain music section component All or part of the pronunciation), it can also be used for the combination of this processing after decoding, where if the phoneme number of the phoneme can be directly obtained in the difference information (for example, if a single sound is defined as a phoneme, a certain phoneme can be obtained in the difference information A phoneme number of this single tone added at the place), then this phoneme can also be regarded as a phoneme that can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information. Phoneme-like to modify (such as deleting a sound at a certain position, adding a sound at a certain position), and the resulting phoneme is also a similar phoneme, which can be used for pronunciation, and can also be used for decoding after this processing the combination of

3: Copying the phoneme, that is, when there is a repeated sound combination in the coded segment (this sound combination is defined as a phoneme), the information of this phoneme is only recorded once in the value of the combined information during encoding (such as the phoneme number of this phoneme), and record the upper and lower position value 1 of this phoneme and some copy information. When decoding, you can directly obtain the recorded information of this phoneme and the upper and lower position value 1 of this phoneme according to the value of the combined information. The phoneme that is located, and then copy the phoneme that is located according to the copy information in the value of the combined information to obtain the phoneme (the phoneme mentioned in this sentence is the copy of the phoneme that is located in this sentence, The decoding action mentioned in this sentence and the decoding action mentioned in the previous sentence can be in the same stitching step or in different stitching steps or other situations), the obtained phoneme is self-positioning, and the obtained phoneme can be used It is used for pronunciation (for example, one step in the step-by-step pronunciation method only sends out the phoneme-like sound obtained), and it can also be used for the stitching after the repeated processing during decoding, and this method can also be improved, that is, both record and copy information, also record the difference information, in order to deal with the similar sound combination in the coded section, also can copy the phoneme obtained in the combination process, the copied phoneme is also the phoneme, the copied phoneme can be used It is used for pronunciation, and can also be used for the stitching after this processing during decoding;

There may also be other combination-related processing forms other than the above three combination-related processing forms (when the above three cases involve phonemes, it is mainly based on the fact that the phoneme only contains the information of several sounds and does not contain other additional information, such as phoneme In addition to the information containing several sounds, there are other additional information such as timbre, which can also modify or copy the positioned or unlocated phoneme, and the modification mentioned here can even modify the positioned or unlocated phoneme. Information such as timbre in the phoneme, and these processed phonemes still have other additional information such as timbre, etc. The processed phoneme can be used for pronunciation or used for subsequent splicing. The processing form mentioned here belongs to this sentence Other collage-related processing forms outside the parentheses), the positioning of phonemes or phoneme-like elements when decoding and collating mentioned above in this manual can also be regarded as a collage-related processing form; the above-mentioned collage-related processing forms are It is useful to modify the phonemes that participate in the combination of positioning or non-location, or to locate and generate phonemes that participate in the combination, such as copying and generating phonemes, or to locate phonemes or phonemes, or other situations. During the above processing forms related to merging, encoding still generates the value of the merging information representing how to use phonemes to merge the pronunciation of the segment, and decoding is to decode the pronunciation according to the value of the merging information indicating how to use phonemes to merging the pronunciation of the segment.

In addition to the above 3 kinds of combination-related processing forms, there may also be some other combination-related processing forms. Zero or several combination forms can be used when combining phonemes to pronounce a music section (the types of combination forms include the aforementioned Sequential splicing, interleaving splicing, and other splicing forms not mentioned in this manual, etc. Other splicing forms may or may not involve the processing of other additional information, and other splicing forms may even only process other additional information. processing, any grouping form may or may not be processed according to the operation information in the unlocated or positioned phoneme or the phoneme-like obtained during decoding) and any grouping form when combining the pronunciation of this music section It can be used multiple times, and 0 or several related processing forms can be used when assembling the pronunciation of this passage (the types of related processing forms include modifying the phonemes mentioned earlier in this specification, and copying the positioned phonemes. , and other combination-related processing forms not mentioned in this manual, etc. Other combination-related processing forms may or may not involve processing other additional information, and other combination-related processing forms may even only perform processing on other additional information processing, any combination-related processing form may or may not be processed according to the operation information in the unlocated or positioned phoneme or the phoneme-like obtained during decoding) and any combination-related The processing form can be used multiple times, the use of 0 mentioned above is not used; for example, put together all the positioned phonemes in sequence, and convert the sequence of these positioned phonemes into pronunciation to form the pronunciation of the segment, and another example can be put Some localized phonemes are interleaved and put together to obtain a self-localized phoneme, and another localized phoneme is modified to obtain another self-localized phoneme, and then the self-localized phoneme obtained in the previous two sentences is used according to its corresponding The pronunciation sequence of the pronunciation is put together, and the sequence of the two self-positioned phonemes in the result of the sequence is converted into pronunciation to form the pronunciation of the segment; even in the decoding process, several phonemes can be used in a certain group spelling form first. Combine to get a phoneme, and then take the obtained phoneme with other phonemes in another combination to get another phoneme, and this other phoneme can be used for pronunciation (such as this other The class phoneme is exactly the whole decoding result obtained by decoding when the whole-step pronunciation mode is used, and the whole or part of the music section can be played according to this other class phoneme. example), can also continue to be used for the stitching of the stitching steps behind this stitching process; how to stitch together by 0 or several combination forms and zero or several stitching related processing forms can also be referred to later in this specification Encoding Example 1 and Decoding Example 1, Encoding Example 2 and Decoding Example 2. Combining a music section pronunciation with phonemes described above in this paragraph refers to combining all pronunciations of a music section with phonemes, and forming a music section pronunciation described above in this paragraph refers to forming all pronunciations of a music section. The partial pronunciation of section (when decoding, when playing the partial pronunciation of music section) can obviously be combined with the situation of all the pronunciations of a music section with phonemes as described above by analogy, for forming the partial pronunciation of music section (when decoding, broadcast the partial pronunciation of music section When) obviously can be analogized by the above-mentioned situation of forming all the pronunciations of the music section.

The previous paragraph is for the whole-step pronunciation method when decoding, and the step-by-step pronunciation method is similar to the whole-step pronunciation method. When the step-by-step pronunciation method is used for decoding, 0 types can be used when combining phonemes to pronounce a paragraph. or several combination forms (the types of combination forms include the above-mentioned sequential combination in this specification, interweaving combination, and other combination forms not mentioned in this specification, and other combination forms may or may not involve other additional information. The processing carried out, other combination forms can even only process other additional information, and any combination form can be or not according to the operation information in the unlocated or located phoneme or the phoneme that is obtained during decoding. processing) and any combined form can be used multiple times when assembling the pronunciation of this section, and 0 or several related processing forms can be used when assembling the pronunciation of this section (the types of related processing forms include The modification of phonemes mentioned above in this manual, the copying of positioned phonemes, and other related processing forms of stitching that are not mentioned in this manual, etc., and other related processing forms of stitching may or may not involve the processing of other additional information processing, and other combination-related processing forms may even only process other additional information. Any combination-related processing form may or may not be performed according to the operation information in the unlocated or located phoneme or in the phoneme-like obtained during decoding. Correspondingly processed) and any combination related processing form can be used multiple times when assembling the pronunciation of this piece of music, and the use of 0 mentioned above is not used; for example, when using the step-by-step pronunciation method, you can put the Some phonemes directly obtained from the value of the mosaic information are positioned separately and then interleaved and stitched together to obtain a self-positioned phoneme, and the phoneme is pronounced according to this self-positioned phoneme, and the second step is to put the value from the mosaic information The directly obtained another phoneme is first positioned and then copied to obtain another self-positioned phoneme, and the other phoneme that is positioned and the self-located another phoneme are sequentially combined, and they are combined in this order In the result, this other phoneme and this self-localized another phoneme are pronounced sequentially, so that the pronunciation of the former self-localized phoneme and the pronunciation of this other phoneme and the self-localized other phoneme The pronunciation of a phoneme just forms the pronunciation of a phrase. Combining a music section pronunciation with phonemes described above in this paragraph refers to combining all pronunciations of a music section with phonemes, and forming a music section pronunciation described above in this paragraph refers to forming all pronunciations of a music section. The partial pronunciation of section (when decoding, when playing the partial pronunciation of music section) can obviously be combined with the situation of all the pronunciations of a music section with phonemes as described above by analogy, for forming the partial pronunciation of music section (when decoding, broadcast the partial pronunciation of music section When) obviously can be analogized by the above-mentioned situation of forming all the pronunciations of the music section.

Under normal circumstances, for any phoneme that is positioned (self-located or positioned) for splicing, each sound in this positioned phoneme belongs to the same channel (that is, the phoneme is positioned in this channel, which can be called The phoneme of such location is the monophonic phoneme of location), conventional situation, the phoneme of location that obtains during any splicing, each sound in the phoneme of this location belongs to the same channel (that is, this type of phoneme is If it is located in this channel, it can be said that such a localized phoneme is a class-located monophonic phoneme); sequence stitching, interweaving stitching, copy processing, etc. can all be positioned in the same channel monophonic phonemes (for example, among the two positioned phonemes used for sequential splicing, one positioned phoneme is positioned in channel 1, and the other positioned phoneme is also positioned in channel 1), and the other is also Can be monophonic with localized phonemes positioned in different channels (e.g. one localized phoneme for processing is localized in channel 1, another localized phoneme for processing is localized in channel 2 in) to do sequential stitching, interleaved stitching, etc., and also can use monophonic phonemes positioned in different channels (for example, a positioned phoneme used for processing is positioned in channel 1 Another positioning phoneme used for processing is located in channel 2) to do sequential stitching, interleaved stitching and other processing, and it can also be a monophonic phoneme positioned in a different channel and Positioned monophonic phonemes (for example, one localized phoneme for processing is positioned in channel 1, and another positioned phoneme for processing is positioned in channel 2) for sequential splicing, Interweaving and splicing and other processing, the principles of these processing can refer to the above-mentioned in this manual, all of which are positioned in the same channel. Explanation (in any processing of the above-mentioned order stitching, interweaving stitching, etc. in this manual, the phonemes involved in the positioning default to the monophonic phonemes that are positioned as an example, and the phonemes involved in the positioning default to is the monophonic phoneme that is positioned as an example, and the phonemes that are involved and the phonemes that are positioned are positioned in the same channel as an example by default), the application document says that the phonemes are combined The pronunciation of the passage can be processed with monophonic phonemes positioned in different channels when assembling, or it can be processed with monophonic phonemes positioned in different channels. It can be processed with localized monophonic phonemes and localized monophonic phonemes located in different channels, for example, processing such as sequence stitching, interleaving stitching, and the like. The localized phoneme mentioned in this paragraph may or may not have other additional information in the localized phoneme. If there is other additional information, the other additional information such as operation information can be used for one channel or for multiple voices. Tao's flattening process.

In special cases, if there is a phoneme for positioning (self-positioning or being positioned) for splicing, each sound in the phoneme of this location belongs to different channels (that is, the phoneme is positioned in multiple channels, which can be called like this The localized phoneme is a localized multi-channel phoneme), or if there is a localized phoneme obtained during splicing, each sound in this localized phoneme belongs to a different channel (that is, this type of phoneme is localized in multiple In the channel, it can be said that such a localized phoneme is a localized multi-channel phoneme), and when assembling, it can be processed with several localized multi-channel phonemes, or several localized multi-channel phonemes can be used. It can also be processed by using several positioned multi-channel phonemes and several positioned monophonic phonemes, or it can be processed by using several positioned multi-channel phonemes and several positioned multi-channel phonemes Processing can also be processed by using several positioned multi-channel phonemes and several positioned monophonic phonemes, etc. The processing form can still be sequence stitching, interleaving stitching, copy processing, etc. The processing principle can refer to The foregoing descriptions of this specification all use several positioned monophonic phonemes to do sequence stitching, interweaving stitching, copy processing and other processing elaborations. The use of phonemes in this application document to stitch together the sound of a segment can be done when stitching together. Use localized multi-channel phonemes (may also use other class phonemes, phonemes, localized phonemes, etc.) for processing, or use localized multi-channel phonemes (may also use other class phonemes, Phonemes, positioned phonemes, etc.) are processed, such as processing such as sequence stitching, interleaving stitching, copy processing, etc. The localized phoneme mentioned in this paragraph may or may not have other additional information in the localized phoneme. If there is other additional information, the other additional information such as operation information can be used for one channel or for multiple voices. The combination of the Tao is processed.

The positioned phoneme in this application document belongs to a certain channel, which means that the position of each sound in the positioned phoneme belongs to a certain channel, regardless of whether there is any other additional information in the positioned phoneme; this application The document said that the located phoneme belongs to a certain channel, which means that the positions of the staves of each sound in the located phoneme belong to a certain channel, regardless of whether there is any other additional information in the located phoneme.

This application file has the information that says to comprise one or more sounds in the phoneme everywhere, for any sound in this one or more sounds (as this one or more sounds is exactly a sound, then this any sound is this A tone, such as the one or more tones are multiple tones, then any tone is any tone in the plurality of tones), not necessarily all information about it is included in this phoneme.

Unless otherwise specified when mentioned, the phonemes mentioned in this manual except this paragraph and the previous paragraph refer to type 1, type 2, and type 3 phonemes by default, and some other types of phonemes may be used in practice , other forms of phonemes also contain information about several tones. For example, phonemes include the pronunciation time values of each of the multiple tones, and the interval relationship data between each of the multiple tones, excluding the individual tones of the multiple tones Sound length value (this kind of phoneme contains different pronunciation time values), and the phoneme number of this phoneme can be placed in the value of the combined information, and the sound length values of multiple sounds in this phoneme can be regarded as other information It is also placed in the value of this combined information. When decoding, this phoneme number and the sound length value of these sounds can be combined to obtain a class phoneme (if there are other additional information in this phoneme, then all other additional information in this phoneme will also be included). can be copied into this class of phonemes), the situation mentioned in the above sentences can be regarded as a kind of related processing form when combining phonemes to combine the sound of a section (the related processing form of combining is also mentioned in the front of this manual), and the obtained The phoneme-like can be used for subsequent combination processing, etc. This phoneme can be used for the combination forms such as sequential combination and interweaving combination mentioned above in this specification, as well as the combination forms not mentioned in this specification, and can also be used for the copy processing mentioned above in this specification. , positioning and other related processing forms of combining and other related processing forms not mentioned in this manual. There is also a variant of the above-mentioned situation, that is, the phoneme includes the respective pronunciation time values of multiple tones, and the respective sound length values of these multiple tones, and does not include the interval relationship between each of these multiple tones. Data, and the phoneme number of this phoneme can be placed in the value of the combined information, and the interval relationship data between the multiple sounds in the phoneme is also placed in the value of the combined information as other information. Another example is that the phoneme includes the pronunciation time values of multiple tones, and the interval relationship data between each of the multiple tones, and the respective pitch values of some of the multiple tones do not include the respective pitches of other tones High value, and the respective sound length values of these multiple sounds (this phoneme contains different pronunciation time values), and when decoding and merging, this phoneme can be positioned to obtain a positioned phoneme (such as in this phoneme) If there are other additional information, then all other additional information in this phoneme can generally be copied into this positioned phoneme), and the obtained positioned phoneme can be used for subsequent stitching processing, etc., and this positioned phoneme can be used in this The combination forms such as sequence stitching, interweaving stitching mentioned above in the manual and the stitching forms not mentioned in this manual can also be used in the copy processing, positioning and other stitching related processing forms mentioned earlier in this manual and the stitching related forms not mentioned in this manual processing form. Another example is that the phoneme includes the interval relationship data between each of the multiple tones, and the respective length values of the multiple tones, and does not include the pronunciation time value of any of the multiple tones or only includes the multiple tones The pronunciation time values of the middle part sounds, and the phoneme number of this phoneme can be placed in the value of the combined information, and the pronunciation time values of the multiple sounds in the phoneme can also be placed in the value of the combined information as other information , when decoding, this phoneme number and these pronunciation time values can be combined to obtain a phoneme (if there is other additional information in this phoneme, then all other additional information in this phoneme can also be copied into this phoneme), the above The situation described in a few sentences can be regarded as a combination related processing form when the phoneme is used to combine the pronunciation of a section (the related processing form of combination is also mentioned earlier in this manual), and the obtained phonemes can be used for subsequent combination processing, etc., this The phonemes can be used in the combination forms such as sequential combination and interweaving combination mentioned above in this specification, and the combination forms not mentioned in this specification. The mentioned flattening related processing form. The use of phonemes to assemble the pronunciation of the passage mentioned in this application may include one or more of the situations related to other forms of phonemes mentioned above or not mentioned in this paragraph. The phoneme mentioned in this paragraph refers to the defined phoneme (defined in the encoding rule, or in the decoding rule, or defined in both the encoding rule definition and the decoding rule), or the value placed in the splicing information The information in is regarded as a collection of phonemes. There may be no or several other additional information (any other additional information such as timbre or rhythm information or mode information or operation information, etc.) in the phoneme in each situation mentioned above in this paragraph. For each situation mentioned above in this paragraph The phonemes containing other additional information and the phonemes containing other additional information can be processed according to these other additional information when decoding and merging, and the processing method is the same as that of other additional information mentioned in the previous paragraphs of this specification In a similar way.

When referring to phonemes throughout this manual, if the pronunciation time value in this phoneme is mentioned, it is assumed that this phoneme contains the pronunciation time value of the sound.

Encoding referred to in this manual refers to encoding the music score of the music section according to the encoding rules to generate the value of the combined information, and decoding is the inverse process of encoding, which decodes the value of the combined information according to the decoding rules and plays the music.

With regard to sheet music merging, for different encoding rules, different phoneme definition methods, encoding methods, or the format of the value of the segment merging information may be used, and for different decoding rules, different phoneme definition methods may be used, or decoding way etc.

Different coding rules for different applications (for example, the coding of passages in simple music books and the coding of passages in complex music books are different applications), and different coding rules involve defining the number and types of phonemes used. Different; one encoding rule can encode the values for generating segment combination information for multiple different segments respectively.

Different decoding rules for different applications (for example, the value decoding of the combined information used to represent the pronunciation of a passage in a simple score book and the value decoding of the combined information used to represent the pronunciation of a passage in a complex score book are different applications. Occasions), different decoding rules involve the definition of the number and types of phonemes used may be different; one decoding rule can decode the values of a plurality of different music segment combination information to broadcast their respective pronunciations.

The coding of the segment can be applied to the segment of one channel or multiple channels, and the decoding pronunciation of the value of the combination information of the segment can be applied to one channel or multiple channels.

Apparently, when coding with one coding rule, the same phoneme can generally be used for coding different music sections (here, the coding of different music sections is all done with this coding rule), and when using this coding rule to code different music pieces generated Generally, the same phoneme number is used to represent the same phoneme in the value of the combination information of a segment; when decoding with a decoding rule, the same phoneme can generally be used for combination processing when decoding the values of the combination information of different music segments (here Decoding the values of the combined information of different music segments is done according to this decoding rule).

Obviously, when encoding a music segment according to a coding rule to generate the value of the combined information, generally only a part of phonemes in all the phonemes defined in the coding rule are used, and when decoding the value of a combined information according to a decoding rule, Generally, only some of the phonemes defined in this decoding rule are used.

If the value of a piece of combination information generated by encoding with an encoding rule can be decoded and pronounced by a decoding rule, then the decoding rule and the encoding rule can be specifically or generally corresponding, and the special correspondence means that the decoding rule is specialized It is used to decode and pronounce the value of each piece of information encoded with this encoding rule. Generally, it means that the decoding rule is not specially used to decode and pronounce the value of each piece of information encoded with this encoding rule. The decoding rule can at least decode and pronounce the value of a piece of information generated by encoding with this encoding rule; if a decoding rule corresponds specifically to an encoding rule, then the decoded data used by the decoding rule and the encoded data used by the encoding rule Generally, they are the same or compatible. If a decoding rule generally corresponds to an encoding rule, then the decoded data used by the decoding rule is generally the same or compatible with the encoded data used by the encoding rule.

For an encoding rule, according to its encoding rules (such as defining the phoneme used, etc.), it may be able to encode the value of the combination information for any segment, or it may only be able to encode the value of the combination information for some segments separately , while some music segments cannot be coded separately to generate the value of the splicing information.

In some music scores, there may be special marks such as dynamics and portamento, but generally the single-chip microcomputer or music chip that plays music in the way of music synthesis does not have the function to process these special marks, so the examples of encoding rules and decoding rules described below in this manual There are no references to these marks, these marks are ignored when encoding the music score, only the main tune is encoded, and only the main tune is broadcast when decoding and playing; such as some types of single-chip microcomputer chips or as sounding devices with loudspeakers The music chip has the function of processing these marks, so these marks can be processed in the encoding rules and decoding rules, and the value of the segment combination information generated by the encoding also records information about these marks (the information of these marks can be classified into other Additional information), during playback, the value of the combined information can be decoded by the single-chip microcomputer chip and played by the single-chip microcomputer chip or a music chip with a speaker as a sounding device with strength, portamento and other colors.

Generally, commonly used phonemes can be made into a phoneme database (it can be: information of a phoneme is stored in each record item in the phoneme database, such as the phoneme number, the pronunciation time value of each sound in the phoneme, etc., as the phoneme contains other additional information, The other additional information is generally also placed in the record item of this phoneme), generally the phoneme database will be used when encoding according to the encoding rules, and the phoneme database will generally be used when decoding according to the decoding rules, such as a certain decoding rule and a certain encoding rule generally correspond or Specifically, the phoneme database used when decoding according to this decoding rule is generally the same or compatible with the phoneme database used when encoding according to this encoding rule.

The purpose of defining phonemes to combine music segments is to store the phoneme database in the memory in the pickup, and the decoding program and other decoding data that are decoded according to the decoding rules are also stored in the memory in the pickup, so that each audible music book can be integrated. The value of all or part of the codewords on the page is related to the value of the combination information generated by encoding according to the coding rules, and the code can be read and decoded to play music with a pickup , a pickup can read through various audio music books that have this code word.

The decoding program and the decoded data decode the value of the piece combination information according to the decoding rules. The decoding rules correspond specifically or generally to the encoding rules used when encoding the piece to obtain the value of the piece combination information. . The decoded data used for decoding in the pickup should generally be the same or compatible with the encoded data used for encoding. When decoding, use the decoding rules to decode according to the value of the combined information of the music section. Generally, after obtaining all the decoding results, the music section is pronounced according to the decoding result; when decoding, you can use the full-step pronunciation method (that is, when decoding, the decoding result is obtained by decoding After all the decoding results are taken to play the whole or partial pronunciation of the music section), the step-by-step pronunciation method can also be used (that is, a part of the decoding result is obtained each time when decoding, that is, a part of the obtained decoding result is taken Pronunciation, in this way until the end of decoding, the whole or partial pronunciation of the music section will be formed, and each time mentioned here is also every step), and other pronunciation modes other than the whole-step pronunciation mode and the step-by-step pronunciation mode can also be used to broadcast Music; because when playing music, it is necessary to accurately determine when each sound is pronounced, so when the decoding adopts a step-by-step pronunciation method, it is generally necessary to record the time in the MCU, so that the action of each step sound can be performed at each appropriate moment. The whole-step pronunciation mode, the step-by-step pronunciation mode and other pronunciation modes all play music according to the music synthesis mode. And the decoding result involved in the decoding is generally the spectral data of the music section, and may also be other forms of data (music is also played in a music synthesis manner).

When the step-by-step pronunciation method is adopted, the phonemes obtained in the decoding process may be used to form parts of the decoding results in order to form part of the decoding results with other phonemes in sequence (this sentence and the previous sentence said The phoneme-like is generally self-positioning, and the part of the decoding result formed is generally self-positioning), and it may also be pronounced directly (for example, when a self-positioning phoneme obtained in the decoding process is regarded as a step-by-step pronunciation method A part of the decoding result obtained in a certain step and use it to pronounce), may also be used for more stitching processing later, and may be other situations.

When the whole-step pronunciation method is used for decoding, it may only use phonemes to do some splicing processing to obtain the decoding result (for example, there are rhythm, mode, clef and other information in the phoneme, so the obtained decoding result also has rhythm, mode, clef and other information ), it is also possible to use phonemes to do some splicing processing to get a certain value, and combine this certain value with some other additional information (such as the respective rhythm, mode, and clef information of all channels of the coded section) to become the decoding result (The full-step pronunciation method in each decoding example at the back of this manual is like this), and it may also be other situations; The result is sent to the music chip connected to the MCU to play the sound of the music segment. The decoding result mentioned when the full-step pronunciation method is mentioned on the 83rd page of this specification can also be these situations mentioned above in this paragraph, and the decoding result mentioned when the 12th and 13 pages of this specification describe the pronunciation by the whole-step pronunciation method can also be These situations are described above in this paragraph.

When the decoding uses the step-by-step pronunciation method, each step may only use the phonemes to do some stitching processing to obtain the decoding result (the rhythm, mode, clef and other information of the coded section can be included in the value of the stitching information at the beginning of decoding For example, it is obtained from the encoding header, and at the beginning of decoding, the parameters of the MCU pronunciation are set according to the rhythm, mode, clef and other information of all the channels of the encoded section or transmitted to the external music chip of the MCU. Set up the parameters of the pronunciation, the decoding result here does not include information such as rhythm, mode, clef, etc.), and it is also possible that each step uses phonemes to do some splicing processing to obtain a certain value, and combine this certain value with some other additional information (such as from The rhythm, mode, and clef information of all the channels of the coded segment obtained in the encoding header in the value of the combined information) are combined to become part of the decoding result, and each step may be decoded by doing some combining processing with phonemes In the part of the result, these phonemes originally contain some other additional information (such as rhythm, mode, and clef information), and there may be other situations; when pronouncing by step-by-step pronunciation, it can be the part of the decoding result of each step MCU Pronunciation can also be that the MCU sends the part of the decoding result to the music chip external to the MCU for pronunciation in each step. (the part of the decoding result mentioned in this paragraph is taken for the one-step pronunciation of the step-by-step pronunciation mode). The decoding result mentioned when the 83rd and 84th pages of this manual describe the step-by-step pronunciation method can also be these situations described above in this paragraph, and the decoding result mentioned when the 12th and 13th pages of this manual describe the pronunciation by the step-by-step pronunciation method can also be These could be the cases described above in this paragraph.

When using the step-by-step pronunciation method, it is generally necessary to determine what each step does. This can be done by default according to the agreement, or you can put some flags BIT in the value of the combined information, such as the encoding header of the value of the combined information, to mark each step. What to do (these flags BIT can be regarded as the operation information involved in the combination, which belongs to other additional information), or when decoding, first find the combination information according to the value of the combination information, such as the information in the encoding header of the value of the combination information The position of the data of each channel in the value of the value, and then check the data of each channel, according to its decoding, which localized phonemes and localized phonemes to be pronounced will be generated, as well as the time occupied by their pronunciation, so as to determine the following What should be done in each step when pronouncing by the step-by-step pronunciation mode, generally the duration of the pronunciation of different vocal channels obtained by pronouncing the data that is taken for pronunciation in each step is the same.

If an encoding rule is used to encode a piece of music to generate a value of combined information, if a decoding rule is used to decode it, only a part of the value of the combined information (such as the first half) can be used to decode and play the part of the piece of music Pronunciation (here 'part of this paragraph' is to modify the 'pronunciation'), then this situation can be equivalent to the part of this paragraph (that is, part of the paragraph) as another paragraph, the aforementioned A part of the value of this combination information is regarded as the value of the combination information of this other music section (the condition that this sentence and the following sentences of this sentence are established is: a part of the value of the combination information described in the previous sentences will meet this specification sheet The condition of the value of the above-mentioned combination information, such as indicating how to use multiple phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the preceding part of this section), the value of the combination information of this other section is also encoded by the aforementioned coding rules. The aforementioned decoding is to use the decoding rules to decode the value of the combined information of this other music section and broadcast the pronunciation of this other music section.

Such as when decoding, be to obtain the value of a plurality of mosaic information from several codewords, and decode the value of these a plurality of mosaic information respectively according to the decoding rule to obtain respective decoding results (it can be to use the same decoding rule for these multiple The values of the combined information are decoded separately, or the values of the multiple combined information are decoded according to different decoding rules), and finally these decoding results are sequentially pronounced. This situation can be regarded as a combined The value of the message is decoded to obtain the decoded result and the decoded result is used for pronunciation.

The value of the combination information is also the value of the combination information indicating how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the music section, and the music section here may also be called an encoded music section during encoding and decoding.

If there is no special indication of other intentions when mentioned, when the decoding results are mentioned everywhere in this application document, the default refers to all the decoding results obtained by decoding the value of the combination information of the music section. The entire decoding results are originally used for Play the whole pronunciation of this coded music section.

The type 1 phoneme mentioned earlier in this manual is a phoneme containing information of one sound, and the type 2 phoneme and type 3 phoneme mentioned earlier in this manual are phonemes containing information of multiple sounds.

The combination of several tones is also considered to be a combination of tones.

The composition of the sound of the sound combination mentioned in this application document (the information of multiple sounds in this sound combination), including the number of sounds in this sound combination, the pronunciation time value of each sound in this sound combination (each The pronunciation time value of the sound is counted from the time of the first sound in the sound combination), the pitch value of each sound, and the sound length value of each sound.

The composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme mentioned in this application document (the information of multiple sounds in this unlocated phoneme), including the number of sounds in this unlocated phoneme, the number of sounds in this unlocated phoneme The pronunciation time value of each sound of these multiple sounds (the pronunciation time value of each sound is calculated from the time of the sound that is first pronounced in this unlocated phoneme), the interval relationship data between each sound of these multiple sounds, The sound length value of each sound of these multiple sounds. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the unlocated phoneme)

The composition of the sound in the phoneme of the positioning (self-positioning or being positioned) mentioned in this application document (the information of multiple sounds in the phoneme of this positioning), including the number of sounds in the phoneme of this positioning, this positioning The pronunciation time value of each of these multiple tones in the phoneme (the pronunciation time value of each sound is calculated from the moment of the first pronunciation in the phoneme of this location), the pitch value of each of these multiple tones, this The sound length value of each sound of multiple sounds. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the positioned phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the positioned phoneme)

The composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme mentioned in this application document (the information of multiple sounds in this unlocated phoneme), including the number of sounds in this unlocated phoneme, this unlocated The pronunciation time value of each of these multiple sounds in the class phoneme (the pronunciation time value of each sound is calculated from the moment of the sound that is first pronounced in this unlocated class phoneme), and the mutual relationship between each sound of these multiple sounds The interval relationship data of the multiple tones, the sound length value of each tone of these multiple tones. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the unlocated phoneme)

The composition of the sound in the positioned (self-positioned or positioned) phoneme in this application document (the information of multiple sounds in this positioned phoneme), including the number of sounds in this positioned phoneme , the pronunciation time value of each of these multiple sounds in the phoneme of this location (the pronunciation time value of each sound is calculated from the moment of the sound that is first pronounced in the phoneme of this location), the sound of each sound of these multiple sounds High value, the sound length value of each sound of these multiple sounds. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the positioned phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the positioned phoneme)

The composition of the sound of the sound combination mentioned in this application document (the information of only one sound in this sound combination), includes the pitch value of this sound in the sound combination, and the sound length value of this sound.

The composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme mentioned in this application document (the information of only one sound in the unlocated phoneme) includes the sound length value of the sound in the unlocated phoneme. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the unlocated phoneme)

The composition of the sound in the localized (self-localized or localized) phoneme mentioned in this application document (this localized phoneme only contains information about one sound), including the pitch value of the sound in this localized phoneme, The duration value of this sound. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the positioned phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the positioned phoneme)

The composition of the sound in the unlocalized phoneme mentioned in this application document (the information of only one sound in this unlocated phoneme), includes the sound length value of this sound in this unlocated phoneme. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the unlocated phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the unlocated phoneme)

The composition of the sound in the localized (self-positioned or localized) phoneme mentioned in this application document (this localized phoneme only contains the information of one sound), including the sound of this sound in the localized phoneme High value, the sound length value of this sound. (Of course, this paragraph says that there are these data in the composition of the sound in the positioned phoneme, under the premise that these data can be obtained from the positioned phoneme)

The unlocated phonemes mentioned in the above 9 paragraphs may have no or other additional information; the located phonemes mentioned in the above 9 paragraphs may not have or have other additional information; the unlocated phonemes mentioned in the above 9 paragraphs may have other additional information In , there may be no or other additional information; in the localized phoneme mentioned in paragraph 9 above, there may be no or other additional information.

In the unlocated (or located) phonemes mentioned in the following 11 paragraphs, there may be no or other additional information; in the unlocated (or located) phonemes mentioned in the following 11 paragraphs, there may be no or other additional information Additional Information.

The positioned phoneme and the upper and lower position values of the positioned phoneme mentioned in this manual are to represent the positioned phoneme and the positioned phoneme’s upper and lower positions on the stave. According to different application needs, the positioned phoneme and the positioned Various standards can be used for the upper and lower position values of phonemes. The pitch value of the sound mentioned in this manual is to indicate the upper and lower positions of the sound on the stave. According to different application needs, the pitch value of the sound can be Using different criteria, the pitch value of the localized phoneme can be obtained from the upper and lower position values of the localized phoneme, and the pitch value of the localized phoneme-like sound can be obtained from the localized phoneme-like upper and lower position values, and The upper and lower position values and pitch values of a localized phoneme or a localized phoneme-like can use the same or different calculation standards, and pitch values of different standards can be mutually converted according to agreement.

For example, the pitch value of each tone in the phoneme of a location or the class phoneme of location, both can be C major and the treble clef (or the mode of the sound channel where the phoneme of this location or the class phoneme of location is located in the stave) The pitch value of the sound (the pitch value is used as the pitch value) can be calculated (determined) during the actual mode and the actual clef number of the located phoneme or the positioned phoneme of the coded section, or regardless of the mode and clef, and calculate (determine) the pitch value according to the distance unit on the stave (generally, a certain position in the vertical direction on the stave is used as the upper and lower positions of the starting point, and calculating the pitch value of a certain sound is to calculate the upper and lower positions of this certain sound How many distance units are the position higher or lower than the upper and lower positions of the starting point; the concept of the distance unit will be found later in this manual), and these two pitch values can be converted to each other in combination with the mode and clef during decoding.

The value for positioning the phoneme and phoneme (such as the upper and lower position value 1, or a certain value obtained during the decoding process) can be calculated (determined) according to the actual mode and clef of the corresponding channel of the encoded music segment. Based on the pitch value of the localized sound (generally it can be the lowest tone of all the sounds pronounced first in the phoneme or phoneme) (this pitch value is the value for positioning), each in the localized phoneme (or phoneme) The pitch value of the sound can be based on the value used to locate this phoneme (or phoneme) (such as the upper and lower position value 1, or a certain value obtained during the decoding process) and each phoneme (or phoneme) in this phoneme (or phoneme) The interval relationship data between the tones is determined; for the value related to the phoneme and phoneme-like positioning (such as the upper and lower position value 1, the upper and lower position value 2, or a certain value obtained by processing in the decoding process), the staff can also be used for The upper and lower positions of the positioned sound (generally, it can be the lowest sound of all sounds pronounced first in the phoneme or phoneme) are higher than the upper and lower positions of the starting point (the upper and lower positions of the starting point are, for example, the highest among the five lines on the staff of the voice channel where the positioned sound is located) middle line) high or low distance unit as the positioning value, the pitch value of each sound in the self-positioning phoneme (or self-positioning class phoneme) can be based on this self-positioning phoneme (or self-positioning class phoneme) Phoneme) in the upper and lower position value 2 and the interval relationship data between each sound in this phoneme (or phoneme) to determine, the phoneme after being positioned (or the phoneme after being positioned) each tone in The high value can be based on the value used to locate this phoneme (or phoneme) (such as the upper and lower position value 1, or a certain value obtained during decoding) and the relationship between the sounds in this phoneme (or phoneme) (the mode and clef information of the corresponding channel of the coded section may also be used when determining); for the phoneme involved, the value of the phoneme-like positioning (such as the upper and lower position value 1, the upper and lower position value 2 , or a certain value obtained during the decoding process), it can also be other situations; the up and down positions of the starting point mentioned in this paragraph and the previous paragraph refer to a custom up and down position in the vertical direction of the staff.

If these pitch values are not the pitch values of the sound calculated (determined) by the actual mode and clef of the corresponding channel of the coded music section, then these pitch values obtained by decoding can generally be converted into when decoding is to be pronounced Calculate (determine) the pitch value of the tone according to the actual mode and clef of the corresponding channel of the encoded music segment; The high value is the pitch value of the sound calculated (determined) according to the actual mode (C major) and clef of the corresponding channel of the coded music section.

This instruction manual mentions that the phoneme of location or the phoneme of location obtained by decoding is used for pronunciation, such as the pitch value of the sound in the phoneme of location or the phoneme of location is not according to the corresponding channel of the coded music section (i.e. To calculate (determine) the pitch value of the sound by the actual mode and clef of the localized phoneme or the localized phoneme-like channel), then generally these pitch values should be converted into corresponding tones according to the coded section. Calculate (determine) the pitch value of the sound according to the actual mode and clef of the track (that is, the sound channel where the phoneme or phoneme of the location is located), and then use it for pronunciation.

The upper and lower position value 1 of a certain phoneme mentioned in this manual refers to the upper and lower position value placed in the combined information value for positioning this phoneme; the upper and lower position value 1 of a certain type of phoneme mentioned in this manual is Refers to the upper and lower position values placed in the value of the spliced information for positioning this type of phoneme.

The positioning of the phoneme mentioned in this application document refers to determining the upper and lower position values of the phoneme according to the upper and lower position values in the value of the combined information, or determining the upper and lower position values of the phoneme according to a certain value obtained during the decoding process. position value. The positioning of the class phoneme mentioned in this application document refers to determining the upper and lower position values of the class phoneme according to the upper and lower position values in the value of the combined information, or determining the class phoneme according to a certain value obtained during the decoding process. The upper and lower position values of the phoneme.

The phoneme (or sound combination or quasi-phoneme or positioned phoneme) mentioned in this manual contains the interval relationship value between each tone of multiple sounds (in this phoneme or sound combination or quasi-phoneme or positioned phoneme) only contains the information of these multiple tones), including the interval relationship value between each two tones in the multiple tones, and the interval relationship value between the two tones includes the information of which of the two tones is higher and the two tones The difference in pitch, the difference in pitch can be measured according to different standards, generally how many steps there are between each sound.

The interval relationship data between the three tones mentioned in this manual, for example, includes how much the second tone is higher (or lower) than the first pitch, and how much the third tone is higher (or lower) than the first pitch step, (and how much the third tone is higher or lower than the second tone can be deduced from the content of the previous two sentences); in the phonemes mentioned in this manual (or sound combinations or phonemes or positioned phonemes) The meaning of the interval relationship data between each tone of a plurality of tones contained in it is also by analogy as described above in this paragraph.

For example, in the interval relationship data between each tone recorded in the phoneme, the pitch difference in the interval relationship value between every two tones is measured by footsteps. If the phoneme is positioned, use the upper and lower position values 1. After determining the upper and lower position values of this phoneme on a channel of a stave with a certain mode and clef (generally, it is determined that a certain tone in the phoneme, such as the lowest tone among all the sounds pronounced first, has a certain mode and clef The upper and lower position values on the channel of the stave), that can be determined according to the mode and clef of this channel and the upper and lower position value 1 used to locate this phoneme (this upper and lower position value 1 is the above-mentioned upper and lower position value in this paragraph 1) According to the interval relationship data between the tones in the phoneme, the pitch value (also the pitch value) of the tones in the located phoneme is obtained. If the "phoneme" mentioned above in this paragraph is replaced with "phoneme-like", then the content of this paragraph is still valid.

The determination of the upper and lower positions of each phoneme can be based on the lowest sound in the first sound in each phoneme (if the phoneme only contains information about one sound, then this sound is the first sound in the phoneme). lowest note). The determination of the upper and lower positions of each type of phoneme can be based on the lowest sound in the first sound of each type of phoneme (if the type of phoneme only contains information about one sound, then this sound is the first sound in this type of phoneme) the lowest of the tones).

An unlocalized or localized phoneme contains information of several tones, and each of these several tones can be said to be a sound in this unlocalized or localized phoneme, an unlocalized or localized phoneme Contains the information of several sounds, then for each sound in these several sounds, it can be said to be the sound in this unlocalized or localized phoneme.

The rhythm information mentioned in this application document includes the beat information of the actual beat of the music section (for example, a quarter note is regarded as a beat, 4 beats per measure) and speed information (referring to how many beats per second).

If the value of a phoneme is a phoneme number, and the phoneme corresponding to the phoneme number contains the information of several tones, then the phoneme can be regarded as containing the information of these several tones.

The note head mentioned in this manual is the small ellipse on the staff, such as a sound pronounced at a certain moment, which also has a crown sound, and the sound and the crown sound on the staff are represented by different note heads ( That is, there are two small ellipses in total); the sound in the unlocated or positioned phonemes mentioned in this manual is only equivalent to one symbol head on the staff (can not be equivalent to multiple symbol heads on the staff), and the unlocated The sound in the phoneme-like positioning or positioning is only equivalent to one notehead on the staff (it cannot be equivalent to multiple noteheads on the staff), and the sound in the sound combination mentioned in this manual is only corresponding to one notehead on the staff (cannot correspond to multiple noteheads on the stave).

When explaining the combination technology of music scores in this manual, the musical notation is taken as an example. For other notation types, such as six-line guitar notation, simplified notation, etc., it is similar to stave notation. The combination technique involved in other notation types You can refer to the stitching technique of staves. The staves in Figures 8, 9, 11, and 12 of the accompanying manual are defaulted to C major, and the clef is a treble clef, with a quarter note as a beat. The staff in Figure 15 is in C major, and the clef is a bass clef, with A quarter note is a beat, and the stave in Figure 16 is a C major, and the clef is a treble clef, and a quarter note is a beat.

The actual pitch value of the sound mentioned in this manual (the actual pitch value in the coded section) is measured by the pitch value. There are many ways to define the pitch value, as long as the pitch can be expressed, for example The coded section is a piano score, binaural (assumed to be called a bass channel and a treble channel), and any sound on the score can correspond to the keyboard of the piano, and the lowest key on the piano keyboard can be As the starting point for measuring the pitch of the music score, that is, if a sound in the stave corresponds to this key, then the pitch value of this sound is 0, and then starting from this key, the pitch value of each black key to the right is increased by 1 (this 1 just corresponds to 1 tone step), and every time a white key pitch value is also added by 1 (this every added 1 just corresponds to 1 tone step), so that any bar on any channel of the stave has any definite mode and clef After one tone corresponds to the corresponding key, its pitch value can be obtained (here only the mode and clef of the position of any tone are considered, regardless of whether there is any change of mode or clef on any channel) ; The pitch values involved in the following decoding example 1 and decoding example 2 are calculated according to the above 7 lines. (The footsteps mentioned elsewhere in this manual are also understood according to the footsteps described in this paragraph)

Regarding the phonemes mentioned in this manual, the phonemes used for splicing must contain the information of one or more sounds, and there may or may not be other additional information in the phonemes, and there are many ways to define phonemes. Defining a combination of sounds as a phoneme is a special case of the way to define a phoneme, and there is no other additional information in the phoneme defined in this way.

The distances involved when referring to the distance units throughout this specification refer to the distances in the vertical direction of the staff. Unless otherwise specified when mentioned, the five lines on a staff of a certain channel mentioned throughout this manual refer to the usual five lines on the staff of this channel by default; unless otherwise specified when mentioned, A certain line on the stave of a certain channel mentioned in this manual refers to one of the five commonly seen lines on the staff of this channel by default.

The examples of encoding rules mentioned throughout this specification all refer to the same, and the examples of decoding rules mentioned throughout this specification all refer to the same.

If there is no special indication of other intentions when mentioning, and it cannot be deduced from the context of the mention, the sections mentioned in this application document when describing the section combination technology refer to the encoded sections by default.

There are references to "the channel where the phoneme is located" everywhere in this manual. The phoneme mentioned here refers to the phoneme directly obtained from the value of the combined information. This statement ('the channel where the phoneme is located') means that the phoneme After being localized to form a localized phoneme, the channel where the localized phoneme is located.

Unless there is a special note when mentioning or it can be inferred from the context of the mention, everywhere in this specification (including the description of the following encoding rules, the description of the decoding rules, the description of the encoding examples, the description of the encoding examples) mentioned The words 'unlocated', 'positioned', 'self-positioned', and 'positioned' are not added in front of it to modify the limited 'phoneme' (and like the second phoneme of 'positioned', the 'phoneme' here 'is modified by 'positioned' in front of it; and like 'positioned monophonic phoneme', 'positioned multi-channel phoneme', the front of 'phoneme' in these expressions is modified by 'positioned' ), the default refers to the defined phoneme (defined in the encoding rule, or in the decoding rule, or both in the encoding rule definition and in the decoding rule). To phoneme 1, phoneme 2, phoneme 3, phoneme 4, phoneme 56(1), phoneme 56(2), phoneme 56(3), phoneme 56(4), refers to the defined phonemes (both defined in the encoding rules and defined in the decoding rules). Unless it can be deduced from the context of the mention that there are other meanings, all the references in this manual are preceded by 'unlocated' or 'self-located' to modify the limited 'phoneme', and the default refers to the defined phoneme (defined in the coding rules or defined in the decoding rules, or defined in both the encoding rules and the decoding rules); unless other meanings can be deduced from the context of the reference, the 'positioned phoneme' mentioned throughout this specification defaults to Refers to the defined self-localized phoneme (defined in the encoding rule, or in the decoding rule, or defined in both the encoding rule definition and the decoding rule) or the localized phoneme obtained during decoding.

If an unlocated or located phoneme is located to obtain a located phoneme, and there are other additional information (such as timbre, mode, operation information, etc.) in the located phoneme, then obviously this is located These other additional information in the phoneme are originally in the aforementioned unlocalized or localized phoneme.

According to the position value of a sound in the positioned phoneme (or positioned phoneme) and the interval relationship data between each sound, the positioned phoneme (or positioned phoneme) is obtained everywhere in this manual. For example, if a localized phoneme contains information about two tones, the value of the upper and lower positions of one of the tones and the location of the localized phoneme on the channel The tone value (pitch value) of the tone is obtained from the mode and clef information of the located phoneme, and then the interval relationship value between the two tones in the located phoneme (that is, the pitch value in the phoneme) Interval relationship data between each sound), know that another sound is 2 steps higher than this pitch, then adding 2 steps to the pitch value of this sound obtained before is the pitch value of this other sound.

When decoding in this manual, it is pronounced according to a positioned phoneme. Generally, it is pronounced according to the sound length value of each sound in the positioned phoneme, the pitch value of each sound, and the pronunciation time value of each sound section. And generally go to the phoneme database according to the phoneme number of this phoneme to find the record item of this phoneme, and take out the information of the sound in this phoneme from this record item, and combine the information of this located phoneme on the channel where the located phoneme is located mode, clef and other information to obtain information such as the length value of each sound in the positioned phoneme, the pitch value of each sound, and the pronunciation time value of each sound segment; The phoneme is pronounced, generally by the sound length value of each sound in the class phoneme obtained, the pitch value of each sound, and the music section pronunciation time value of each sound. The localized phonemes mentioned in this paragraph may not have or have other additional information; the localized phonemes mentioned in this paragraph may have no or other additional information.

There are different situations for the upper and lower position values involved in the description of phonemes in this application document, such as putting the upper and lower position values in the value of the combined information (the upper and lower position values are not placed in the information contained in the phoneme), or putting the upper and lower position values in In the information contained in the phoneme, there is also a discussion about the upper and lower position values of the phoneme that is self-located or located (that is, the upper and lower position values of the first sound in the phoneme that is discussed). Therefore, for the sake of distinction, this application document will put The upper and lower position value in the value of the combined information (not in the information contained in the phoneme) is called the upper and lower position value 1, and the upper and lower position value placed in the information contained in the phoneme is called the upper and lower position value 2, for self-positioning or When discussing the upper and lower position values of the positioned phoneme, the upper and lower position values are referred to as the upper and lower position value 3, and as mentioned, the upper and lower position values (without a numeral sign behind) are the upper and lower position values that can be any of the above three situations.

This application document describes the upper and lower position values involved in the phoneme-like, and there are different situations, such as putting the upper and lower position values in the value of the combined information (the upper and lower position values are not placed in the information contained in the phoneme), or putting the upper and lower positions The value is placed in the information contained in the phoneme, and the upper and lower position values of the self-positioned or positioned phoneme (that is, the upper and lower position value of the first sound in the phoneme that discusses positioning), so the application document is For the sake of distinction, the upper and lower position values placed in the value of the combined information (not in the information contained in the phoneme) are called the upper and lower position value 1, and the upper and lower position values placed in the information contained in the phoneme are called the upper and lower positions Value 2, when discussing the upper and lower position values of the self-localized or positioned phonemes, the upper and lower position values are called the upper and lower position values 3, and as mentioned the upper and lower position values (there is no number mark behind) means that it can be any of the above three The upper and lower position values for one case.

In general, a phoneme that is positioned (self-positioned or positioned) can be positioned at any position in the vertical direction of the staff; in general, a phoneme that is positioned (self-located or positioned) can be positioned in the vertical direction of the staff any position. The localized phonemes mentioned in this paragraph may or may not have other additional information, and the localized phonemes mentioned in this paragraph may or may not have other additional information.

For the pitch difference between any two tones in the phonemes mentioned in this manual except this paragraph and the next paragraph (this phoneme contains information of multiple tones) (steps are used as the unit of measurement), regardless of the phoneme It is located at which position in the vertical direction on the stave, the pitch difference between the aforementioned two tones is constant, (assuming that the type of this phoneme is phoneme type 1); except for this paragraph and the next paragraph in this manual And the interval relationship data between each sound in the unlocated phoneme is the same as the interval relationship data between each sound in this phoneme after being positioned (in the case of the preceding paragraph); for example, a phoneme is Positioned at one position in the vertical direction on the staff of a channel, the pitch difference between the first and second sounds is 2 steps, this phoneme is located at another position in the vertical direction on the staff of a channel, its The pitch difference between the first tone and the second tone still needs to be 2 steps; in addition to the phoneme category 1 mentioned above, there can also be a kind of phoneme (assuming that this category is phoneme category 2), any phoneme in this phoneme The pitch difference between a certain two tones (step as the unit of measurement), when the phoneme is located at different positions in the vertical direction on the staff, the pitch difference between the aforementioned two tones may be the same or different; For example, the pitch difference between any two tones in a defined phoneme (the phoneme contains information about multiple tones) is based on the distance unit as the measurement standard and the number of distance units remains unchanged. For example, this phoneme is positioned at A position in the vertical direction on the stave of a channel, the pitch difference between the first tone and the second tone is 1 distance unit, and the pitch difference is actually 1 step. This phoneme is positioned in a channel At another position in the vertical direction on the stave, the pitch difference between the first note and the second note should still be 1 distance unit, but the pitch difference is actually 2 steps, and such phonemes can also be used as a paragraph Combined; ('this phoneme' mentioned below in this paragraph refers to the phoneme category 2), the use of phonemes in this application document to combine the pronunciation of the passage, can be all or part of this phoneme in the phonemes used, when combined The usage of this phoneme is similar to the usage of the phoneme mentioned in the first few sentences of this paragraph. For example, there may or may not be other additional information in this phoneme, the length of the sound involved in the combination of this phoneme, the measurement of the pronunciation time value and The use can also be the same as the length of the above-mentioned phoneme in this manual, the measurement and use of the pronunciation time value, and the phoneme can also be obtained after this phoneme is processed. Interweaving and splicing, copy processing and other processing, when this kind of phoneme is useful, it can be pronounced in a whole-step pronunciation method or a step-by-step pronunciation method when decoding according to the value of the spliced information, and the decoding is divided into one splicing step or multiple splicing steps. When the combination is completed, at least one of the phonemes used to combine the pronunciation of a piece of music has a different pronunciation time value, from the 17th line of this paragraph 'for example' to the 23rd line of this paragraph' different pronunciations For the specific processing of the above-mentioned content, you can refer to the relevant descriptions in other paragraphs of this manual, but you should pay attention to the interval relationship coefficient between each sound in the phoneme when using it. The pitch difference in the interval relation value between a certain two tones in the data (here the certain two tones are arbitrarily selected for discussion), where the phoneme is located in a certain channel of a stave with a certain mode and a clef At different positions in the vertical direction, the aforementioned difference in pitch may change.

The situation of the phoneme is similar to that of the phoneme mentioned in the previous paragraph; for the phoneme mentioned outside this paragraph of this specification (this type of phoneme contains the information of multiple sounds), the pitch difference between any two tones (step as the unit of measurement), no matter where the phoneme is located in the vertical direction on the staff, the pitch difference between the aforementioned two tones is constant, (assuming that the phoneme type is the phoneme type 1); The interval relationship data between each sound in the non-located phoneme in this section of this manual is the same as the interval relationship data between each sound in this type of phoneme after being positioned (in During the aforementioned situation of this paragraph); For example, a phoneme is positioned at a position in the vertical direction on the staff of a vocal tract, and the pitch difference between the first and second sounds is 2 steps, and this phoneme is positioned at At another position in the vertical direction on the stave of one channel, the pitch difference between the first tone and the second tone should still be 2 steps; in addition to the aforementioned phoneme-like category 1, there can also be a kind of phoneme-like (assuming that this class is phoneme-like category 2), the pitch difference (step as a unit of measurement) between any two tones in this kind of phoneme is different in vertical direction when this type of phoneme is positioned on the stave position, the pitch difference between the aforementioned two tones may be the same or different; for example, define the pitch difference between any two tones in a phoneme (such a phoneme contains information about multiple tones) The distance unit is used as the measurement standard and the number of distance units does not change. For example, this phoneme is positioned at a position in the vertical direction on the stave of a channel, and the pitch difference between the first tone and the second tone is 1 The unit of distance, the pitch difference is actually 1 step, this type of phoneme is positioned at another position in the vertical direction on the stave of a channel, and the pitch difference between the first and second tones should still be 1 distance unit, but the pitch difference is actually 2 steps, and this type of phoneme can also be involved when making music pieces; When it is said that phonemes are used to combine the pronunciation of a passage, all or part of the phonemes actually involved may be this kind of phoneme. The usage of this kind of phoneme is similar to the usage of the phoneme mentioned in the first few sentences of this paragraph, such as There may or may not be other additional information in this type of phoneme. When the combination involves this type of phoneme, the sound length involved in the combination, the measurement and use of the pronunciation time value can also be the same as the sound length and pronunciation of the above-mentioned phoneme in this manual. The measurement and use of the time value, after processing this type of phoneme, the phoneme can also be obtained. When this type of phoneme is involved, it can be used for positioning, sequence combination, interleaving combination, copy processing, etc., and decode according to the value of the combination information If this type of phoneme is involved, it can still be pronounced by the whole-step pronunciation mode or the step-by-step pronunciation mode, and the decoding is completed in one or more combination steps, (the situation in the above 6 sentences Both can use phoneme type 1 and phoneme type 2 described in the previous paragraph or any one of them when assembling), from the 18th line of this paragraph 'such as' to the 24th line of this paragraph 'stitched' The specific processing of these contents so far can refer to the relevant narrations of other paragraphs in this manual, but when using, pay attention to certain two tones in the interval relationship data between each sound in the class phoneme (here certain two tones are arbitrary The pitch difference in the value of the interval relationship between the selected and discussed), when such phonemes are positioned at different positions in the vertical direction of a certain channel of a stave with a certain mode and clef, the aforementioned pitch difference Subject to change. (The phonemes mentioned in this paragraph can be unlocated or self-located or positioned)

For any piece of music, the rhythms of different channels are generally the same, and may also be different; if it is stated and there is no special intention to indicate otherwise, when the content of the rhythm of the coded piece is mentioned in this manual, the default is For example, if the rhythms of different channels of the coded section are the same, this is the case for encoding example 1 and encoding example 2, decoding example 1 and decoding example 2 in the following instructions; The principle of encoding and decoding is essentially the same as the principle of encoding and decoding when the rhythms of different channels in a segment are the same. Decoding processing.

For a piece of music, the rhythm, mode and clef of each channel are generally unchanged (that is, for example, the mode of each channel of a piece of music is always C major), unless otherwise specified when mentioned, this manual When describing the segment combination technology in the previous sections, the rhythm, mode, and clef of the segment mentioned by default, the rhythm, mode, and clef of each channel are assumed to be unchanged. The "rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded segment" refers to the respective rhythm, mode, and clef information of all channels of the encoded segment, and the rhythm, mode, and clef in any channel are unchanged (the meaning of the rhythm, mode and clef information of the coded music section mentioned in the following paragraphs, when the rhythm, mode and clef in the coded music section are unchanged, it is also according to the above few sentences understanding), when describing the segment combination technology in the front of this manual, it is mentioned that the upper and lower position values of the sounds in the positioned phoneme (or positioned phoneme), the pitch value of each sound, and the relationship between each sound When the interval relation value of the phoneme (or localized phoneme) is located, the mode and clef of the position of the vocal tract should be used to determine this type of statement. In this type of statement, the rhythm in the involved section is The modes and clefs are constant as an example. When describing the technique of segment combination in this manual, the "a certain channel of the stave with a certain mode and clef" mentioned is based on the rhythm of a certain channel of the stave. , mode, and clef are constant as an example; for a section that changes (that is, the rhythm, mode, and clef that have a vocal track in the section change), it can be divided into multiple sub-sections, and each sub-section The rhythm, mode, and clef of each sound channel are unchanged, and then each subsection is encoded (for the encoding processing method of each subsection, please refer to the encoding processing method described in other sections of this manual), and the encoding results of each subsection are combined. It is the value of the combined information. When decoding, the data of each subsection in the value of the combined information is decoded separately to play the pronunciation of the music section (for the decoding processing method of each subsection, please refer to the decoding processing method described in other paragraphs of this manual); For the situation that the rhythm, mode and clef of this coded section are changed, its codec processing can still refer to the codec processing involved in the music section without changing rhythm, mode and clef as mentioned earlier in this manual. Correspondingly, the "rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded paragraph" mentioned in the description of the segment combination technology in the previous parts of this manual should be understood as including all the channels involved in the coded segment. All rhythm, mode, and clef information (including the rhythm, mode, and clef information of each channel at the beginning of the section, and when and how to change the information later), (the coded sections mentioned in the following paragraphs The meaning of the rhythm, mode, and clef information in the coded section, when the rhythm, mode, and clef in the coded section are changed, it is also understood as described in the above sentences), and the descriptions in the previous parts of this manual When segment combination technology is mentioned, when it is mentioned to determine the upper and lower position values of the tones in the positioned phoneme (or positioned phoneme), the pitch value of each tone, the interval relationship value between each tone, etc., it should be based on The mode and clef of the vocal channel where the located phoneme (or located phoneme-like) is located to determine Define this kind of statement, it is understood that the rhythm, mode, and clef of the vocal tract in the passage involved in this kind of statement are changed, and the actual determination can generally be made according to the current position of the positioned phoneme (or positioned phoneme). The mode and clef at the location (generally in the bar corresponding to the channel of the stave), and the "a certain stave with a certain mode and a certain clef" mentioned in the description of the music segment combination technology in the previous parts of this manual. Vocal channel' is understood as the rhythm, mode, and clef of a certain channel of the stave.

For the rhythm, mode, and clef information that are placed in the phonemes as other additional information mentioned in this manual, because the rhythm of the coded segment mentioned by default when describing the segment combination technology in the previous part of this manual, Mode and clef are exemplified as unchanged, so correspondingly, the rhythm, mode, and clef information involved in the phoneme can generally be used to represent the overall rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded segment ( For example, when decoding, according to the rhythm, mode, and clef information in a certain phoneme, the general rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded section can be known), or it can also indicate that the phoneme itself involves related rhythm, mode, and spectrum number information, and then decode the location when stitching together, generate phonemes, etc. are all related to this, and the rhythm, mode, and clef information in each phoneme of the same channel used to stitch together the sound of a piece of music should be consistent with each other, decoding The obtained phonemes of the same channel, the rhythm, mode, and clef information in the phoneme should be consistent with each other, and the phonemes of each location in each channel, or the rhythm, mode, and clef in the phoneme The information is equivalent to the rhythm, mode, and clef information of the corresponding channel of the encoded music segment. When decoding, the phonemes of each location of each channel obtained by decoding in the order of pronunciation, the rhythm, mode, and clef information in the phoneme-like The pronunciation of the information of each sound can be used to obtain the pronunciation of the passage. In addition to the above two situations, it can also be other situations; and for the one-to-one passage mentioned in the previous paragraph, it has the rhythm, mode, and clef of the vocal tract. This situation is more complicated. For example, when decoding, according to the rhythm, mode, and clef information in a phoneme in the value of the combined information, directly change the rhythm, mode or spectrum of a certain channel of the piece according to the agreement. number, or otherwise. The general rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded section mentioned above in this paragraph means that the coded section has been using the rhythm, mode, and clef information without changing, and the rhythm, mode, and clef information can be It is the information of several channels, that is, how many channels are the coded section, and the rhythm, mode, and clef information are the information of several channels. The above-mentioned 'rhythm, mode, and clef information in each phoneme should be consistent with each other' can be understood in this way: for example, each phoneme contains 3 phonemes (phoneme 1, phoneme 2, phoneme 3), then in the first few quotation marks The term means that the rhythm information in phoneme 1 is the same as the rhythm information in phoneme 2 and the rhythm information in phoneme 3, the mode information in phoneme 1 is the same as the mode information in phoneme 2 and phoneme 3, and the mode information in phoneme 1 is the same as that in phoneme 3. The clef information in phoneme 2 is the same as the clef information in phoneme 3; the previous statement similar to 'the rhythm, mode, and clef information in each phoneme should be consistent with each other' is also according to the previous few Sentence described by analogy. The rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded music section mentioned in this manual are invariable, which means that the rhythm, mode, and clef in any channel of the coded music section are all invariant (the constant is for the same The front and back of the channel remain unchanged); the rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded section mentioned in this manual are changed, which means that in any channel in all or part of the channels of the coded section, the rhythm, mode, One or more changes in the clef (changes are for forward and backward changes within the same channel).

There are also some extreme cases (this paragraph and the following 3 paragraphs are examples of extreme cases) of using phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the passage mentioned in this application document, such as the phonemes defined in the coding rules and the corresponding decoding rules. Self-positioning (any phoneme may or may not have timbre, other additional information such as operation information, where the operation information is, for example, indicating the steps to decode), use this coding rule to code a musical segment to generate the combined information The front of the value (or the back of the value of the combined information) puts the rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded section, and then defines some different data blocks according to the different channels of the section ( If there is only one audio channel of the music section, there is only one data block), and each data block contains the respective phoneme numbers of all phonemes (self-positioned phonemes) pronounced by the corresponding channel (the phoneme numbers of each phoneme in each data block are pressed by The pronunciation of the phonemes is arranged in order, and there is no need to put the upper and lower position values 1) for positioning the phonemes. The value of the combined information contains all these data blocks. The phoneme numbers of the above channels can also be pressed in the value of the combined information. Play in other ways, as long as the phoneme number of each channel can be extracted from the value of the combined information. When decoding according to this decoding rule, first follow the rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded segment obtained in the value of the combined information information to set the respective rhythm, mode, clef and other parameters of all channels when the coded section starts to pronounce (as the rhythm of the coded section, the mode, and the clef change, then according to the rhythm of the aforementioned coded section , mode, and clef information in the subsequent decoding process, and then set the rhythm, mode, clef and other parameters of some channels of the coded section), and then follow the step-by-step pronunciation method (what to do in each step of decoding below can be based on According to the agreement or according to the operation information in the phoneme), a phoneme number of each channel in all channels of the segment is taken out from the value of the combined information at each step, and each channel in all channels of the extracted segment is All the phoneme numbers are taken directly for pronunciation (according to the phoneme number, find its corresponding record item in the phoneme database and take out the information of the sound from this record item, such as the pitch value of each sound, the sound length value, the pronunciation time value and other information Pronunciation), after decoding in this way, all or part of the pronunciation of the playback section is completed. In this case, the phoneme number is taken out in each step and pronounced without any processing (no sequence stitching, interweaving stitching, copy processing , positioning, etc.), in this case, if the music section has multiple channels, the pronunciation duration of the phonemes corresponding to the phoneme numbers of different channels obtained in each step is the same. The pronunciation method takes several phoneme numbers in each step and takes them for pronunciation, and the pronunciation of all or part of the passage formed by the pronunciation of these steps is regarded as being processed according to the phonemes. The use of phonemes in the said application documents to combine the pronunciation of the music section includes the above-mentioned situation in this paragraph. Among the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of a combined information described in this paragraph (in fact, the phoneme numbers of some phonemes are obtained directly), at least one phoneme contains different pronunciation time values; everywhere in this paragraph References to sections refer to encoded sections. All channels of passages mentioned throughout this paragraph may be one or more channels. In the case mentioned in this paragraph, the rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded section can be unchanged or changed (if it is changed, the rhythm of the coded section placed in the value of the combined information , mode, information on when to change and how to change).

Another example is that the phonemes defined in the encoding rules and the corresponding decoding rules are all self-positioning (any phoneme has rhythm, mode, and clef information, and any phoneme can have or not have timbre, operation information, etc. Additional information, the operation information here is, for example, indicating how to decode), when using this encoding rule to encode a music section to generate the value of the combined information, define some different data blocks according to the different channels of the music section (such as There is only one piece of music, and there is only one data block), and each data block contains all the phonemes of the corresponding channel pronunciation (these self-positioned phonemes include rhythm, mode, and clef information in each phoneme). Phoneme numbers (the phoneme numbers of each phoneme in each data block are arranged in the order of pronunciation of the phonemes, and there is no need to put the upper and lower position values 1 for locating the phonemes), and the value of the combined information includes all these data blocks. The phoneme number of sound channel also can be put in other ways in the value of mosaic information, as long as can take out the phoneme number of each sound channel from the value of mosaic information, when decoding according to this decoding rule, press the step-by-step pronunciation mode (decoding What to do at each step can be determined according to the agreement or according to the operation information in the phoneme), from the value of the combined information, take out a phoneme number of each channel in all channels of the music section at each step, and use all the taken out music sections A phoneme number of each channel in the channel is directly used for pronunciation (find the corresponding record item in the phoneme database according to the phoneme number and take out the information of the sound from this record item, such as the pitch value of each sound, the sound length Value, pronunciation time value and other information to pronounce, and the rhythm, mode, clef information in the record item should be set according to the rhythm, mode, clef and other pronunciation parameters of the current pronunciation position of the channel where the phoneme is located and the phoneme will be emitted Tone), after decoding in this way, the whole or part of the pronunciation of the playback section is completed. In this case, the phoneme number is taken out in each step and pronounced without doing any processing (no sequence stitching, interweaving stitching, copy processing , positioning, etc.), in this case, if the music section has multiple channels, the pronunciation duration of the phonemes corresponding to the phoneme numbers of different channels obtained in each step is the same. The pronunciation method takes several phoneme numbers in each step and takes them for pronunciation, and the pronunciation of all or part of the passage formed by the pronunciation of these steps is regarded as being processed according to the phonemes. The use of phonemes in the said application documents to combine the pronunciation of the music section includes the above-mentioned situation in this paragraph. Among the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of a combined information described in this paragraph (in fact, the phoneme numbers of some phonemes are obtained directly), at least one phoneme contains different pronunciation time values; everywhere in this paragraph References to sections refer to encoded sections. All channels of passages mentioned throughout this paragraph may be one or more channels. In the situation mentioned in this paragraph, the rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded section can be constant or variable.

Another example is that the phonemes defined in the encoding rules and the corresponding decoding rules are all self-positioning (any phoneme can have or not have timbre, other additional information such as operation information, and the operation information here is, for example, indicating what steps to follow decoding), using this encoding rule to encode the rhythm, mode, and clef information of the encoded music section in the front of the value of the pieced information generated by encoding a piece of music (it can also be in the back of the value of the pieced information, etc.), Then define some different data blocks according to the different channels of the music segment (if there is only one channel in the music segment, then there is only one data block). ) respective phoneme numbers (the phoneme numbers of each phoneme in each data block are arranged in the order of pronunciation of the phonemes, and there is no need to put the upper and lower position values 1 for locating the phonemes), and the value of the combined information includes all these blocks, The phoneme numbers of the above channels can also be placed in other ways in the value of the combined information, as long as the phoneme numbers of each channel can be taken out from the value of the combined information. When decoding, first press the value of the combined information to get The rhythm, mode, and clef information of the coded section are used to set the respective rhythm, mode, clef and other parameters of all channels when the coded section starts to sound (such as the rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded section are change, then according to the rhythm, mode, and clef information of the aforementioned encoded section, the rhythm, mode, clef and other parameters of some channels of the encoded section should be set in the subsequent decoding process), and then press Step-by-step pronunciation method (the decoding of each step below can be determined according to the agreement or according to the operation information in the phoneme), each step takes out some phoneme numbers of each channel from the value of the combined information, and takes the phoneme numbers taken out Pronunciation (without positioning the phonemes), and after decoding in this way, the entire pronunciation or partial pronunciation of the playback section is completed, and at least one channel is included in the phoneme numbers sequentially extracted from the value of the combined information in a certain step (assuming that this channel is a plurality of phoneme numbers of a certain channel), in this case, in this certain step, it can be regarded as that the aforementioned multiple phoneme numbers of the aforementioned certain channel are first combined in sequence (combined form), and then put together Get the result and the phoneme numbers of other channels to pronounce (for each phoneme number in the result, find its corresponding record item in the phoneme database according to the phoneme number and take out the information of the sound from this record item, such as the phoneme number of each sound Pitch value, sound length value, pronunciation time value and other information to pronounce), in this case, if the piece has multiple channels, in each step, different channels are pronounced according to the number of phonemes obtained. (the sum of several phoneme pronunciation times) is the same. The use of phonemes in the said application documents to combine the pronunciation of the music section includes the above-mentioned situation in this paragraph. Among the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of a combined information described in this paragraph (in fact, the phoneme numbers of some phonemes are obtained directly), at least one phoneme contains different pronunciation time values; everywhere in this paragraph References to sections refer to encoded sections. All channels of passages mentioned throughout this paragraph may be one or more channels. In the case mentioned in this paragraph, the rhythm, mode, and clef of the coded section can be unchanged or changed (if it is changed, the rhythm of the coded section placed in the value of the combined information , mode, information on when to change and how to change).

For example, the phonemes defined in the encoding rules and the corresponding decoding rules are self-positioning (any phoneme may or may not have timbre, and other additional information such as operation information, where the operation information is, for example, indicating what steps to decode ), when using this encoding rule to encode a music section to generate the value of the combined information, define some different data blocks respectively according to the different channels of the music section (if there is only one music section channel, then there is only one data block). Each data block contains the respective phoneme numbers of all the phonemes (self-positioned phonemes) pronounced by the corresponding vocal tract (the phoneme numbers of each phoneme in each data block are arranged in the order of pronunciation of the phonemes, and do not need to be used for positioning the phonemes. The upper and lower position values of 1), the value of the mosaic information contains all these data blocks, and the phoneme numbers of the above channels can also be placed in other ways in the value of the mosaic information, as long as each channel can be taken out from the value of the mosaic information The phoneme number is enough. When decoding according to this decoding rule, according to the whole-step pronunciation method (what to do in each step during decoding can be determined according to the agreement or according to the operation information in the phoneme), take out all the pieces from the value of the combined information All these phoneme numbers of each channel in the channel are used together for pronunciation (no need to locate the phoneme, find the corresponding record item in the phoneme database according to the phoneme number and take out the sound information from this record item, such as The pitch value of each sound, the sound length value, the pronunciation time value and other information to pronounce), to obtain the whole pronunciation or part of the pronunciation of the music section, in this case, it can be regarded as the final sound of each sound in all the channels of the music section All these self-positioned phonemes of the Tao are sequentially combined (combined form) to obtain a certain result, and then this certain result is used for subsequent pronunciation; the situation mentioned in this paragraph can be in front of the value of the combined information (also can be It is the back of the value of the combined information, etc.) put the rhythm, mode, and clef information of the encoded section, and use the rhythm, mode, and clef information of the encoded section to set the encoded section first. The parameters such as the respective rhythms, modes, and clefs of all vocal channels during pronunciation are processed to obtain a certain result above and pronounced according to this certain result (in this case, the rhythm of the coded section, the mode, and the clef can be different Change, it can also be changed, if it is changed, then according to the rhythm, mode and clef information of these coded sections, the rhythm and mode of certain channels need to be set in the process of pronunciation according to the aforementioned result , clef and other parameters), or the rhythm of these coded sections, mode, clef information and the aforementioned certain result form another result and pronounce according to this other result (in this case, the rhythm of the coded section, The mode and clef can be constant or variable), or there can be rhythm, mode and clef information in each phoneme in the value of the combined information. When decoding the pronunciation according to one of the aforementioned results, the Each phoneme, according to these other additional information in the phoneme, set the rhythm, mode, clef and other parameters of the current pronunciation position of the channel where each phoneme is located and sound the phoneme (in this case, the rhythm and mode of the coded section , the clef can be constant or variable), or it can be a phoneme of a certain channel that is first pronounced in the coded section There are rhythm, mode, and clef information (the rhythm, mode, and clef information here are exactly the rhythm, mode, and clef information of all the channels of the coded section). When decoding the pronunciation according to one of the aforementioned results, According to these other additional information in this phoneme, the respective rhythms of all sound channels of the entire coded section are set, the pronunciation parameters such as mode, clef and each phoneme are sounded according to these pronunciation parameters (in this case, the coded music The rhythm, mode, and clef of the section are unchanged). The use of phonemes in the said application documents to combine the pronunciation of the music section includes the above-mentioned situation in this paragraph. All channels of passages mentioned throughout this paragraph may be one or more channels.

The "before the value of the combined information" mentioned in the above 4 paragraphs refers to the inside of the value of the combined information. For example, the value of the combined information is divided into 3 parts, the first part is part 1, followed by part 2, Then there is part 3, and that part 1 is placed in front of the value of the combined information.

Obviously there can be many kinds of encoding rules and decoding rules. The format of the value of the piece combination information obtained according to different encoding rules is generally different. It can be processed according to the mode, major and minor, and rhythm described later in this manual. The definition of phonemes, for the processing of repeated sound combinations, the definition of the structure of the value of the music segment combination information, etc. to formulate an example of encoding rules and an example of decoding rules, this encoding rule (example of encoding rules) as an example includes these detailed rules : the processing of the mode, the processing of the major and minor scales, the processing of the rhythm, the definition of the phonemes, the phonemes are given phoneme numbers (these are all processed according to the relevant descriptions in the back of this manual), the phoneme database is set up, and the coding of repeated sound combinations ( Also encode according to the description later in this manual), the definition of the structure of the value of the music piece combination information generated by encoding is also according to the description later in this manual, etc.; the following coding examples (coding example 1 and coding example 2) are according to This encoding rule is done; This decoding rule specially corresponding to this encoding rule includes these details for example: the processing of mode, the processing of major and minor scales, the processing of rhythm, the definition of phonemes, and assigning phoneme numbers to phonemes (these several are all according to This instruction manual is related to the described processing later), set up a phoneme database (this phoneme database is the same as or compatible with the phoneme database used by the coding rules), and analyze and decode the value of the music segment combination information (also according to the music segment combination described later in this specification sheet The definition of the structure of the value of the information to decode), according to the structure of the repeating sound combination described later in this manual, the information related to the repeating sound combination in the value of the music section stitching information is decoded, etc.; each decoding example in the back (decoding example 1 and decoding example 2) are carried out according to this decoding rule. The decoding rule mentioned in this paragraph as an example corresponds specifically to the encoding rule mentioned in this paragraph as an example.

Handling of modes: Conventionally, the modes of different pieces of music are often different, such as C major, G major, etc. For a single tone on a certain line on the stave, in each mode, its tone There is not much difference between the height and the low, which is generally half a degree higher or lower. For two adjacent tones, if the interval between the two tones is 3 degrees, then in various modes, the difference between the two tones The interval between them is only a major 3rd degree and a minor 3rd degree difference. Therefore, before encoding a certain music section, one can first look at its mode, and then under this mode, determine which phonemes can be used to represent each sound after being combined, and then encode. For example, for two adjacent tones, the interval between the two tones is 3 degrees (the pitch of the back tone is higher than that of the front tone). If the combination of these two tones is defined as a phoneme, then under different modes, the combination of these two tones should be It can be defined as two different phonemes (each phoneme contains two tones), the interval of two tones in one phoneme is a major 3 degree, and the interval of two tones in another phoneme is a minor 3 degree.

Handling of major and minor scales: For each marking form of the same mode of sound level, it may be a major scale or a minor scale. Different ways of chords are used to form different colors of music; to deal with it, the major and minor scales can be treated differently or not, that is, only the major mode is recognized, regardless of the minor mode, and the division of each phoneme in the case of the minor mode The same as the processing of the major mode, the coding rules and decoding rules used in this manual as an example take the processing of major and minor modes as an example in the latter case without distinction.

Rhythm processing: Rhythm information can be recorded in the encoding header of the combined information value, such as how many beats per minute, how many cents of notes are regarded as one beat, and how many beats per measure. When decoding, according to the information in the encoding header of the value of the combined information, set the speed and beat of the music playback. The coding rule example and the decoding rule example are to define quarter notes as one beat. (The shooting mentioned in this paragraph refers to the actual shooting)

For any musical section involving encoding and decoding in this encoding rule example and decoding rule example, the mode, rhythm, and clef will not be changed by default in the stave representing this musical section.

When the sound combination is mentioned in the following description, the beats involved in the default sound combination are regarded as a quarter note as a beat.

Unless otherwise specified or clearly seen, when referring to sound combinations in the following descriptions, it is assumed that all the sounds in a sound combination are in the same channel.

Phoneme definition:

This encoding rule example and the decoding rule example relate to the phoneme of definition and all take the phoneme as an example of a sound combination, say that a phoneme is a certain sound combination (for example, a phoneme is a surrounding sound, and a phoneme is a monophonic repetition), which means that the sound combination Defined as phonemes. This encoding rule example and the decoding rule example involve the defined phonemes (including the phonemes defined in the following descriptions), all of which take quarter notes as an abstract beat. If the coded section is not an actual beat with a quarter note, then These phonemes can still be used for splicing, but the beat standard needs to be converted when decoding the splicing.

Considering the composition of the melody, it can be found that the melody can be composed of a series of tone combinations (here 'series' is modified 'tone combination'), and the tone combination can be a small scale (as shown in Figure 9), or a The same tone is repeated multiple times (as shown in Figure 8), or the decomposition of a chord (as shown in Figure 10), etc.; this manual is used as an example of encoding rules and decoding rules to combine these sounds (here 'these' is a modified 'sound combination' ) are defined as phonemes, which can even be monophonic.

A phoneme can also be a surround sound, which generally consists of 4 sounds. In addition, you can count the frequently used sound combinations of various pieces of music, which can also be defined as phonemes. For example, the left-hand accompaniment of the piano has relatively simple and regular sounds. It is easy to summarize and count some sound combinations and define these sound combinations as phonemes ( Here 'some' is used to modify the 'sound combination'), which can be used in the encoding of different music sections.

In a word, phonemes can have these classes: each phoneme in a class of phonemes is to define monophonic repetition (sound combination) as phoneme, such as monophonic repetition 2 times, 3 times, 4 times can be defined as different phonemes respectively, these Different phonemes belong to this category; each phoneme in a class of phonemes defines chord decomposition (sound combination) as phonemes, such as the decomposition of major triads, minor triads, etc., which can be defined as different phonemes respectively. Phonemes belong to this category; each phoneme in a class of phonemes defines scales (sound combinations) as phonemes, such as scales with 3 tones and scales with 5 tones, which can be defined as different phonemes respectively, and these different phonemes belong to this category. class; each phoneme in a class of phonemes is to define the surround sound (sound combination) as a phoneme, and different surround sounds can be defined as different phonemes respectively, and these different phonemes belong to this class; each phoneme in a class of phonemes is to define Monotones are defined as phonemes, and monotones of different sound lengths can be divided into different phonemes, and these different phonemes belong to this category; there may also be other categories of phonemes.

Rests can also be defined as a class of phonemes (here 'a class' modifies 'phonemes'). For rests of different lengths, they can be defined as different phonemes respectively. These different phonemes belong to this class. Rests phonemes can be regarded as self- The phoneme of positioning, the rest phoneme contains information of a sound (sound length value and pitch value of this sound), but the pitch value of this sound is a certain value indicating silence.

For two sound combination, the number of the sound that forms the previous sound combination is identical with the number of the sound that forms the following sound combination, and the interval relationship data between each sound in the previous sound combination is the same as that of the latter sound combination. The interval relationship data between each sound in the combination is the same, the pronunciation time value of each sound in the previous sound combination is the same as the pronunciation time value of each sound in the next sound combination, but the pronunciation time value of each sound in the previous sound combination is the same. The length of the sound is not the same as the sound length of each sound in the latter sound combination, so these two sound combinations are also defined as two different phonemes.

For music scores such as pianos, each sound is generally accompanied by a crown (pronounced simultaneously with the root), such as the crown of the third and the crown of the octave, as shown in Figure 11. Tones pronounced at different times, then add some crowns to these several tones, these several tones and these crowns constitute sound combination 1, or add some other crowns to these several tones, these several tones and these In addition, these crown sounds form the sound combination 2, where the sound combination 1 and the sound combination 2 can be separately defined as two different phonemes.

For some cases, the sound in the defined phoneme may stimulate multiple tones at the same time point, and these multiple tones are sounds with different pitches.

In addition, several different monotones have the same sound length. After they are combined, they may be in different high and low positions on the staff. The combination of sounds is defined as different phonemes respectively, and it is also feasible in principle to combine these phonemes into the pronunciation of a passage. In addition, it can be improved, and the combination of sounds with the same interval relationship data between each tone is defined as a phoneme. This paragraph is concerned with the statement of 'sound combinations with the same interval relationship data between each tone', the same here is a comparison between different tone combinations, such as two tones with the same interval relationship data between each tone Combination means that the interval relationship data between the tones in one tone combination is the same as the interval relationship data between the tones in the other tone combination. There is a similar statement in the next paragraph ('the intervals between the three tones The same tone combination of relational data', 'the sound combination of its 3 tone interval relational data difference') also understand by analogy like this.

For example, see Figure 10, the numbered notation reads as '35.1' (the dots represent 8 degrees lower), such as moving this sound combination (3 tones) upwards by 4 distance units (this manual has a description of the distance unit Explanation), its numbered notation reading becomes '725', and the interval relationship data between the three tones is the same as the interval relationship data between the three tones in the '35.1' situation, and in this way the 3 tones of '35.1' Each sound is moved up by 2 distance units (this application document has an explanation to the distance unit), and its numbered notation reading method is '57.3', and the interval relationship data between these 3 sounds is the same as the '35.1' situation. Interval relationship data between each other is different, for example, between 5 and 3 in '57.3' is a minor third, while in the original '35.1', between 3 and 1 is a major third; you can exhaustively enumerate this sound combination ('35.1'3 each note) shifted to different high and low positions on the stave (each time the three notes move up or down and all move the same number of distance units), investigate the combination of each note and this Tone combination ('35.1' 3 tones), wherein the tone combination with the same interval relationship data between its 3 tones is defined as the same phoneme, and the tone combination with different interval relationship data between its 3 tones defined as different phonemes. For example, '35.1' is defined as phoneme A ('725' is regarded as the transposition of phoneme A, and there is no need to define it as another phoneme), and '57.3' is defined as phoneme B because of the interval relationship between the three tones The data is different from the interval relation data among the three tones of the phoneme A.

In the combination of sounds used to define phonemes mentioned in the above two paragraphs, the sound length of each sound is the same. When the sound length of each sound is different, the way of defining the phoneme is similar to that described in the above two paragraphs, for example There are two tones, the first tone occupies 3/8 beats, the second tone occupies 1/8 beat, the pitch of the second tone is higher than the first tone, when these two tones are in different upper and lower positions on the stave (The distance unit between the two tones in the vertical direction of the staff is always 2) These two tones have two intervals (there is a major third between the two tones, and a minor third between the two tones), then you can Correspondingly define two phonemes, one phoneme contains information of two tones, the first tone occupies 3/8 beats, the second tone occupies 1/8 beat, the pitch of the second tone is higher than the first tone, and the two tones There is a major third in between, and another phoneme contains information of two tones, the first tone occupies 3/8 of a beat, the second tone occupies 1/8 of a beat, the pitch of the 2nd tone is higher than the 1st tone, Between the two tones is a minor third.

For other situations of sound composition (such as a section of musical scale), it can be similarly defined and processed.

And for the phoneme that is monophonic repetition combination completely, because there is no interval value between each sound, so the situation when a monophonic repetition combination is in each upper and lower position on the staff all should be defined as the same phoneme (as there is this in the musical section Phoneme, when encoding, the phoneme number value of this phoneme and the upper and lower position values of this phoneme on the stave should be recorded in the value of the splicing information 1).

For monophonic notes, you can use monophonic notes of 1/1 beat, 1/2 beats, 1/4 beats, 1/8 beats, 1/16 beats , the single tone of 3/4 beat, the single tone of 3/8 beat, the single tone of 3/16 beat, etc. are respectively defined as different phonemes (this coding rule example and decoding rule example are to define the quarter note as a Beat), generally only one sound length value can be recorded in a monophonic phoneme; a monophonic phoneme is also a special case of a tone combination.

Generally, a phoneme may contain information of one or more tones. When information of multiple tones is included, these tones may be pronounced at one or more time points. For any time point, if there are multiple tones , then these multiple tones are sounds of different pitches, and the respective durations of these multiple tones are all the same or different.

Because there are many sound combinations, it is difficult to predict how many there are. Therefore, it is generally not necessary to define each sound combination as a phoneme, but to define it according to the needs. For example, the coding rules and decoding rules involving codecs are just a book. There are a limited number of passages in the reading material, and statistics are made of all the sound combinations (limited number of sound combinations) involved in the joint pronunciation of these passages. For example, the pronunciation of passage 1 in these passages needs to use the sound combination 1 and the sound Combination 2, the pronunciation of the passage 2 in these passages needs to use the sound combination 1 and the sound combination 3, then all the sound combinations here will include the sound combination 1 and the sound combination 2 and the sound combination 3, for all the sound combinations Each sound combination is defined as a phoneme. When assembling any passage in this reading, all or part of these phonemes can be used. For example, if the coding rules and decoding rules involve encoding and decoding, the passages can be any passages. , that can still define some commonly used phonemes such as monotone repetition, chord decomposition, scale, surround sound, monotone, etc., which can be selected for use when assembling, and for example, phoneme numbers (or phoneme numbers and upper and lower position values, etc. ) to represent the combination of unfamiliar sounds, then you can use a modified method, such as using a phoneme when assembling, and then positioning this phoneme and then modifying it (such as increasing or decreasing the sound, adjusting the pitch of a certain sound, modifying the sound of the sound Long value, etc.), the modified information is the information of the sound in the combination of unfamiliar sounds, so that the combination of any music section can be completed. The example of this encoding rule and the decoding rule are the above-mentioned examples that can encode and decode any music section. , of course, the arbitrary section mentioned in this paragraph refers to the codec that can be coded and decoded in other aspects smoothly when it is coded and decoded by the codec rules. If velocity and portamento are handled, then this section does not belong to any section that can be processed by this codec rule.

For the phonemes that are defined in the examples of the encoding rules and the decoding rules mentioned above, if a phoneme is defined as a sound, the phoneme includes the sound length value of the sound (no other information in the phoneme), which also belongs to the front The type 1 phoneme described above is a phoneme that defines multiple sounds that are pronounced at the same time. This phoneme includes the respective sound length values of these multiple sounds, and also includes the interval relationship data (phoneme) between each of these multiple sounds. There is no other information in it), which also belongs to the above-mentioned type 2 phoneme, such as a phoneme defined by multiple sounds containing at least two sounds that are not pronounced at the same time, and this phoneme includes the respective pronunciation moments of these multiple sounds value, the respective sound length values of these multiple sounds, the interval relationship data between each of these multiple sounds (there is no other information in the phoneme), and this also belongs to the aforementioned 3-type phoneme.

A phoneme can be represented by a phoneme number. For any phoneme number that can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information, the upper and lower position values of the phoneme need to be recorded as 1 in the value of the combined information. The determination of the upper and lower position value 1 of each phoneme is based on the lowest sound in the first sound in each phoneme, that is, the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme is the upper and lower of the lowest sound in the first sound in the phoneme Position value (the same is true for the following encoding and decoding examples). The determination of the upper and lower position value 1 of each class phoneme is based on the lowest sound in the first sound of each class phoneme, that is, the upper and lower position value 1 of the class phoneme is the first sound in the class phoneme. The upper and lower position values of the lowest tone (the following coding examples and decoding examples are also like this), the phonemes mentioned in the above two sentences are phonemes containing information of several tones. (The upper and lower position values mentioned everywhere in this paragraph, the upper and lower position value 1 all refer to the staff, and the first sound mentioned in this paragraph may also be mute, that is, the sound corresponding to the rest). The upper and lower position values of a sound in this encoding rule example and decoding rule example refer to the distance unit higher or lower than the middle line of the five lines of the staff of the sound channel where the sound is located.

Give an example of phoneme definition (these sound combinations are mainly composed of two basic sounds, the pitch of the second sound is higher than that of the first sound, and each of these two sounds has a crown sound):

Tone combination 1: There is a major 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have a 3rd-degree crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 2: There is a minor 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 3: There is a major 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 4: There is a minor 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Sound combination 5: between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone is a major 3rd degree, both of these two tones have an 8th interval crown sound, the sound length of the 1st tone and its crown sound is 1 beat, the 2nd tone and its crown sound The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 6: There is a minor 3rd between the first and second tones, and both of these two tones have an 8-degree crown. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 7: There is a major 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have an 8th interval crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 8: There is a minor 3 degree between the 1st sound and the 2nd sound. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 9: There is a major 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have a 3rd-degree crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 10: There is a minor 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have a 3rd-degree crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 11: There is a major 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have a 3rd-degree crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 12: There is a minor 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 13: There is a major 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have an 8th interval crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 14: There is a minor 3rd between the first and second tones, and both of these two tones have an 8-degree crown. The sound length of the crown sound is 1 beat, and the pronunciation time of the second sound is 1 beat slower than that of the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Sound combination 15: between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone is a major 3rd degree, both of these two tones have an 8th interval crown sound, the sound length of the 1st tone and its crown sound is half a beat, the 2nd tone and its The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

Tone combination 16: There is a minor 3rd between the 1st tone and the 2nd tone. Both of these two tones have an 8th interval crown sound. The sound length of the crown sound is half a beat, and the second sound is pronounced one beat slower than the first sound (these sounds also have a definite pitch value)

The above 16 kinds of tone combinations can be defined as 16 different phonemes (any phoneme does not contain the pitch value of any tone), and each phoneme number can be assigned to a total of 16 phoneme numbers, each phoneme contains two The respective pronunciation time values of the sounds (with the first sound as the starting point of the moment), the respective sound length values of the two sounds, and the interval relationship data between the two sounds (the interval relationship data between the two sounds here is two Interval relationship between tones), there is no other information in the phoneme. (The beats mentioned above all define quarter notes as one beat)

Temporary sharps, flats, double sharps, double flats, and restorations are often seen in music scores. The function of these symbols is only to temporarily change the interval relationship between the tones in the sound combination on which the symbols act. , but if the phoneme database data is complete, the new sound combination formed by these several tones after changing the interval relationship should correspond to a defined phoneme (this phoneme is unlocated) and a certain phoneme recorded in the phoneme database (this The phoneme is unlocated), so when encoding, use the phoneme number of this certain phoneme in the phoneme database plus a value of 1 for the upper and lower position of this certain phoneme to represent the new sound combination, or after changing the interval relationship The new sound combination formed by these several sounds, the corresponding defined self-positioned phoneme should be the same as a certain self-positioned phoneme recorded in the phoneme database, so when encoding, use this certain self-positioned phoneme in the phoneme database The phoneme number of the music section can be used to represent the new sound combination; A sound combination of two tones (two tones each occupy half a beat; the beat here refers to the actual beat of the passage) is defined as an unlocated phoneme (two tones in a phoneme each occupy a half beat; mentioned here and in the following three sentences The beats are abstract beats, whose value is equal to the actual beat of the passage), the pitch of the back tone is higher than that of the front tone, the interval between the two tones is 3 degrees larger, and the back tone is half a beat slower than the front tone. The phoneme database records the unlocated phoneme defined according to this sound combination (this phoneme corresponds to a phoneme number), and then on the track of the stave (mode and clef are unchanged) at the back of the music section, a phoneme containing two The sound combination of a sound is equivalent to copying the sound combination mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph (the pitch of each sound and the sound length are all corresponding to the same) and the latter sound is given to the temporary flat number, so that the two The interval of the sound becomes a small 3 degree, not the original 3 degree phoneme, but another phoneme (unlocated) recorded in the aforementioned phoneme database is defined according to this sound combination, that is, the phoneme in this other phoneme The interval between the two tones is 3 degrees smaller and the two tones each occupy half a beat and the pitch of the back tone is higher than that of the front tone and the back tone is half a beat slower than the front tone (the beat in this sentence refers to the abstract beat), (This phoneme also corresponds to another phoneme number), so when encoding, use the phoneme number of this other phoneme plus the upper and lower position value 1 of this other phoneme to represent that this has given the sound combination of the temporary flat number. Therefore, when building a phoneme database, you don’t need to consider symbols such as temporary sharps and flats. You only need to take into account the different interval relationships between the sounds in various sound combinations in the database, and define enough phonemes. When the music score is encoded, it can be determined which phoneme to use for encoding according to the actual temporary sharps, flats, etc. in the sound combination.

For each different phoneme, a different phoneme number is given (for example, each phoneme can be represented by a binary number), and each phoneme can be represented by a phoneme number during encoding. The length of each phoneme number can be consistent (this instruction manual uses the same method as an example for the coding rules and decoding rules as an example), and can also be inconsistent in length. In ordinary music, the frequency of each phoneme's occurrence can be counted. Frequently occurring ones can be Assign short numbers, and assign long numbers that do not appear frequently, for example, you can use Huffman numbering or other numbering methods, so that the effect of compressing the data length can be achieved.

In addition, for different systems of music, the musical techniques and chord types used are all regional. For example, the musical techniques and chord types of the works of various musicians in European classical music are very similar. It is also similar, but the music techniques of European classical music and Yue opera are quite different, so different phoneme databases can be defined for different music systems (phonemes that pronounce the same sound generally need to be classified according to the frequency of use in different phoneme databases) give different phoneme numbers), to facilitate coding and improve compression efficiency, generally one or more BITs can be opened in front of the value of the piece combination information to indicate which phoneme database is used, and in the memory set related to the pickup, the Each phoneme database is all stored in, and when decoding, according to the difference information in front of the value of the music segment combination information, the corresponding phoneme database is decoded; also the common different music systems can be unified as a total music system, and each music system (these each The music system refers to the different music systems mentioned in the previous sentence. The musical techniques and chord types used belong to this general music system, and are encoded according to the unified coding rules and decoded according to the unified decoding rules; this manual As an example, the encoding rule is based on the encoding of the music section of the overall music system. This manual is based on the decoding of the value of the combination information of the music section of the overall music system as an example. The following section combination information The passages involved in the value codec example are also taken as examples in the general music system. The encoding rules and decoding rules mentioned in the claims may or may not restrict which music system to use.

After the phonemes are defined, assign phoneme numbers to each phoneme, and assemble each phoneme to form a phoneme database for encoding, and also use the phoneme database when decoding; the examples of encoding rules, decoding rules, encoding examples and The decoding example involves the information of a phoneme recorded in each record item in the phoneme database used (for a phoneme defined as a phoneme, the information of a phoneme mentioned here includes the phoneme number, the sound length value of the sound, etc. A phoneme that defines multiple sounds that are pronounced at the same time. The information of a phoneme mentioned here includes the phoneme number, the respective sound length values of the multiple sounds, and the interval relationship data between the multiple sounds. , for a phoneme that defines a plurality of sounds that contain at least two sounds that are not pronounced at the same time, the information of a phoneme mentioned here includes the phoneme number, the respective pronunciation time values of these multiple sounds, and the respective sound length values, Information such as interval relationship data between each tone of these multiple tones).

Obviously, the same phoneme can generally be used for the pronunciation combination of different sections; that is, when encoding generates the value of the combination information indicating how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of a section, it involves the phoneme used (the phoneme mentioned here is exactly what the previous sentence said' How to use phonemes to join together the phoneme mentioned in the pronunciation of a passage' can use a certain phoneme, when encoding generates the value of the joining information representing how to use phonemes to join together the pronunciation of another passage, the phoneme used (here said The phoneme is the phoneme mentioned in the above sentence "how to use phonemes to combine the pronunciation of another passage") and this certain phoneme can also be used (this "this certain phoneme" refers to the aforementioned "a certain phoneme") Phoneme'), when decoding the value of a segment’s combination information, a certain phoneme can be used in the phonemes used to combine the pronunciation of this segment, and when decoding the value of another segment’s combination information, it can be used to combine the pronunciation of this segment This phoneme can also be used in the phoneme of .

The localized phonemes involved in the examples of coding rules and decoding rules in this manual mainly take the tones in the localized phoneme as an example in the same channel, that is, each sound in a localized phoneme belongs to the same channel. One channel (this kind of positioned phoneme can be called a positioned monophonic phoneme), in fact, each sound in a positioned phoneme can also belong to multiple channels (this kind of positioned phoneme can be called a positioned monophonic phoneme). The positioned phoneme is a positioned multi-channel phoneme); the positioned monophonic phoneme can be used to stitch together the pronunciation of the segment (the encoding rule and decoding rule used as an example in this manual are taken as an example), and it can also be used Several positioned multi-channel phonemes and several positioned monophonic phonemes are used to combine the pronunciation of the passage, or all the positioned multi-channel phonemes can be used to combine the pronunciation of the passage, and the positioned multi-channel phonemes The usage of the phoneme is similar to that of the positioned monophonic phoneme, and reference can be made to the usage of the positioned monophonic phoneme described in this manual. (every positioned phoneme involved in the codec example of the application document is like this, that is, each sound in the positioned phoneme belongs to the same channel; Each sound in the sound belongs to the same channel)

The phoneme database and other data for decoding can be stored in memory within the pickup for decoding. In addition, the phoneme database used for decoding and the phoneme database used for encoding should generally be the same or compatible; the phoneme database used for the following encoding examples and the phoneme database used for decoding examples are the same.

Other compositional features of musical passages:

Repeat: promptly repeat the previous piece of music, as shown in Figure 12, which is a schematic diagram of repeating the positioned phoneme 56 (this phoneme contains 4 tones) twice.

Repetition with some changes: Repeat the previous piece of music and slightly modify some of the repeated sounds.

Repetition of moving intervals: Repeat the previous piece of music and move up or down one or more intervals (modulus) obtained by the repetition.

These characteristics can be utilized to achieve the effect of compressing the amount of encoded information; for the repetition of sound combinations in the music section, duplication can be used to obtain repeated sound combinations when assembling. (A piece of music referred to in the above lines generally does not refer to a piece of music, but does not have a fixed length in advance. For example, the sound of the previous 1 measure can be copied, or the sound of the first 3 measures can be copied, or the sound of the first 3 measures can be copied. The previous 1 positioned phoneme is copied, etc.)

The coding of the segment can be applied to the segment of one channel or multiple channels, and the decoding pronunciation of the value of the combination information of the segment can be applied to one channel or multiple channels.

When stitching, you can use sequential stitching, interweaving stitching and other grouping forms (the processing methods of sequential stitching and interweaving stitching can refer to the previous description of this manual), and you can also use related processing forms such as modifying and copying the positioned phonemes (for positioning Phonemes can be modified, and the copying process can refer to the previous description of this manual).

The definition of the structure of the value structure of the segment combination information obtained by encoding the segment in this encoding rule can be as follows:

The front is encoding header information: information such as mode and clef information, rhythm information, (can also contain timbre information, but this is not necessary).

The following data is composed of various segments. These segments generally include: phoneme segment, control segment, among which the control segment generally includes channel change segment, copy control segment, modular copy control segment, a little change copy segment, modification segment, The interweaving and splicing segment, the end marker segment, etc., and the control segment may also include a mode change segment and the like.

The information contained in each paragraph may be:

Phoneme segment: 0001, the number of phonemes, followed by the upper and lower position value 1 of each phoneme and the phoneme number.

Change (code) channel segment: 0010, new channel number.

Copy control segment: 0011, the number of previously positioned phonemes to be copied, and the number of times of copying.

Modulus copy section: 0100, the number of previously positioned phonemes to be copied, and the value of the modulo step.

Copy section with some changes: 0110, the number of previously positioned phonemes to be copied, how many tones need to be changed, the number of tones to be changed, and the value of the pitch of the changed tones.

Modification section: 1000, for the upper and lower position value of the modified phoneme 1, for the phoneme number of the modified phoneme, and the specific content of the modification.

Interweaving and splicing segment: 1001, used for the upper and lower position values 1 and phoneme numbers of each phoneme in the interweaving and splicing.

End flag segment: 0111, end flag.

The above numbers like 0111 represent the start flag of the control segment.

The copying involved in the above 9 lines, each copying is to copy the positioned phonemes in one channel (instead of copying the positioned phonemes in multiple channels at one time), for example, there is a need to copy in the copy control section The number of the previously positioned phonemes, the "previously positioned phonemes" here refers to the positioned phonemes in the currently specified or default channel, of course the channel here can be channel 1, or Road 2 and so on.

The specific content of the modification in the modification section is as follows:

The first two BITs indicate what modification is made: 00 means to delete the sound, 01 means to add the sound, and 10 means to move the sound up and down. As an example of modifying the positioned phoneme), when the first two BITs are 10, the next 3 BITs indicate the up and down movement of the sound at which pronunciation position (assuming that there are only 8 at most of the positioned phonemes that can be used for modification Pronunciation time position, using 3 BITs to represent the pronunciation time position from the left, for example, the phoneme in Figure 16 has only two pronunciation time positions, and these two pronunciation time positions are represented by 000, 001 respectively), then 2 A BIT indicates that the number of sounds from the bottommost sound on the pronunciation moment position will be moved up and down (assuming that there are at most 4 sounds in each pronunciation moment position in the positioned phoneme that can be used for modification, use 2 BITs to Indicate which sound it is), and then 5 BITs indicate that the sound to be moved moves up (raised) or moves down (lowers) several steps at the position of the pronunciation moment (the highest BIT of these 5 BITs 0 means up, 1 means down, the lower 4 bits of these 5 BITs represent the number of moving steps). The pronunciation time position mentioned in this paragraph is for a specific phoneme. All sounds in a phoneme may be pronounced at one time (this time is the only pronunciation time position in this phoneme), or they may be pronounced separately at different times (These different moments are exactly the positions of each pronunciation moment in this phoneme).

With regard to the definition of the concept of distance units mentioned throughout this application document, the distance between two adjacent lines among the five lines on the stave is 2 distance units, and the space between adjacent two lines is adjacent to its upper or lower The distance between the lines is 1 distance unit, and so on, if there is a line and two spaces between two lines, then the distance between these two lines is 2+2=4 distance units, and so on in other cases, This is also the case when there are added lines above or below the five lines of the staff, and the distance unit is calculated regardless of the mode and clef on the staff. For example, the note head of a sound (that is, the ellipse) is between the middle line of the five lines of the staff and the line immediately above the middle line, then the distance between the note head of this note and the middle line of the five lines of the staff is 1 distance unit, if the note head of this note is on the middle line of the five lines of the staff immediately adjacent to the upper line, then the distance between the note head of this note and the middle line of the five lines of the staff is 2 distance units.

The encoding example in this manual, the upper and lower position value 1 of each phoneme mentioned in the decoding example is represented by 5 BITs, and the highest BIT of the 5 BITs indicates that the first sound of the phoneme to be positioned should be placed here Whether the phoneme to be positioned is above or below the middle line of the five-line staff of the vocal channel, if it is above, the highest BIT is 0, if it is below, the highest BIT is 1, and the last 4 BITs indicate that What is the distance unit between the first sound of the phoneme to be located and the middle line of the five lines of the staff of the channel where the phoneme to be located is located (for example, the first sound of the phoneme to be located should be placed On the top line of the five lines, the distance is 4 distance units), for example, the first sound of the phoneme to be positioned is to be placed on the five lines of the staff of the channel where the phoneme to be positioned is located line, the upper and lower position value of this phoneme is 00000, and the position of the first sound in the phoneme to be positioned (also the first sound to be placed on the staff) is calculated and this How much is the distance from the middle line of the five-line staff of the vocal channel where the phoneme to be located is? The unit of distance is only the notehead of the first sound of the phoneme to be placed on the staff of the coded section (that is, the small ellipse) on the staff and the distance unit between the position on the stave where the phoneme to be positioned is located and the middlemost line of the five lines of the staff of the channel where the phoneme is to be located, regardless of the first sound of the phoneme after being positioned Whether with sharps, flats, double sharps, double flats, or reversions. In this manual, the upper and lower position values of the phonemes of channel 1 and channel 2 are calculated in this way.

The first sound of the phoneme mentioned in this encoding rule example and decoding rule example and encoding example and decoding example refers to the sound with the lowest pitch among all the sounds pronounced at the first moment in the phoneme, such as the first sound in the phoneme All the sounds produced at all times have only one sound, and this sound is the first sound of this phoneme. For example, the sound on the left in Figure 16 is the sound pronounced at the first moment of this phoneme, and only this sound is pronounced at the first moment, and this sound is the first sound of this phoneme; The combination is defined as a phoneme, and the first sound of this phoneme is the two tones on the left (that is, a sound and its crown sound), and the lowest pitch of these two tones is the first sound of this phoneme; In Fig. 13, the phoneme containing the information of one tone on the leftmost side of the upper channel, obviously its first tone is the only tone. In the same way, the first sound of the quasi-phoneme mentioned in this encoding rule example and decoding rule example and encoding example and decoding example refers to the sound with the lowest pitch among all the sounds issued at the first moment in the class phoneme.

Similarly, the upper and lower position values of the lowest tone among all the first sounds in the self-positioning phoneme mentioned in the decoding example 2 later are also represented by 5 BITs, and the highest BIT of the 5 BITs indicates that the sound is It is above or below the middle line of the five-line staff of the vocal channel where the self-positioned phoneme is located. If it is above, the highest BIT is 0; if it is below, the highest BIT is 1, and the last 4 BITs indicate How many distance units are there between this sound and the middlemost line of the five lines of the staff of the vocal channel where the self-localized phoneme is located (for example, if the sound is on the top line of the five lines, the distance is 4 distance units), If this sound is on the middle line of the five lines of the staff of the vocal channel where the self-positioned phoneme is located, then the upper and lower position values of this sound are 00000; Calculation of the upper and lower position values of the lowest tone of all the first sounds in the first phoneme and the upper and lower position values of the lowest sound of all the first sounds in the self-positioned phoneme mentioned in the decoding example 2 later Are the same.

The data of the value of the piece of information that is encoded is arranged like this: First, the encoding header, and then put together those related information of all the pronunciations of channel 1 in the coded section (such as recording the information of all phonemes of this channel with phoneme segments, Or use the phoneme segment to record some phoneme information of this channel and use the copy control segment to record some phoneme positioning and copy information of this channel; there can be multiple phoneme segments, and there are other types of control segments for each The control segment can also appear multiple times in the value of a mosaic information, such as repeating the control segment, modifying the segment, or interleaving the mosaic segment, etc., can appear multiple times in the value of a mosaic information), if there are other channels Then put together those relevant information of all the pronunciations of other channels in this coded section (for example, record the information of all phonemes of this channel with phoneme segments, or record the information of some phonemes of this channel with phoneme segments and use The copy control section records some phoneme positioning and copying information of this channel; there can be multiple phoneme sections, and each control section in some other types of control sections can also appear multiple times in the value of a combined information. Such as repeating the control section, modifying the section, or interweaving and merging sections, etc. can appear multiple times in the value of a merging information), in this way, if there are more sound channels, then put and merging these more voices in this coded music section The relevant information of all the pronunciations of each channel in the channel; the end of the value of the segment stitching information is the end marker segment.

The starting time of the pronunciation of different vocal channels mentioned in the previous paragraph is the same. If some vocal channels are not pronounced in the first few beats, then the rest phonemes should be used to fill these unpronounced actual beats, and then the rests are still regarded as pronunciation It's just that it's muted.

The number of channels is not limited, generally 2, 4, 8 and so on.

For the piano score, if two channels are used, the channel number is 1 to represent the main melody of the right hand, and the channel number is 2 to represent the accompaniment melody of the left hand.

For some complex music, sometimes it is necessary to define which channel the crowns are played from, but for simple music without crowns, no definition is required.

The phonemes defined in the encoding rule examples and decoding rule examples mentioned in this manual do not include the pitch value of any tone, and the phonemes that can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information involved in the following encoding examples and decoding examples are also Like this (the pitch value of any tone is not included in the phoneme). What this description says defines the combination of sounds as shown in Figure 9 as a phoneme, and the phoneme actually only includes the respective pronunciation time values of these 4 tones, and the interval relationship data between each of these 4 tones, and these 4 tones. These information of the sound length of each sound of each sound, do not include the pitch value of any sound in these 4 sounds, so Figure 9 is only a special case when this phoneme is placed on the staff (this phoneme can also be placed on the staff other positions in the vertical direction), other the sound combinations like Fig. 8 are defined as phonemes, the tone combinations like Fig. 10 are defined as phonemes, and the tone combinations like Fig. 11 are defined as phonemes and are all understood as shown in Fig. 9; Referring to Fig. 12, Fig. 13, Fig. 14, Fig. 15, the phoneme on the stave of Fig. 16 also refers to the special case when the phoneme is placed on the stave, in these phonemes itself does not comprise the pitch value of any sound, For example, the rightmost phoneme 56 (information containing 2 tones) of Fig. 13 sound channel 1, itself does not include the pitch value of any tone in this phoneme, and multiple different positions in the vertical direction of the staff can put this phoneme, and the phoneme 56 placed on the far right in channel 1 of Figure 13 is just a special case of this phoneme being placed on the stave.

When decoding, define corresponding decoding according to the above paragraphs.

When decoding, the full-step pronunciation method can be used, that is, when decoding, according to the value of the music piece combination information, after obtaining all the decoding results, then take the decoding results to pronounce and get the whole pronunciation of the music section (or only according to all the decoding results as needed) In practice, for the full-step pronunciation method, the decoding result can also be converted into music spectrum data by the MCU (the decoding result may also be other data forms that can be converted into musical sounds), and then the MCU (or a music chip external to the MCU, etc.) use the music synthesis method to make the music section spectrum data play the pronunciation of this section (if the music chip external to the MCU is used to play music, it should generally be the music section by the MCU through the connection line) The spectrum data is transmitted to the music chip external to the MCU, and the music chip external to the MCU synthesizes the music spectrum data to make the speaker play the pronunciation of this section), so the MCU in the pickup (or the music chip external to the MCU, etc.) generally Music synthesis is required. For the full-step pronunciation method, the decoding result can also be converted by the MCU into other data forms that can be converted into musical sounds except the music spectrum data, and then decoded by the MCU (or an external music chip, etc.) according to these forms As a result, the speaker plays the pronunciation of this section (if the music chip external to the MCU is used to play music, then generally the MCU should transmit the decoding results of these forms to the music chip external to the MCU through the connection line, and the music chip external to the MCU According to the decoding results of these forms, the loudspeaker plays the pronunciation of this section), correspondingly, the MCU in the pickup (or the music chip external to the MCU, etc.) generally also plays music according to the decoding results of these forms according to the music synthesis method.

In addition to the full-step pronunciation method, a step-by-step pronunciation method can also be used during decoding, that is, in the decoding process, each time (that is, each step) a part of the decoding result is obtained, this part of the decoding result is used for pronunciation, and it continues like this Decoding continues until the end of decoding, that is, completes the entire pronunciation of the decoded section (or completes the partial pronunciation of the playback section, if it is the partial pronunciation of the playback section, then generally the parts that are not all decoding results are pronounced in stages, so as to Form part of the pronunciation of the music section); and a part of the decoding result obtained each time (each step) can also be converted into a part of the spectral data of the music section and other forms of data and take it for pronunciation; and obviously the step-by-step pronunciation method can also be Pronunciation in two steps to play all or part of the encoded passage. For example, in the decoding process, the first half of the decoding result is first decoded and used for pronunciation, and the second step is decoded to obtain the decoding result. The second half is taken and pronounced, so that the two parts before and after the pronunciation form the decoded pronunciation (here is the whole pronunciation of the coded section). Because when playing music, it is necessary to accurately determine when each sound is pronounced, so when the decoding adopts a step-by-step pronunciation method, it is generally necessary to record the time in the MCU, so that the action of each step sound can be performed at each appropriate moment.

Coding example 1:

As shown in Figure 13, it is assumed that it is a passage of a piano piece, two channels, and the mode is C major. Each sound has no crown sound.

The upper and lower position value of the phoneme is 1, based on the middle line among the five lines of the staff of the vocal channel where the phoneme is located, a total of 5 BITs, and the highest bit BIT indicates up and down.

The main channel involves 3 different phonemes 56 (these 3 phonemes contain 1, 1, and 2 tones respectively), and the sub-channel involves 1 phoneme 56 (this phoneme contains 4 tones), and the positioned phoneme is Repeated 3 times.

Assume that the phoneme numbers of the three phonemes involved in the main channel have been defined as 0010010110, 1001101001, and 0100001100 respectively, and that the phoneme numbers of one phoneme involved in the sub-channel have been defined as 0110001010,

Assume that the three phonemes involved in the main channel (channel 1) are called phoneme 1, phoneme 2, and phoneme 3 from left to right, and the phoneme involved in the secondary channel (channel 2) is called phoneme 4.

Encoded segments of data:

First make the encoding header information:

Beat information: 0010 (that is, each measure occupies 4 beats, and a quarter note is 1 beat. The beat here refers to the actual beat of the passage)

Tempo information: 10000000 (128 beats/minute, the beat here refers to the actual beat of the music section)

Number of channels: 0010 (2 channels)

Channel 1 mode information: 0000 (C major)

Channel 1 clef information: 01 (treble clef, 00, 01, 10, 11 represent low, high, middle, tenor clef respectively)

Channel 2 mode information: 0000 (C major)

Channel 2 Clef Information: 00 (bass clef)

Then code:

Go to channel 1: 0010,000

Phoneme segment: 0001, 0010 (with 3 phonemes)

The upper and lower position value of phoneme 1: 00000 (the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 1: 0010010110

The upper and lower position value of phoneme 2 is 1: 00010 (the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 2: 1001101001

The upper and lower position value of phoneme 3 is 1: 00000 (the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 3: 0100001100

Go to channel 2: 0010, 001

Phoneme segment: 0001, 0000 (with 1 phoneme)

The upper and lower position value of phoneme 4 is 1: 10100 (the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 4: 0110001010

Copy control section: 0011, 0000 (copy the first positioned phoneme in front of the current channel), 0010 (copy 3 times)

End flag segment: 0111

Combining the above data including the encoding header in order (that is, arranging them in order), the encoding value of this section is:

001010000000001000000100000000100000001001000000001001011000010

10011010010000001000011000010001000100001010001100010100011000000100111

This coded value is the value of the segment combination information, which can be put into a code word, etc.

(The BIT digits of the encoded data used for example here are more than 130 digits, but it can be placed in a two-dimensional barcode)

Decoding example 1:

The value of the segment combination information (the value of the segment combination information is the encoding result of encoding example 1):

001010000000001000000100000000100000001001000000001001011000010

10011010010000001000011000010001000100001010001100010100011000000100111

When decoding, read the information in the encoding header first in order:

0010 (that is, each measure occupies 4 beats, and a quarter note is 1 beat. The beat here refers to the actual beat of the passage)

10000000 (128 beats/minute, the beat here refers to the actual beat of the music section)

0010 (2 channels)

0000 (channel 1 mode is C major)

01 (channel 1 clef is treble clef)

0000 (channel 2 mode is C major)

00 (channel 2 clef is bass clef)

Then look at the following information in order:

0010 (return channel), 000

0001 (phoneme segment), 0010 (3 phonemes)

00000 (this is the upper and lower position value of phoneme 1 of channel 1, the highest bit BIT is 0 means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the stave of this channel, and 1 means it is below)

0010010110 phoneme number of phoneme 1

00010 (the upper and lower position value of phoneme 2 is 1, the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1 means it is below)

1001101001 phoneme number of phoneme 2

00000 (the upper and lower position value of phoneme 3 is 1, the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1 means it is below)

0100001100 phoneme number of phoneme 3

0010 (return channel), 001

0001 (phoneme segment), 0000 (1 phoneme)

10100 (this is the upper and lower position value of phoneme 4, the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1 means it is below)

0110001010 phoneme number of phoneme 4

0011 (copy the control section), 0000 (copy the first positioned phoneme in front of the current channel), 0010 (copy 3 times)

0111 (end flag segment)

The stitching steps and decoding steps are defined as follows:

Define the information of the aforementioned read encoding header as decoding step 1,

Stitching step 1 is also decoding step 2: From the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, get the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 1 of channel 1, and then get the phoneme number of phoneme 1 from this phoneme segment, press this phoneme The number finds the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database, and the composition of the sound in phoneme 1 is obtained from this record item, and the data obtained above (the upper and lower position values of phoneme 1 are 1, the composition of the sound in phoneme 1 ), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the phoneme 1 li of being positioned and music section articulation moment value and sound length value,

Combining step 2 is also decoding step 3: Then, from the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 2 of channel 1 is obtained, and then the phoneme number of phoneme 2 is obtained from this phoneme segment, click here The phoneme number finds the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database, and obtains the composition of the sound in the phoneme 2 from this record item, and the data obtained above (the upper and lower position values of the phoneme 2 are 1, and the composition of the sound in the phoneme 2 Situation), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the phoneme 2 li of being positioned and music section articulation moment value and sound length value,

Stitching step 3 is also decoding step 4: Then, from the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 3 of channel 1 is obtained, and then the phoneme number of phoneme 3 is obtained from this phoneme segment, click here The phoneme number finds the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database, and obtains the composition of the sound in the phoneme 3 from this record item, and the data obtained from the above (the upper and lower position values of the phoneme 3 are 1, and the composition of the sound in the phoneme 3 Situation), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the phoneme 3 li of being positioned and music section articulation moment value and sound length value,

Stitching step 4 is decoding step 5: From the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 2, the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 4 of channel 2 is obtained, and then the phoneme number of phoneme 4 is obtained from this phoneme segment, press this phoneme The number finds the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database, and the composition of the sound in phoneme 4 is obtained from this record item, and the data obtained above (the upper and lower position values of phoneme 4 are 1, the composition of the sound in phoneme 4 ), just can determine the actual pitch value of each sound in the phoneme 4 li that is positioned and the music section articulation time value and the sound length value,

Combining step 5 is also decoding step 6: then obtain the data of the copied section in the data of channel 2, copy each sound in the positioned phoneme 4 obtained in the previous combining step, and then copy it again, and then copy it again, Every time, each sound in the positioned phoneme 4 is copied again, and what is copied each time is a self-positioned phoneme (the upper and lower position value 3 of each self-located phoneme-like element is the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme 4) The respective actual pitch values of the 4 tones and the value of the sounding time of the music segment and the value of the sound length (the information obtained by each copy can be regarded as a self-positioned phoneme obtained by one copy),

Combining step 6 is also decoding step 7: the data (the actual pitch value of each sound and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value) of the data (the actual pitch value of each sound and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value) obtained by the above 5 assembling steps are combined to form a result ( In this result, there must be BIT to distinguish which data is for channel 1 and which data is for channel 2), and then add the rhythm obtained from the encoding header of the value of the segment combination information in front of the result according to a certain agreed format Information and the respective mode and clef information of the two channels, etc., to obtain the decoding result. The above merging step 1, merging step 2, merging step 3, and merging step 4 are all to obtain a positioned phoneme, and the merging step 5 is to get 3 self-positioned phonemes, so the above 5 merging steps mentioned earlier in this paragraph The obtained data of each sound is combined according to the obtained order to form a result, which is equivalent to the combination method of combining in order, the positioned phoneme 1 obtained in the above step 1 and the positioned phoneme 2 obtained in the step 2 Combine with the positioned phoneme 3 obtained in step 3 and the positioned phoneme 4 obtained in step 4 and the 3 self-positioned phonemes copied in step 5 to form a result (this result must be marked with BIT The data of the positioned phoneme 1, the data of the positioned phoneme 2, the data of the positioned phoneme 3 is the channel 1, the data of the positioned phoneme 4, and the copied data of the three self-located phonemes are channel 2).

The above channel 1 and channel 2 start to pronounce at the same time (according to the decoding result, there is an agreement that the data of channel 1 and channel 2 in the decoding result are used to pronounce at the same time. In general, before pronunciation according to the decoding result, it can be pronounced by The MCU or the music chip external to the MCU used for pronunciation first finds the data of channel 1 and the data of channel 2 in the decoding result so that the data of the two channels can be used to simultaneously emit the sound of the two channels).

Then according to the decoding result, it can be played with a pickup and the music played is as shown in Figure 13 (the decoding pronunciation method adopted here is a full-step pronunciation method); According to the decoding result, use the music synthesis method to make the speaker play the pronunciation of this section. The music chip of the music chip will decode the decoding result and make the speaker play the pronunciation of this section in the way of music synthesis), and the MCU in the pickup (or the music chip external to the MCU, etc.) The sound broadcasted at the time is the entire pronunciation of the coded section (the MCU or the music chip external to the MCU can also play part of the pronunciation of the coded section according to the part of the decoding result), and the decoding result obtained by decoding can also be converted to Divide into other data forms (such as spectrum data of the music section) and use other data forms to play the music section pronunciation. (The decoding result mentioned in this example refers to all the decoding results of the decoded music section)

The pronunciation time value of the music section of the sound obtained by the above steps of merging is measured by beat, that is, the pronunciation time value of the music section of a certain sound, for example, it can be 1 beat, 3 beats plus 3/4 beats, etc., these beats The number is calculated from the beginning of the section (the pronunciation time value of the first tone of the section is 0), and the pronunciation time of each tone in each class phoneme or positioned phoneme in each channel For the calculation method of the value, please refer to the paragraph beginning with "As for the above-mentioned decoding time" on page 28 of this manual. (The beat mentioned in this paragraph refers to the actual beat of the coded section)

During the above decoding, phoneme 1, phoneme 2, phoneme 3, and phoneme 4 can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information.

Coding example 2:

As shown in Figure 14, it is assumed that it is a passage of a piano piece, two channels, and the mode is C major. Each sound has no crown sound.

The upper and lower position value of the phoneme is 1, based on the middle line of the five lines of the staff of the vocal channel where the phoneme is located, a total of 5 BITs, and the highest bit BIT indicates up and down.

The main channel (channel 1) involves 2 different phonemes 56(1), 56(2), (these 2 phonemes contain 1 and 1 sound respectively), and the located phoneme 56(2) is repeated once , there is also a sound combination on the far right of the main channel (this sound combination contains 2 sounds), this sound combination can be made by first positioning the phonemes shown in Figure 16 and then modifying it, and the sub-channel (channel 2) involves 1 A phoneme 56 (3), (this phoneme contains 4 sounds), the back of the phoneme 56 (3) of the sub-channel is a sound combination, and this sound combination includes 8 sounds, and this sound combination can be shown in Figure 15 by two It is formed by interweaving two phonemes (before the interweaving and mosaic, the upper and lower positions of the two phonemes used for interweaving and mosaic are determined, that is, the upper and lower positions are as shown in Figure 15), and the rightmost side of the sub-channel is still Involving a phoneme 56 (4), (this phoneme contains 2 tones).

Assuming that the phoneme 56(1) and phoneme 56(2) involved in the main channel in Figure 14 have been defined as 0010010110 and 1001101001 respectively

Assuming that the phoneme 56(3) involved in the secondary channel in Figure 14, the phoneme number of the phoneme 56(4) has been defined as 0110001010, 0110001010

The phoneme number of phoneme 56 in Figure 16 is 0100001101

The phoneme numbers of the two phonemes 56 from left to right in Fig. 15 are 0111001100, 0111001101

Encoded segments of data:

First make the encoding header information:

Beat information: 0010 (that is, each measure occupies 4 beats, and a quarter note is 1 beat. The beat here refers to the actual beat of the passage)

Tempo information: 10000000 (128 beats/minute, the beat here refers to the actual beat of the music section)

Number of channels: 0010 (2 channels)

Channel 1 mode information: 0000 (C major)

Channel 1 clef information: 01 (treble clef, 00, 01, 10, 11 represent low, high, middle, tenor clef respectively)

Channel 2 mode information: 0000 (C major)

Channel 2 Clef Information: 00 (bass clef)

Then code:

Go to channel 1: 0010,000

Phoneme segment: 0001, 0001 (with 2 phonemes)

The upper and lower position value of phoneme 56(1) is 1: 00000 (the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 56(1): 0010010110

The upper and lower position value of phoneme 56(2) is 1: 00010 (the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 56(2): 1001101001

Copy control segment: 0011, 0000 (copy the first positioned phoneme in front of the current channel), 0000 (copy once)

Modified segment: 1000

00000 (the upper and lower position value of the phoneme used for modification is 1, the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff of this channel, and 1 means it is below)

0100001101 The phoneme number for the modified phoneme

10 means to move up and down the tone

001 These 3 BITs represent the up and down movement of the sound at the second pronunciation position from the left

00 These 2 BITs indicate that the first sound from the bottom sound at this pronunciation position will be moved

00001 These 5 BITs indicate that the sound to be moved moves up by 1 step at the pronunciation position (the highest BIT of these 5 BITs is 0, which means moving up, and 1, which means moving down)

Go to channel 2: 0010, 001

Phoneme segment (the first phoneme segment of channel 2): 0001, 0000 (with 1 phoneme)

The upper and lower position values of phoneme 56(3) 1: 10100 (the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 56(3): 0110001010

Interweave segment: 1001

10100 (the upper and lower position value of the first phoneme used for interweaving and splicing is 1, the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff of this channel, and 1 means it is below)

0111001100 The phoneme number of the first phoneme used for interweaving and stitching

10001 (the upper and lower position value of the second phoneme used for interweaving and splicing is 1, the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1 means it is below)

0111001101 The phoneme number of the second phoneme used for interweaving and stitching

Phoneme segment (the second phoneme segment of channel 2): 0001, 0000 (with 1 phoneme)

The upper and lower position values of phoneme 56(4) 1: 10100 (the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of phoneme 56(4): 1001101001

End flag segment: 0111

Combining the above data including the encoding header in order (that is, arranging them in order), the encoding value of this section is:

0010100000000010000001000000001000000010001000000010010110000101001101001

0011000000001000000000100001101100010000001001000100010000101000110001

0101001101000111001100100010111001101000100001010010011010010111

This coded value is the value of the segment combination information, which can be put into a code word, etc.

(The BIT digits of the encoded data used for example here are more than 130 digits, but it can be placed in a two-dimensional barcode)

Decoding example 2:

The value of the segment combination information (the value of the segment combination information is the encoding result of encoding example 2):

0010100000000010000001000000001000000010001000000010010110000101001101001

0011000000001000000000100001101100010000001001000100010000101000110001

0101001101000111001100100010111001101000100001010010011010010111

When decoding, read the information in the encoding header first in order:

0010 (that is, each measure occupies 4 beats, and a quarter note is 1 beat. The beat here refers to the actual beat of the passage)

10000000 (128 beats/minute, the beat here refers to the actual beat of the music section)

0010 (2 channels)

0000 (channel 1 mode is C major)

01 (channel 1 clef is treble clef)

0000 (channel 2 mode is C major)

00 (channel 2 clef is bass clef)

Then look at the following information in order:

0010 (return channel), 000

0001 (phoneme segment), 0001 (with 2 phonemes)

00000 This is the upper and lower position value of the phoneme 56(1) of channel 2. (The highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1, which means it is below)

0010010110 phoneme number of phoneme 56(1)

00010 This is the upper and lower position value of the phoneme 56(2) of channel 2. (The highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff in this channel, and 1, which means it is below)

1001101001 phoneme number of phoneme 56(2)

0011 (copy the control section), 0000 (copy the first positioned phoneme in front of the current channel), 0000 (copy once)

1000 modified segments

00000 (the upper and lower position value of the phoneme used for modification is 1, the highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff of this channel, and 1 means it is below)

0100001101 The phoneme number for the modified phoneme

10 means to move up and down the tone

001 These 3 BITs represent the up and down movement of the sound at the second pronunciation position from the left

00 These 2 BITs indicate that the first sound from the bottom sound at this pronunciation position will be moved

00001 These 5 BITs indicate that the sound to be moved moves up by 1 step at the pronunciation position (the highest BIT of these 5 BITs is 0, which means moving up, and 1, which means moving down)

0010 (return channel), 001

0001 (phoneme segment, this is the first phoneme segment of channel 2), 0000 (with 1 phoneme)

10100 This is the upper and lower position value of the phoneme 56(3) of channel 2. (The highest BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff of this channel, and 1, which means it is below)

The phoneme number of 0110001010 phoneme 56(3)

1001 interweaving segment

10100 (the upper and lower position value of the first phoneme used for interweaving and splicing is 1, the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff of this channel, and 1 means it is below)

0111001100 The phoneme number of the first phoneme used for interweaving and stitching

10001 (the upper and lower position value of the second phoneme used for interweaving and splicing is 1, the highest bit BIT is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the vocal staff, and 1 means it is below)

0111001101 The phoneme number of the second phoneme used for interweaving and stitching

0001 (phoneme segment, this is the second phoneme segment of channel 2), 0000 (with 1 phoneme)

10100 This is the upper and lower position value of the phoneme 56 (4) of channel 2. (The highest bit bit is 0, which means it is above the middle line of the five lines of the staff of this channel, and 1 means it is below)

1001101001 phoneme number of phoneme 56(4)

0111 (end flag segment)

The stitching steps and decoding steps are defined as follows:

Define the information of the aforementioned read encoding header as decoding step 1,

Combining step 1 is also decoding step 2: from the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56 (1) is obtained, and then the phoneme number of phoneme 56 (1) is obtained from this phoneme segment, press This phoneme numbering finds the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database, obtains the composition situation of the tone in the phoneme 56 (1) from this record item, obtains these data (the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56 (1) from above, Phoneme 56 (1) Li's sound composition situation), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the phoneme 56 (1) li of being positioned and music section articulation time value and sound length value,

Combining step 2 is also decoding step 3: then from the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme 56 (2) is obtained, and then the phoneme number of the phoneme 56 (2) is obtained from this phoneme segment, Find the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database by this phoneme number, obtain the composition situation of the sound in the phoneme 56 (2) from this record item, these data obtained from above (the upper and lower position values of phoneme 56 (2) 1 , phoneme 56 (2) in the composition of the sound), just can determine the actual pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme 56 (2) and the value of the pronunciation time of the music section and the sound length value,

Combining step 3 is also decoding step 4: then obtain the data of the copy section in the data of channel 1, and copy each tone in the positioned phoneme 56 (2) obtained in the previous step of combining (the sound obtained during duplication) Compared with the sound in the positioned phoneme 56 (2), the pitch and sound length are all unchanged), a self-positioned phoneme that is copied (the upper and lower position value 3 of this self-located phoneme-like phoneme is phoneme 56 ( 2) the actual pitch value of a sound in the upper and lower position value 1) and the pronunciation time value and sound length value of the passage (the information obtained by copying can be regarded as a self-positioned phoneme obtained by copying),

Combining step 4 is also decoding step 5: Then, in the modified section in the data of channel 1, take out the phoneme number of the phoneme used for modification, and then according to the upper and lower position values of the phoneme used for modification in the modified section 1 and this Interval relationship data between each tone in the phoneme and the mode (C major) and clef information of channel 1 obtained from the encoding head to obtain the actual pitch of each tone in the positioned phoneme for modification High value (that is, the pitch value) and the pronunciation time value and the sound length value of the section, and then according to the modification information in the modification section, the sound in the positioned phoneme is modified, that is, the sound of its second pronunciation position is lifted One step higher, the sound length value of this sound is still unchanged, and after this modified phoneme is modified, a self-localized phoneme (this phoneme represents the information of a sound combination) is obtained, so that at last It is the actual pitch value of each tone in this self-positioned phoneme, the value of the pronunciation time of the music segment and the value of the sound length.

Stitching step 5 is decoding step 6: get the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56(3) from the data of the first phoneme segment in the data of channel 2, and then get the phoneme of phoneme 56(3) from this phoneme segment Numbering, find the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database by this phoneme numbering, obtain the composition situation of the sound in the phoneme 56 (3) from this record item, obtain these data from above (the upper and lower positions of the phoneme 56 (3) Value 1, the composition situation of the sound in phoneme 56 (3) ), just can determine the actual pitch value and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value of each sound in the phoneme 56 (3) li that is positioned,

Stitching step 6 is also decoding step 7: then in the interleaving and stitching section in the data of channel 2, take out the respective phoneme numbers of the two phonemes used for interleaving and stitching, and obtain the phoneme numbers for interleaving and stitching from this interleaving and stitching section. The upper and lower position value of the first phoneme is 1 to locate the first phoneme used for interleaving and mosaicing, and the upper and lower position value of the second phoneme for interleaving and mosaicing is obtained from this interleaving and mosaic segment to be used for interleaving The combined second phoneme is positioned, and the two positioned phonemes are put together to obtain a self-positioned phoneme (this phoneme represents the information of a sound combination; it is assumed that it is based on the used These two phonemes come to obtain this phoneme by interweaving and combining these two positioned phonemes correspondingly according to the agreement of interlacing and mosaicing), and the upper and lower position values of this self-positioning-like phoneme are 3 (that is, the most in this self-positioning-like phoneme) The upper and lower position values of the lowest tone among all the sounds pronounced first, that is, the upper and lower position values of the first sound pronounced in this self-positioned phoneme) are the upper and lower position values of the first phoneme used for interweaving and stitching. (The upper and lower position values of the lowest tone in all the sounds that are pronounced first in this self-positioned phoneme are equal to the upper and lower position values of the lowest tone in all the sounds that are first pronounced in the first phoneme that is used for interweaving and stitching) , so that the final result is the actual pitch value of each sound in this self-positioned phoneme, the pronunciation time value and the sound length value of the segment,

Stitching step 7 is also decoding step 8: then from the data of the second phoneme segment in the data of channel 2, the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56(4) is obtained, and then the phoneme 56(4) is obtained from this phoneme segment Phoneme numbering, find the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database by this phoneme numbering, obtain the composition situation of the sound in the phoneme 56 (4) from this record item, obtain these data (up and down of phoneme 56 (4) from above Position value 1, the composition situation of the sound in phoneme 56 (4) li), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the phoneme 56 (4) li that is positioned and the music section articulation time value and the sound length value,

Combining step 8 is also decoding step 9: the data (the actual pitch value of each sound and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value) of the data (the actual pitch value of each tone and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value) obtained by the above 7 assembling steps are combined to form a result ( In this result, there must be BIT to distinguish which data is for channel 1 and which data is for channel 2), and then add the rhythm obtained from the encoding header of the value of the segment combination information in front of the result according to a certain agreed format Information and the respective mode and clef information of the two channels, etc., to obtain the decoding result. The above merging step 1, merging step 2, merging step 5, and merging step 7 all get a positioned phoneme, so the data of each sound obtained in the above 7 merging steps mentioned earlier in this paragraph are combined according to the order obtained. Serve as a result, which is equivalent to the method of merging in sequence, copying the positioned phoneme 56(1) obtained in the above merging step 1 and the positioned phoneme 56(2) obtained in the merging step 2 and merging step 3 1 self-localized phone-like and merging step 4 modify the self-localized phone-like obtained in merging step 5 and the localized phoneme 56(3) and merging step 6 interweave and merging the self-localized phone-like obtained in merging step 7 The obtained located phoneme 56(4) is put together to form a result, and the data of the located phoneme 56(1) and the located phoneme 56(2) must be indicated by BIT in this result, and the 1 obtained by copying The phoneme-like data of self-positioning, the phoneme-like data of self-positioning obtained by modifying is channel 1, and the data of the phoneme 56 (3) being indicated is marked, and the phoneme-like data of self-positioning obtained by interweaving and splicing, The data for the localized phoneme 56(4) is for channel 2.

The above channel 1 and channel 2 start to pronounce at the same time (according to the decoding result, there is an agreement that the data of channel 1 and channel 2 are used to pronounce at the same time. In general, the MCU or user can use the decoding result before pronunciation) The music chip externally connected to the MCU for pronunciation first finds the data of the channel 1 and the data of the channel 2 in the decoding result so that the data of the two channels can be used to simultaneously emit the sound of the two channels).

Then according to the decoding result, it can be played with the pickup and the music section played is just as shown in Figure 14 (the decoding pronunciation method adopted here is the full-step pronunciation method); Directly follow the decoding result and use the music synthesis method to make the speaker play the pronunciation of this section (if the music chip external to the MCU is used to play music, then the MCU should generally transmit the decoding result to the external music chip of the MCU through the connection line, and the MCU The external music chip uses the decoding result to make the speaker play the pronunciation of this section in the way of music synthesis), and the MCU in the pickup (or the music chip external to the MCU, etc.) has the music synthesis function; this decoding example adopts the full-step pronunciation method, and The sound played during decoding is all the pronunciation of the coded section (the MCU or the music chip external to the MCU can also play part of the pronunciation of the coded section according to the part of the decoding result), and the decoding result obtained by decoding can also be used during pronunciation. Convert to other data forms (such as the spectral data of the music section) and use other data forms to play the music section pronunciation. (The decoding result mentioned in this example refers to all the decoding results of the decoded music section)

When the above is decoded with the full-step pronunciation method, the phoneme 56 (1), phoneme 56 (2), phoneme 56 (3), phoneme 56 (4) can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information, and the phoneme used for modification is used for The first phoneme of interweaving and stitching is used for the second phoneme of interweaving and stitching.

If the step-by-step pronunciation method is adopted, the stitching steps and decoding steps are defined as follows (when the step-by-step pronunciation method is adopted, it is generally necessary to locate the data of each channel in the value of the stitching information in advance. In this example, you can read the encoding header at the beginning of decoding. After the data, find two channel-transfer segments in the value of the combined information, that is, the segment starting with 0010, one of which is transferred to channel 1, followed by the data of channel 1, and one of them is transferred to channel 1 2 is followed by channel 2 data):

Decoding step 1: Read the information in the encoding header, find the position of the data of channel 1 and the position of the data of channel 2 in the value of the combined information, then check the data of channel 1 and the data of channel 2, and pronounce it according to its pronunciation Which localized phonemes and localized phonemes to be pronounced will be generated, as well as the time taken for their pronunciation, so as to determine what to do in each step of the following step-by-step pronunciation method,

Combining step 1 is also decoding step 2: from the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56 (1) is obtained, and then the phoneme number of phoneme 56 (1) is obtained from this phoneme segment, press This phoneme numbering finds the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database, obtains the composition situation of the tone in the phoneme 56 (1) from this record item, obtains these data (the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56 (1) from above, Phoneme 56 (1) Li's sound composition situation), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the phoneme 56 (1) li of being positioned and music section articulation time value and sound length value,

From the data of the first phoneme segment in the data of channel 2, get the upper and lower position value 1 of phoneme 56(3), and then get the phoneme number of phoneme 56(3) from this phoneme segment, press this phoneme number in the phoneme database Find the record item of this phoneme in this record item, and get the composition of the sound in phoneme 56(3) from this record item, from the data obtained above (the upper and lower position values of phoneme 56(3) are 1, in phoneme 56(3) The composition situation of the tone), just can determine the actual pitch value of each tone in the positioned phoneme 56 (3) and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value,

The actual pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme 56 (1) obtained earlier from the rhythm information obtained in the encoding header of the value of the segment combination information and the respective modes and clef information of the two sound channels And the actual pitch value of each tone in the positioned phoneme 56 (3) and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value obtained in front and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value as the part of the decoding result, take to pronounce,

Combining step 2 is also decoding step 3: then from the data of the phoneme segment in the data of channel 1, the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme 56 (2) is obtained, and then the phoneme number of the phoneme 56 (2) is obtained from this phoneme segment, Find the record item of this phoneme in the phoneme database by this phoneme number, obtain the composition situation of the sound in the phoneme 56 (2) from this record item, these data obtained from above (the upper and lower position values of phoneme 56 (2) 1 , phoneme 56 (2) in the composition of the sound), just can determine the actual pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme 56 (2) and the value of the pronunciation time of the music section and the sound length value,

Then obtain the data of the copy section in the data of channel 1, and copy each tone in the positioned phoneme 56 (2) obtained in front (the pitch and the sound length of the sound obtained during duplication are the same as the positioned phoneme 56 (2) The sound in (2) is relatively unchanged), a self-positioned phoneme that is copied (the upper and lower position value 3 of this self-positioned phoneme is exactly the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme 56 (2)) in 1 The actual pitch value of the sound, the pronunciation time value and the sound length value of the music segment (the information obtained by copying can be regarded as a self-positioned phoneme obtained by copying),

Then, in the interleaving and stitching section in the data of channel 2, take out the phoneme numbers of the two phonemes used for interleaving and stitching, and get the upper and lower position values of the first phoneme for interleaving and stitching from this interleaving and stitching section. To locate the first phoneme used for interweaving and mosaicing, and obtain the upper and lower position value 1 of the second phoneme for interweaving and mosaicing from this interweaving and mosaic segment to position the second phoneme for interweaving and mosaicing, And put together these two positioned phonemes by interweaving and stitching together to get a self-positioned phoneme (this class phoneme represents the information of a sound combination; assuming that this is based on these two phonemes used to correspondingly stitch together by interweaving The convention is to use these two positioned phonemes to interweave and stitch together to get this phoneme), the upper and lower position value of this self-positioned phoneme is 3 (that is, the lowest of all the first sounds in this self-located phoneme) The upper and lower position values, that is, the upper and lower position values of the first pronounced sound in this self-positioned phoneme) are the upper and lower position values 1 of the first phoneme used for interweaving and stitching (the upper and lower position values in this self-positioned phoneme) The upper and lower position values of the lowest tone in all sounds that are pronounced at first are just equal to the upper and lower position values of the lowest tone in all the sounds that are first pronounced in the first phoneme that is used for interweaving and mosaicing), what finally draws like this is this self The actual pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme, the pronunciation time value and the sound length value of the segment,

The actual pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme 56 (2) obtained in front with the rhythm information obtained from the code header of the value of the segment combination information and the respective mode and clef information of the two sound channels And the pronunciation time value and sound length value of the segment, the information of each sound copied earlier, the actual pitch value of each sound in the phoneme obtained earlier, the pronunciation time value of the segment and the sound length value, these information are used as part of the decoding result , take it to pronounce,

Stitching step 3 is also decoding step 4: Then, in the modification section in the data of channel 1, take out the phoneme number of the phoneme used for modification, and then according to the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme used for modification in the modification section and this Interval relationship data between each tone in the phoneme and the mode (C major) and clef information of channel 1 obtained from the encoding head to obtain the actual pitch of each tone in the positioned phoneme for modification High value (that is, the pitch value) and the pronunciation time value and the sound length value of the section, and then according to the modification information in the modification section, the sound in the positioned phoneme is modified, that is, the sound of its second pronunciation position is lifted One step higher, the sound length value of this sound is still unchanged, after this modification is carried out to this positioned phoneme, a self-positioned phoneme (this phoneme represents the information of a sound combination) is obtained, so that the final is the actual pitch value of each sound in this self-positioned phoneme, the pronunciation time value of the segment and the sound length value,

Then from the data of the second phoneme segment in the data of sound channel 2, the upper and lower position value 1 of the phoneme 56 (4) is obtained, and then the phoneme number of the phoneme 56 (4) is obtained from this phoneme segment, and the phoneme number is set according to this phoneme number Find the record item of this phoneme in the database, and get the composition of the sound in phoneme 56 (4) from this record item, these data obtained from above (the upper and lower position values of phoneme 56 (4), phoneme 56 (4) The composition situation of the tone in the ), just can determine the actual pitch value of each sound in the positioned phoneme 56 (4) and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value,

Combine the rhythm information obtained from the encoding header of the value of the segment combination information and the respective mode and clef information of the two channels with the actual pitch value of each tone in this type of phoneme obtained earlier and the value of the pronunciation time of the segment And sound length value and the actual pitch value of each tone in the positioned phoneme 56 (4) that obtains before and the music section pronunciation time value and the sound length value are used as the part of the decoding result, and are used for pronunciation.

The sound that above 3 stitching steps sends has just formed the whole pronunciation of encoded music section (music section is just as shown in Figure 14), and the step-by-step pronunciation mode here is to divide 3 steps. In each of the above stitching steps, channel 1 and channel 2 are both pronounced at the same time, and BIT can be used in the part of the decoding result that is used for pronunciation in the above stitching steps to indicate which is the data of channel 1 and which is the channel 2 data. The pronunciation involved in the above 3 stitching steps is based on the example of the MCU in the pickup using the music synthesis method to make the speaker sound according to the decoding result. The pronunciation of each stitching step is obtained from the encoding head in the decoding step 1. The rhythm information of the two channels and the respective mode and clef information of the two channels are used to pronounce. The MCU in the pickup has a music synthesis function; the pronunciation involved in the above three stitching steps can also be decoded by an external music chip connected to the MCU. Part of the speaker is made to sound by music synthesis, and the rhythm information obtained from the encoding head and the respective mode and clef information of the two channels can be sent from the MCU to the external music chip of the MCU in the decoding step 1 for pronunciation (In this way, in the following decoding steps, the part of the decoding result passed from the MCU to the music chip connected to the MCU may not have mode and clef information and rhythm information), and the music chip connected to the MCU has a music synthesis function.

Because when playing music, it is necessary to accurately determine when each sound is pronounced, so when the decoding adopts a step-by-step pronunciation method, it is generally necessary to record the time in the MCU, so that the action of each step sound can be performed at each appropriate moment.

When the above is decoded with the step-by-step pronunciation method, the phoneme 56 (1), phoneme 56 (2), phoneme 56 (3), and phoneme 56 (4) can be directly obtained from the value of the combined information, and the phoneme used for modification is used for The first phoneme of interweaving and stitching is used for the second phoneme of interweaving and stitching.

The decoding result mentioned in this example refers to all the decoding results of the music section obtained by decoding.

In this decoding example, the music segment pronunciation time value of the tone obtained in the above whole-step pronunciation mode and the step-by-step pronunciation mode is measured by beat (and is a beat with a quarter note), that is, a certain The pronunciation time value of the music section, for example, can be 2 beats, 3 beats plus 3/4 beats, etc. These beats are all calculated from the beginning of the music section (the pronunciation time value of the music section's first pronunciation is 0), in the above decoding example, when decoding according to the full-step pronunciation mode and the step-by-step pronunciation mode, please refer to this manual for the calculation method of the pronunciation time value of each tone in each class phoneme in each channel or in the positioned phoneme The paragraph on page 28 begins with the paragraph 'As for the decoding time' mentioned above. (The beat mentioned in this paragraph refers to the actual beat of the coded section)

The sound length values mentioned in the above decoding examples (decoding example 1 and decoding example 2) in this manual are measured according to the actual beat of the music section, and the quarter note is taken as an actual beat.

In the above decoding examples (decoding example 1 and decoding example 2) of this manual, the phrases "the actual pitch value of each sound, the pronunciation time value of the music section and the sound length value" are mentioned, in which "each sound" is a modified The 'actual pitch value, music section pronunciation time value and sound length value'; for the 'actual pitch value of each tone, music section pronunciation time value and sound length value' is also similar to this.

The actual pitch value of the sound in the positioned phoneme (positioned according to the upper and lower position value 1) mentioned in the above decoding examples (decoding example 1 and decoding example 2) in this manual is determined by the aforementioned upper and lower position value 1 and the pitch value determined by the interval relationship data between the tones in the located phoneme and the mode (C major) and clef information of the channel where the located phoneme is located obtained from the coding head. The actual pitch value of the sound in the self-positioned phoneme-like obtained during decoding mentioned in the above decoding examples is the upper and lower position value 3 of the self-located phoneme-like obtained during decoding and the self-located phoneme-like The interval relationship data between each tone and the pitch value determined from the mode (C major) and clef information of the channel where the self-localized phoneme is located obtained from the coding head.

In the above decoding example 2 full-step pronunciation mode and step-by-step pronunciation mode, the actual pitch value of each sound in the self-positioned phoneme obtained during interweaving and stitching is obtained in this way: by the upper and lower of the first phoneme used for interweaving and stitching The position value 1 and the upper and lower position value 1 of the second phoneme used for interweaving and stitching can get the lowest tone of all the first sounds in the first phoneme being positioned and the second phoneme after being positioned The interval relationship value between the lowest notes in all the sounds that are pronounced first, combined with the interval relationship value between the sounds in the first phoneme that is positioned and the relationship between the sounds in the second phoneme that is positioned Interval relation value between, and obtain the interval relation value between each tone in the self-positioned phoneme obtained by interweaving and mosaicing, and then press the upper and lower position value 3 of the self-positioning phoneme that is obtained by interweaving and mosaicing, obtain this self-positioning The actual pitch value of each tone in the class phoneme.

The definition of the vocal tract in this application document is the same as the usual definition, that is, a series of pitches are relatively close, and the tones that form a chord relationship with each other belong to a vocal tract, such as Figure 13, which is on the upper five lines or the upper five lines The sound between them belongs to the same channel (main channel), the sound above the five lines above also belongs to this channel, and the sound between the five lines below or between the five lines below belongs to another channel (secondary sound). Road), the sound below the five lines below also belongs to this channel, and for the sound between the five lines above and the five lines below, if it forms a chord relationship with the sound of the above channel, it belongs to the above channel, If it forms a chord relationship with the sound of the lower channel, it belongs to the lower channel, and it can also be classified into the upper channel or the lower channel according to the convenience of codec processing. Of course, for the score of a large-scale musical work, if two violins play different melodies in the same range, the sounds played by the two violins should generally be classified into different channels. This paragraph is about music common sense.

For the code word, it is generally not necessary to use the BIT bit to indicate what type of code (bar code, conductive code, etc.) the code word uses, because it can be judged from the physical characteristics of the code word (bar code, conductive code, etc. etc.), such as barcodes, the bar-space width ratio has ready-made regulations, and the general barcode code system also has a self-verification function, so after reading the terminal to obtain the bar-space width ratio value, it can be judged as a barcode by combining the verification information, and another example The conductive code described in the application document No. 2006102010785 can not only be read by the electromechanical reading dock, but also can be read by the photoelectric reading dock. The width of the bar space of the code line area of the conductive code read by the photoelectric reading dock It is generally the same, and generally follows the bar-space format of the number of on-off code names, so it can also be judged that it is a conductive code; therefore, it is generally not necessary to open BIT on the code word to indicate what kind of code it is, of course, if you open a few digits in front of the code word A BIT to indicate what type of code (barcode, conductive code, etc.) is also possible. Then there is the question of the value represented by the codeword. The value mainly contains the information about the value of the music segment combination information. As for the codeword that also contains other information (such as display information), the code value in the codeword should also be planned uniformly. form. The form of the code value in the unified planning codeword is to allow the codeword to be read by various pickups and multiple reading docks. In the code value, some information can also be added or deleted according to the specific situation and defined in a unified or compatible format. The description in this paragraph is for reference only.

The decoding program and decoding data can be stored in the memory of the pickup, so that the information represented by the value of all or part of the codewords in the codewords on the entire page of each audio music book is the value of the combined information For relevant information, these code words can be read and decoded to play music with this pickup. A pickup can read through various audible music books that have such codewords on their entire pages. Here each single code word on the whole page of the audio music book can be or contain or can be converted to obtain the value of several pieces of music piece together information (or the part of the value of one piece of piece together information, that is, the BIT of the value of one piece of piece together information placed in multiple codewords), etc., the information represented by the value of each single codeword is also information related to the value of the spliced information.

For audio music books and pick-ups that use the music score splicing method, as long as the coding rules involved in the value of the segment splicing information in the codeword of each audio music book are the same or compatible, the decoding procedures of each pickup are based on the same or compatible decoding rules To decode and the decoding rules are specially corresponding to the encoding rules involved in the value of the segment combination information in the code word of each audio music book, so that the full reading of each audio music book and each pickup can be achieved. The above mentioned "a pickup can read all kinds of audio music books with this code word on its entire page" is generally just established under the premise of satisfying the conditions mentioned above in this paragraph.

(The coding rules involved in the value of a piece of combination information mentioned in this application document refer to the coding rules used to encode and generate the value of this piece of combination information)

The form of the code word on the entire page of the audio music book involved in this application document can be conventional, that is, the barcode is directly printed on the page of the book as the main body of the audio book, or printed or coated directly on the page of the book Conductive substance forms conductive code, etc., the carrier of the code word (can be bar code, conductive code, graphic code or magnetic code etc.) that can claim to form like this is the page of reading material, and the carrier plane of code word is the page of reading material; Form several codewords on the surface of a small piece of planar material (codewords can be barcodes, conductive codes, graphic codes or magnetic codes, etc.) and paste this small piece of planar material on the page of the reading as the main body of the audio music book , that is, use this small piece of planar material as the carrier of the codeword, and the surface of this planar material is used as the carrier plane of the codeword (as the codeword is a conductive code, that generally requires the surface of the planar material to be non-conductive); Paper is used as an example of a small piece of planar material. The shape of this small piece of paper can be rectangular or other, and the area can accommodate one or more code words (conductive code or barcode, etc.). And the conductive code formation method is to use printing conductive ink or coating conductive substances to form conductive code characters on the surface of this small piece of paper, or to print barcodes on the surface of this small piece of paper, or to form other types. One or more codewords can be formed on this small piece of paper (each codeword can be or not of the same code in multiple codewords), and this small piece of paper is pasted on the reading material page , other codewords to be arranged on the entire page of the reading material can be formed on a small piece of paper and pasted on the corresponding page of the reading material in this way, which is also a form of the codeword on the page of the relevant reading material; a kind of equivalent replacement form , is to form (for example, print) many codewords used on each page of the reading material on one or several large sheets of paper, and then cut them into small pieces of paper, each small piece of paper contains one or more codewords on the surface (the code word can be the code word of any code word; Each code word can be or not the same code type in a plurality of code words), then each small piece of paper is pasted to the place where it needs to send music on each page of the reading material; Adopt other forms, such as the paper that does not have codewords on the surface of each small piece can be pasted on each page of the reading material earlier, and then take printing or coating on the surface of each small piece of paper to form one or more codewords. After adopting the code word form of pasting the small piece of paper mode described in this paragraph, if it is a conductive code printed on the small piece of paper, its code word can still be the first mode conductive code or the second mode conductive code in No. 2006102010785 invention application The structure and the principle process of reading the wharf and the reading code of the method A or method B used for code reading can obviously still be described in the invention application No. 2006102010785; adopt the method of pasting small pieces of paper, such as printing on the small piece of paper is The code word of other code kind is such as bar code etc., and its mode of code reading is obviously the same with the mode that it is printed on the reading material page. This method is similar to that in a department store, where the barcode is printed on a small piece of paper label, and then the label is pasted on the surface of the product. (the carrier plane of the codeword mentioned throughout the application documents obviously refers to a plane of the carrier of the codeword, and this codeword is on this plane)

The form of any code word on the entire page of the audio music reading referred to in this application document can be a code that directly regards the page of the audio music reading (that is, the page of the reading as the main body of the audio music reading) as the carrier plane. The form of words (such as directly printing barcodes on the pages of reading materials), can also be that there are code words on the surface of a small piece of plane material as mentioned in the above paragraph (that is, use this small piece of plane material as the carrier of code words, and this small piece of plane material can be used as the carrier of code words. There is only this code word or a plurality of code words including this code word on the surface of the block planar material, and each code word can be the same code type or not the same code type in the multiple code words mentioned here) and this Small pieces of plane material are in the form of pasting on the pages of reading materials; the code types mentioned in this paragraph and the previous paragraph refer to bar codes, conductive codes, graphic codes or magnetic codes, etc.; The form of a code word (directly regard the page of the reading material as the form of the code word of the carrier plane and the surface of the small piece of plane material with code words and this small piece of plane material is the form pasted on the page of the reading material) can be regarded as each other equivalent replacement. And the whole page of an audio music book can only have a kind of code word in the code word of these two forms, also can exist the code word of these two forms simultaneously.

Some special places for audiobooks:

For the music pronunciation of audio music books, it involves the same as the voice pronunciation, and there is a problem of pronunciation speed. It is different from the voice pronunciation. The music can adjust the mode and rhythm, and you can also consider using different timbres, such as piano and dulcimer timbres; for These types of information, on the one hand, can be recorded in the value of the piece combination information in the value of the code word, and the speed, mode, tone, etc. of the performance are set according to these information during performance (in the general MCU with music function, all There are functions to set these performance parameters), and then on the pickup side (on the pickup), some keys can be added, such as speed increase and decrease keys, interval increase and decrease keys (to increase or decrease the playing tone by 8 degrees), timbre Change keys (change timbre), press these keys to adjust performance parameters during playing music.

The single-chip microcomputer chip and the music chip involved in the following embodiments have multi-channel music functions, which means that when they play music in a music synthesis mode (such as when playing music by decoding the music piece spectrum data obtained by decoding the value of the combined information) For multi-channel music, this is also technical common sense.

Pickup embodiment 1: (use the pickup of the photoelectric reading dock)

Use accompanying drawing 2 to use the circuit of the pick-up of photoelectric type reading pier, its reading pier uses light pen, main MCU chip 3 is SNC710, and it is equipped with 24 IO pins, possesses the function (four channels) of playing music by music synthesis mode, 32K*16BIT internal data and program memory; this chip can also be connected with external memory. This embodiment SNC710 has two SR008s (each containing 8MBIT storage space), one of which is a program memory 55 (the system master control and code reading program of SNC710 can be stored in this memory, and this memory is fixedly arranged inside the pickup), The other is an external data memory 6 . The pronunciation device is a horn. The light pen is a mature and well-known technology, which does not belong to the content of the present invention. The implementation can refer to the known circuit, and use its photoelectric principle to read the black and white bar null values of the codeword (such as reading barcodes, and the principle of light pen reading barcodes also belongs to the known technology). What is shown is a reference circuit, taking barcode reading as an example (here it is assumed that the printing ink of the barcode is black, and the carrier plane of the barcode, that is, each page of the audio music book is white, and the color of the barcode is different from the color of the carrier plane so that For reading with a light pen), the read codeword can also be a conductive code, etc. in addition to a barcode.

When reading the code, make the light pen touch (or close to) the bar code and drag the light pen to scan the bar code at a constant speed in the horizontal direction. D1 is a light-emitting diode for illuminating the code word, and D2 is a photodiode for feeling the return from the code line of the code word. (the place with ink on the barcode is black and non-reflected light, and the place without ink is white reflected light, which is common sense), the O1 op-amp is the first stage amplification of the signal, and the O2 op-amp forms a hysteresis comparator , used for signal shaping to form a square wave output, where the resistance of Rx can be adjusted, D4 and D5 are regulator tubes, and Qb forms a switch circuit to provide a square wave output suitable for MCU reading. In this embodiment, the decoding work is carried out in the MCU, and the output of the light pen is a square wave output at Out. Record the high-level duration of each peak and the low-level duration of each trough of the square wave waveform coming in from the P12 port, and you can get the bar-space layout of the barcode, and then according to the bar-space layout of the barcode, use The software solves the final code value. Of course, the software generally needs to deal with the waveform error of the square wave coming in from the P12 pin; the timing of the high and low level duration can be done using the interrupt of the MCU.

The external data memory 6 of this embodiment is SR008 on the right side of the figure,

(The MCU model selection here is for reference only, and other models can also be used).

The phoneme database and other decoding data defined for decoding can be stored in the external data memory 6, and the external data memory 6 is connected with the MCU by a communication line, and the program memory 55 stores the operating program of the SNC710, and the program memory 55 is connected with the MCU by a communication line. There are only some barcodes on the entire page of the audio music book (the audio music book shown in Figure 1), and the value of each single barcode on the entire page of the audio music book is the value of a piece of combined information (The value of each segment's stitching information is separately placed in multiple codewords), each barcode on the entire page of this audio music book can be read by this pickup for this pickup to decode the playback music, The collection of all the barcodes on the whole page of the audio music book is the code words on the whole page of the audio music book, and also the bar codes, all the bar codes in the code words on the whole page of the audio music book can be combined It is defined as all the codewords that can be read by the pickup. When in use, use the pickup to read multiple barcodes in some of the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book to obtain the value of the music segment splicing information And according to the decoding program and the decoding data in the external data memory 6, the value of the music piece combination information is decoded and the music is played.

The external data memory 6 and the program memory 55 of the present embodiment also belong to the said pickup of the present embodiment. The pickup mentioned in the present embodiment includes all parts in Fig. 2 .

The light pen of the present embodiment can also be replaced by other kinds of light pens, and can also be replaced by other types of photoelectric reading docks, such as ccd reading docks (ccd reading docks do not need to be dragged to scan the code line area when reading codes).

Pickup embodiment 2: (using an external music chip connected to the MCU)

As shown in Figure 3, the pickup circuit using the music chip external to the MCU, the MCU3 model is still SNC710, which is equipped with 24 IO pins, 32K*16BIT data and program memory; this chip can also be connected to an external memory; The main control, code reading and communication programs are placed inside the SNC710; the pronunciation device is the SNC82030 with a speaker, and 45 is the light pen reading terminal. The light pen is a mature and well-known technology, which does not belong to the content of the present invention. The implementation can refer to the known circuit, and utilize its photoelectric principle to read the black and white bar null values of the codeword. In this embodiment, barcode reading is taken as an example, and the read codewords may not only be barcodes, but also conductive codes. The audible music book that present embodiment relates is shown in the lower part of Fig. 7 as an example, and there are only some barcodes on its whole page, and the code value of each barcode in all barcodes on its whole page is the value of a music section splicing information , each barcode on the entire page of the audio music book can be read by the pickup for the pickup to decode playing music, and all the barcodes on the entire page of the audio music book are the codes on the entire page of the audio music book Character. The pronunciation process of the present embodiment is that SNC710 sends the music piece spectrum data that decoding obtains byte order one by one to SNC82030, plays music while receiving data by SNC82030 (because there is not enough RAM space, so can't once a piece number Kilobytes of spectrum data are all transmitted to SNC82030); SNC82030 is a chip dedicated to playing music according to the spectrum data of the music section (more specifically, it can be called a chip for playing MIDI music), 12 music channels, and 16 IO pins , 96K*12BIT storage space, user program can be stored in the chip; Present embodiment can be made like this: when playing music, by SNC710, the music section spectrum data obtained by decoding is passed through 3 communication wires (connecting from P08, P09, P010 output) to the SNC82030 continuously, and the SNC82030 puts the data into a FIFO RAM temporary storage area after getting the data, and continuously fetches the BIT of the music spectrum data in the temporary storage area to play multi-channel music; the communication protocol of the two chips is automatic And there should be a corresponding communication program in the two chips, the music playing program of SNC82030 should be made to be able to fetch data from the temporary storage area to play music.

The MCU3 model selection here is for reference only, and other models are also available.

The external data memory 6 of the present embodiment is SR008 (8M BIT storage space) among the figure.

Present embodiment is to store the decoding program and the decoded data for the value decoding of assembling information on the external data memory 6 (less because of the SNC710 internal memory), and the external data memory 6 is connected with the SNC710 by a communication line; The value of each single barcode among all the barcodes on the whole page (shown in the lower part of Fig. 7) is the value of a piece of combined information. After the SNC710 of the pickup obtains the code reading value from the waveform of the P07 port input (the hardware structure of the light pen 45 and the principle of reading the bar code can refer to known technologies, the hardware structure of the light pen 45 can also be the hardware structure of the light pen as shown in Figure 2, the principle of reading the bar code and The process can also refer to the description of reading the barcode with a light pen in the previous embodiment 1), and then obtain the value of the music segment splicing information from the value of the barcode. Originally, this pickup can read each barcode in the codewords on the entire page of this audio music book and can decode and play the music section pronunciation according to the value of the combined information in the code value. The barcode is defined as all codewords that the pickup can read. When in use, read a certain codeword (barcode) in these codewords among the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book with this pickup and press the decoding button The program and the decoded data decode the value of the piece combination information in the code word to obtain the music spectrum data, and send the music spectrum data to SNC82030 to play the pronunciation of this music section. (For the method and protocol of SNC710 reading SR008, please refer to their chip information)

The format of the music spectrum data mentioned in this embodiment should be recognizable by the SNC82030 and the SNC82030 can use the music spectrum data to play music.

The external data memory 6 of the present embodiment also belongs to a part of the said pickup of the present embodiment. The said pickup of present embodiment comprises all parts in Fig. 3.

The light pen type of the present embodiment can be optional (not necessarily using the light pen used in embodiment 1), and can also be replaced by other types of photoelectric reading terminals, such as ccd reading terminals.

The musical score combination information code mentioned in this application document refers to a code word whose code value can obtain several music section combination information values, such as a barcode code word whose code value is or contains several music section combination information values.

The MCUs adopted in the above two pickup embodiments all take SNC710 as an example. In fact, the MCUs used in these pickup embodiments can also be replaced by MCUs produced by other chip factories that have the function of playing music in a music synthesis mode. .

The pickups with reading docks (electromechanical conductive code reading docks or photoelectric reading docks, etc.) involved in this application document generally use one MCU to complete tasks such as code reading, key reading, decoding and pronunciation; but if used separately Multiple MCUs are also available, such as using two MCUs to communicate with each other. One MCU (assumed to be the master MCU) completes code reading and other (such as key reading, etc.) main control tasks, and the other MCU (assumed to be the slave mcu) communicates from the It is also possible to complete the pronunciation action of playing music by accepting the command of the main control mcu (for example, the main control mcu transmits the value of the piece combination information obtained by reading the code to the slave mcu through the communication line), and the slave mcu has the ability to play music, such as: According to the value of the mosaic information passed from the main control mcu to the slave mcu, it can decode and play the music pronunciation according to the decoding program and decoding data, and the music is played in the way of music synthesis during decoding, and the memory storing the decoding program and decoding data needs to be able to be read from Mcu reads to decode (this memory can be located in the slave mcu chip, or this memory can be located in the memory chip outside the slave mcu chip and connected with the slave mcu for use). This separates the use of multiple (two or more) MCU solutions, because these multiple MCUs can be regarded as various parts of a large MCU, and these multiple MCUs can be regarded as a large MCU, so this separate The essence of using multiple MCU solutions is the same as that of one MCU solution, and it is an equivalent replacement of an MCU solution; for example, the master MCU and slave MCU mentioned earlier in this paragraph can be regarded as a large MCU, and the slave MCU is usually an external speaker to pronounce Yes, the loudspeaker can be used as a sounding device; the single-chip microcomputer chips mentioned in claims 2, 5, and 6 can all be formed by combining multiple mcu in this way. There is even another solution: the pickup has a master control mcu and a slave mcu that plays music and pronunciation (the performance usage and collocation of these two mcu and the decoding program and how to arrange and store the decoded data in the memory are as shown in this paragraph In the case of the aforementioned two MCUs), there is also a small MCU in the reading terminal. The small MCU in the reading terminal completes the code reading and transmits the code reading result to the master control mcu. The master control mcu transmits the slave code to the slave mcu through the communication line The value of the piece combination information obtained in the word value is decoded by the slave mcu to play the music pronunciation, and the music is played in the way of music synthesis when decoding. The master control mcu and the slave mcu can also be regarded as one mcu, and this The mcu and the small mcu in the reading terminal are used together as a large MCU (at this time, the part of the original reading terminal except the small mcu can be regarded as the reading terminal), that is, the main control mcu, the slave mcu and the small mcu in the reading terminal They are all regarded as a large MCU, so the essence of this scheme is the same as that of an MCU scheme, and it is an equivalent replacement of an MCU scheme. Moreover, the MCU is generally used for sounding by an external speaker, and the speaker can be used as a sounding device. Claims 2, 5, The single-chip microcomputer chips mentioned in 6 can all be formed by combining multiple MCUs in this way. (The code word mentioned in this paragraph is the code word related to the value of the information being assembled; because the multiple mcu mentioned earlier in this paragraph can be regarded as an MCU, so the memory mentioned in this paragraph can still be used as the main processing The chip's MCU reads the memory used)

The value (or its transformation value) etc. of the music piece combination information involved in the code word everywhere in this application document is mainly based on the continuous binary format as an example. In fact, there are other formats, such as the music section The binary BIT of the value of the combined information (or its transformation value, etc.) is separated and scattered in each part of a codeword (such as a barcode) (for example, there are some BITs of other information in the codeword), and when decoding, press It is agreed to combine the value (or its transformation value, etc.) of each scattered music segment combination information, even without combining, directly read the binary BIT of the value (or its conversion value, etc.) of each scattered music segment combination information according to the agreement To decode, this format is an equivalent replacement of the continuous binary format; using other formats is a conventional method and is also an equivalent replacement of the continuous binary format.

The value of a code word referred to in this application document everywhere is or contains the value of several music section combination information, etc., if the coder puts these values (the value of several music section combination information etc.) in the code word, can These values are referred to as the original value), and then transformed, such as obtaining a new value after encryption (this value is generally still a binary value, which can be placed in code words such as conductive codes or barcodes; the new value can be called the original value). The transformation value of the value), the new value can be put into the code word, and when the MCU reads the code, the new value can still get the original value after the corresponding transformation (inverse transformation) (the code transformation defined here, the inverse The transformation is like this: all BITs of the new value must be used for inverse transformation, and part of the BIT of the new value cannot be inverse transformed to obtain part of the original value). After the value of the code word is a new value, the information represented by the value of a code word is still the information related to the value of the combined information (each such code word still belongs to the sound music book codewords on the entire page), some such codewords can still be defined as some codewords that can be read by a certain pickup in the codewords on the entire page of audio music books, and all codewords in this part Each code word of each code word can be read by this pickup to be used for this pickup to play music pronunciation, and this pickup can read the code word in this part all code words and according to the new value in the code value of the code word read Converted and used to play music pronunciation, the new value can be regarded as an equivalent replacement of the original value. ('transformation' in the conversion value of the value of the several music section splicing information mentioned in this application document everywhere also refers to the conversion mentioned in this paragraph)

The value of the above-mentioned code word in this specification is or contains a music segment. The value (or its transformation value, etc.) is mainly for a code word; The value of combining information (or the conversion value of the value of a piece combining information), the pickup reads a codeword and just can process the playing music, if it represents the BIT (the value of a piece combining information) involved in the value of a piece combining information The BIT involved refers to the value itself or its transformed value of the music piece combination information) length is greater than the BIT code length of a single codeword, then it is necessary to put the BIT involved in the value representing a piece of music piece together information in multiple codewords , the page positions of the audio music books where these multiple code words are generally also the position where music needs to be played, these multiple code words are generally printed and arranged relatively close to each other on the page of the audio music books, and these code words are generally Being on the same page, these multiple codewords may also be on different pages respectively, and the pickup needs to be agreed (one or more BIT signs can be opened in each codeword in these multiple codewords to indicate that multiple codewords need to be read) word) to read these multiple codewords (the pickup generally reads these multiple codewords in sequence), and then combine the values of the multiple codewords read to obtain the value of the piece information, and then decode and play the music (these multiple codewords are generally of the same code type). The information represented by the value of the single codeword in this situation is still the information relevant to the value of the combined information, and each codeword in this situation still belongs to the scope of all codewords on the whole page of the audiobook, and can still be used by the pickup according to the The code value of the read code word is used to play the music pronunciation (just that the pickup needs to read a plurality of code words before playing the music pronunciation), any code word in this situation can still be regarded as belonging to the audio music book on the entire page The code words in the code words of the department in the code words, each code word in the all code words of this part can be read and used for broadcasting music by a certain pickup, and this pickup reads each code word in the all code words of this part One or more codewords to play music. Even the value (or the transformation value of the value of a music section combination information) of a music section can be placed in the code words of a plurality of different code types, and these multiple code words can be read by the same pickup again for use in Play music, these multiple code words can belong to all code words that this pick-up can read, such as there are both conductive codes and barcodes in these multiple code words, can read these two kinds of code words by the pick-up that has photoelectric type reading terminal to play music. In this instruction manual, various forms of audio music books, the form of cooperating use of audio music books and pickups, etc. are mentioned everywhere in the place where music can be played by reading a code word, which can be read by reading multiple codes at a time. It is used to replace the situation in which words are used to play music. For example, there is a code word on a page of the original audio music book, and the value of the code word is the value of a piece of combined information. The pickup can play music by reading this code word. One codeword is replaced by two codewords, and the BIT of the value of the music segment information is separated into the two code words. The original pickup needs to read the two code words to obtain the music segment information. The BIT of the value to play music.

The value of the code word can even be in a more complex form, such as the transformation value of the value of several pieces of piece together information scattered in multiple code words, the value of each code word in these code words is or contains this number The part of the conversion value of the value of the combination information of a music section, the information represented by the value of each code word in these code words is still the information relevant to the value of the combination information, and these code words can be printed on the whole of an audio music book. On the page, each code word in these code words is still a code word among the code words on the entire page of this audio music book, and the pickup can read these code words and obtain the value of several music segment splicing information from the code words for playing music.

The value of a codeword, except that the value of a codeword is or contains the value of a piece of music piece information described in other paragraphs of this specification, or the value of a codeword is or contains a transformation value of the value of a piece of piece piece together information In addition, in fact, the value of a codeword can also be or contain the value of a plurality of music segment combination information, the value of a code word can also be or contain a part of the value of a music segment combination information, or a code word The value of the word is or contains the conversion value of the value of a plurality of musical sections combining information, and the value of a code word can also be or contain the part of the conversion value of the value of a plurality of musical sections combining information; The value of a plurality of musical sections combining information How to place and arrange the BIT involved in the code value is defined by the coder himself. After the pickup reads the code and obtains the value of the combination information of each section, the pronunciation of each section can be played in sequence; for example: there are 3 sections printed on one page The music score of each music section is printed with a code word whose code value is the value of the combined information of the music section corresponding to this music section. The pickup can read a code word at a time and play the pronunciation of the corresponding music section. The upper part prints a code word again, and the value of code word is the value of 3 music paragraphs' combined information (the value of these 3 music paragraphs' combined information is respectively corresponding to the aforementioned 3 music paragraphs of this paragraph), as the pickup reads This code word, just can once all play out the pronunciation of 3 music sections. To be more complicated, the value of the codeword may also be the transformation value of the value of several pieces of pieced together information plus the value of several pieces of pieced together information, etc., the information represented by the value of such a codeword is still the value of the pieced together information For relevant information, the pickup can read these codewords and obtain the values of several pieces of piecewise information from the codewords for playing music.

Those forms of said code word of above 4 paragraphs (the value of a code word is or contains the value of a music section splicing information, and the value of a code word is or contains the transformation value of the value of several music section splicing information, and a code word The value of a word is or contains a part of the value of a piece of musical information, the value of a code word is or contains a part of the transformed value of the value of several music pieces, and the value of a code word is or contains a plurality of music sections The value of the combined information, the value of the code word is the transformation value of the value of the combined information of several music sections plus the value of the combined information of several music sections, etc.), the information represented by the code value of the code word is the value of the combined information Relevant information; the pickup can read several codewords of these forms to obtain the value of several pieces of information to play music.

The value of a codeword, except that the value of a codeword is or contains the value of a piece of music piece information described in other paragraphs of this specification, or the value of a codeword is or contains a transformation value of the value of a piece of piece piece together information In addition, in fact, the value of a codeword can also be or contain the value of a plurality of music segment combination information, the value of a code word can also be or contain a part of the value of a music segment combination information, or a code word The value of the word is or contains the transformation value of the value of a plurality of musical sections combining information, and the value of a codeword can also be or contain the part of the transformation value of the value of a plurality of musical sections combining information, and the value of a codeword can also be Or the transformation value of the value containing several musical sections combining information plus the value of several musical sections combining information, etc.; the above forms of these code words, the information represented by the code value of the code word is all related to the value of combining information Information; the pick-up can read several code words of these forms to obtain the value of several pieces of combined information to play music; how to place and arrange the BITs involved in the value of multiple pieces of combined information in the code value is defined by the coder himself, and the pick-up After reading the code and obtaining the value of the combination information of each music section from the code word, the pronunciation of each music section can generally be played sequentially; for example: a sheet of music with 3 music sections is printed on a page, and a score next to each section is printed. The code value is the code word of the combined information value of this music section. The pickup can read one code word at a time and decode and play the corresponding music section pronunciation. If another code word is printed on the upper part of the page, the value of the code word has these 3 The value of the combined information of each music section, if the pickup reads this code word, the pronunciation of the 3 music sections can be decoded and played at one time.

The value of the code word mentioned in this application document can be converted to obtain the value of several combination information, which is equivalent to saying that the value of the code word is or contains the transformation value of the value of the combination information of several music segments.

Play the music pronunciation after the code words in the code words in the code words of the pickup reading part said everywhere in the description of the application document and the claims, generally have two kinds of situations: 1 is after the pickup reads a code word, the pickup is based on this In the value of the word, obtain (directly obtain or convert) the value of several musical sections to combine the information to play the music pronunciation (generally the pronunciation of these several musical sections). Combining the values of these multiple codewords to obtain (directly obtained or converted) the value of several pieces of piecewise information to play the music pronunciation (usually the pronunciation of these pieces), which may be a piece of piecewise information The value of the value is scattered in these multiple codewords, and it may also be that all or part of the value of the music piece combination information is scattered in these multiple codewords, or it may be It means that the transformation values of the values of these several pieces of music segment information are scattered in these multiple codewords, and generally there is a BIT mark in each codeword of these multiple codewords to indicate that these multiple codewords need to be read To get the value of several combined information to decode the playing music. Obviously, after reading a codeword and obtaining (or reading a plurality of codewords to obtain) the value of a plurality of musical sections' combined information as in the above two cases, the music played by the pickup generally should be the pronunciation of these multiple musical sections in order ( Unless there are other agreements, for example, there is a BIT mark in the codeword to indicate that only certain sections are played). Each of the codewords in the "multiple codewords" mentioned above in this paragraph and the "one codeword" mentioned in this paragraph above all belong to the "partial codewords" mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph In the code word, the 'pickup' mentioned everywhere in this paragraph except the first sentence of this paragraph all refers to the 'pickup' mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph; 'mentioned in claim 6 and by the aforementioned pickup The aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip makes the aforementioned pronunciation device of the aforementioned pickup play the music pronunciation according to the code value of the code words in the aforementioned codewords read, the aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip of the aforementioned pickup mentioned in claim 2 according to the read The code value of the code word in all the code words of the aforementioned part makes the aforementioned pronunciation device of the aforementioned sound pick-up play the music pronunciation' all can be the situation described in front of this paragraph, promptly said here' according to the code in all the code words of the aforementioned part read. The code value ' of word refers to the code value of a code word or the code value of a plurality of code words in all code words according to the aforementioned parts that read. Similar expressions such as 'the pickup reads code words to play music' mentioned throughout this application document can also refer to the foregoing description of this paragraph.

What is said in the 2nd line to the 14th line of the previous paragraph is also to mention everywhere in the claims 'when the pickup is used, the single-chip microcomputer chip of the pickup reads any one of the codewords of the said section. After the code word, it is not necessary to read other code words in the code words to play music, or, when the pickup is used, the single-chip microcomputer chip of the pickup reads the codes of the parts. After any code word in the word, it is necessary to read other several code words in the code words to play music again, or, when the pickup is used, the single-chip microcomputer chip of the pickup reads Obtain any code word in the part code word in all code words of described part all need not read other code word in all code words of described part again and can broadcast music, and the described single-chip microcomputer chip of described sound pick-up reads After any code word in the other part of the code words in the all code words of the said part, all need to read the other several code words in the code words of the said part to play music; An explanation of the situation that music can be played just by one word and that a single-chip microcomputer chip needs to read multiple code words before it can play music. ("The 2nd line to the 14th line of the above paragraph" mentioned in this paragraph refers to the "general" from the 2nd line of the previous paragraph to the "equivalent replacement" in the 14th line of the previous paragraph)

Mentioned in claim 2 'each code word in the aforementioned code words can be read by the aforementioned pickup for the aforementioned pickup to play music pronunciation' (similar formulations in this description are also described in this paragraph Understand), for any code word in all code words of part, generally have two kinds of situations, 1 refers to that pickup only needs to read this code word and just can play music, after pickup reads this code word, pickup is according to from this one In the value of the code word, obtain (directly obtain or convert) the value of several music sections to combine information to play the music pronunciation (generally the pronunciation of these several music sections), and 2 need to include in all code words of the pickup reading section Only multiple codewords including this codeword can play music. After the pickup reads the multiple codewords, the pickup will combine the values of the multiple codewords to obtain (directly obtained or converted) several paragraphs. The value of the information is used to play the music pronunciation (usually the pronunciation of these several paragraphs), it may be that the value of a paragraph combination information is scattered in these multiple codewords, or it may be the combination information of these several paragraphs The value of all or part of the music piece combination information is scattered in these multiple codewords, and generally there is a BIT mark in each codeword of these multiple codewords to indicate that it is necessary to read these multiple codewords to Get the value of several spliced information to decode playing music. Obviously, after reading a code word and obtaining (or reading a plurality of code words to obtain) the value of a plurality of musical sections combining information according to the above two situations, the music played by the pickup should generally be the pronunciation of these multiple musical paragraphs in order ( Unless there are other agreements, for example, there is a BIT mark in the codeword to indicate that only certain sections are played). Each of the codewords in the "multiple codewords" mentioned above in this paragraph and the "one codeword" mentioned in this paragraph above all belong to the "partial codewords" mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph In the code word, the 'pickup device' mentioned everywhere in this paragraph except the first sentence of this paragraph all refers to the 'pickup device' mentioned in the first sentence of this paragraph.

Regarding the situation that the pickup needs to read multiple codewords to play music, firstly, all the BITs of the value of a piece of combined information may be scattered in multiple codewords, and there is no The value of other segment information, so the pickup must read multiple codewords to play music (and generally there is a BIT mark in each codeword among these multiple codewords, indicating that it needs to read these multiple codewords to obtain the combination information It may also be that the pickup can play music by reading a codeword originally, but there is an agreement (for example, there is a BIT sign indication in this codeword) to read a few more codewords and then play music together, so that The pickup reads several codewords and then broadcasts the pronunciation of the respective sections according to the value of the combination information of several sections obtained from these codewords; There are circumstances other than those described in this paragraph.

The said pick-up of this application document reads one or more code words and plays music after reading, generally have two kinds of situations, 1 is the value that how many music sections are stitched together information obtained from this one or more code words, how many music sections are just played by the pick-up Music, 2 is that the pickup can only use all the information obtained from the one or more codewords by agreement (for example, there is a BIT sign indication in this one or more codewords or the reader has made a setting by the button of the pickup, etc.) Part of the value of the segment combination information in the value of the segment combination information corresponds to the pronunciation of the segment (for example, the value of a code word is the value of 3 segment combination information, and the pickup only presses this code word after reading the code word In the value of the code value of the 3 music sections, the values of the information of the two music sections are combined to decode and play the respective pronunciations of the two music sections), these two situations can be regarded as equivalent replacements.

Playing music after the pickup reads multiple codewords is actually equivalent to playing music after the pickup reads one codeword, because they both achieve the purpose of reading codes and playing music. Reading multiple codewords in batches is equivalent to having an area The pickup of the very large reading dock reads one codeword at a time (the area of this codeword is also very large, which is the combined area of those multiple codewords).

With regard to the situation that there is a BIT sign in each code word in multiple code words and needs to read these multiple code words to play music, generally these multiple code words are printed very close to each other on the page of audio music reading material, and There may be printed pictures and texts on the page to remind you to read these multiple codewords and play music together. After the pickup reads one of the codewords, the pickup will temporarily stop playing music according to the BIT flags that need to read multiple codewords in the codeword. Continue to read codes, play music together after reading these multiple code words, and when you continue to wait for code reading after reading a code word each time, the pickup can play a prompt voice to remind readers to continue reading codes. This paragraph is common sense.

Regarding the shapes of the pickups with electromechanical or photoelectric reading docks and audio music books described in various places in this application document, this is only a matter of mechanical structure and other aspects, and there is no need for rigid regulations on the shape. Use the audio music books described in this application document. The principle of reading materials and pickups can be made into various forms of audio music books and pickups. For example: one way is to make the pickup into a large-body continuous reading dock, and make the MCU, pronunciation devices and button modules in the body. The dock can be made movable, and is connected with the body by wires, and the large body continuous reading dock is used as a pickup, and the appearance of the large body can be suitable for allowing audio music books to be put into the body. Put it into the body for use, move the reading dock to read the code words on the entire page of audio music books, and the MCU in the body gets the code reading value and plays music; in addition, the appearance of the large body can also be suitable for audio music If the reading material is placed on the body, when in use, the audio music reading material (as shown in Figure 1 is an example of the audio music reading material) is placed on the body and used, and the mobile reading dock is used to read the codewords on the entire page of the audio music reading material, which is controlled by the body The MCU inside gets the code reading value and plays music. Another way is not to make a large body, but to integrate the MCU, the reading terminal, the pronunciation device and the button module into a small housing to become a pickup suitable for hand-held (of course, the reading terminal generally needs to be exposed outside the small housing for code reading) , and the audio music book is independent of the small shell, the audio music book can still be based on the reading material (as shown in Figure 1 or shown in the lower part of Figure 6 as an example of the audio music book), in the entire reading material All code words are arranged on the page, and the position of each code word on the whole page of reading material is random, and sound music reading material can be placed on the tabletop during use, and hand-held small casing, moves small casing with the reading on the small casing. The dock goes to touch or approach (such as the electromechanical reading dock can be used in a contact manner, such as the photoelectric reading dock can be contacted or approached) the code words on the entire page of the audio music reading material to read the code and play music, When there are multiple codewords on one page of audio music books, you can read which codeword you want to read; another way can also make the reading terminal mobile, integrating MCU and pronunciation device in a small Inside the housing, this small housing can be placed on the desktop, and the reading terminal is connected with the small housing by a wire, and the small housing is used as a pickup; when in use, move the reading terminal to read the entire page of the audio music book For the code word, the code reading value is obtained by the MCU in the small housing and the music is played; in addition to the above-mentioned external forms of the pickups, other external forms of the pickups are also possible.

As shown in Figure 4, it is an example of the appearance of a pickup in the form of a large-body continuous reading dock and an example of audio music books. Here, the reading dock can be made mobile, and connected with the body through wires, and the large body connecting reading dock is used as a pickup), the shape of the body is suitable for putting audio music books into the body, 1 is the conductive code reading Wharf, 4 is a button module (i.e. two buttons, this button module is made up of two buttons, and the button is not necessary and can be omitted). When in use, put the audio music book into the body, hold the mobile reading dock 1, use the reading dock 1 to touch the conductive code 10 on the entire page of the audio music book to read the code, the MCU in the body obtains the code reading value and according to the code The value plays the music pronunciation. (the reading dock that this paragraph says can be changed into photoelectric type reading dock such as light pen or CCD reading dock to read the conduction code 10 on the whole page of audiobook reading material obviously).

As shown in Figure 5, it is an example of the appearance of a pickup in the form of a large-body continuous reading dock and an example of audio music books. Here, the reading dock can be made movable, and connected with the body by wires, and the large body reading dock is used as a pickup), the shape of the body is suitable for allowing audio music books to be placed on the body, and 1 is an electromechanical armor Read the terminal, 4 is a button module (i.e. two buttons, this button module is made up of two buttons, the button is not necessary and can be omitted), the main body of the audio music book in the figure is a music score book, and there is a Conductive code 10, when in use, put the audio music reading material on the body, hold the mobile A reading dock 1, and use the A reading dock 1 to touch the A conductive code 10 on the entire page of the audio music reading material to read the code, the MCU in the body Get the code reading value and play music pronunciation according to the code value. (the reading terminal mentioned in this paragraph can obviously be replaced with a photoelectric reading terminal such as a light pen or a CCD reading terminal to read the first conduction code on the entire page of the audio music book)

As shown in Figure 6, it is an example of a hand-held pickup appearance and an audio book that is printed with conductive codes on the page. Integrate the MCU, the reading terminal, the pronunciation device and the button module into a small housing to become a hand-held pickup, the reading terminal generally needs to be exposed outside the small housing for code reading), 1 is the electromechanical A reading terminal, 4 It is a button module (i.e. two buttons, this button module is made up of two buttons, and the button is not necessary and can be omitted), and what the lower part in Fig. 6 shows is an example of an audiobook, the main body of this audiobook It is a music score book, and there is a conductive code 10 on the page of the music score book. When in use, a mobile pickup is held in hand, and the first reading terminal 1 on the pickup is used to contact the first on the entire page of the audio music book shown in the lower part of Fig. 6. Conductive code 10, read the code and play music pronunciation according to the code value. (the reading dock that this paragraph says can be changed into photoelectric type reading dock obviously such as light pen or CCD reading dock to read the first conduction code on the whole page of audiobook).

As shown in Figure 7, it is an example of the appearance of the pickup in the form of a small housing continuous reading dock and an example of audio music books. In a small housing, this small housing can be placed on the desktop, the reading dock can be made mobile, and connected with the small housing by wires, the small housing connected reading dock is used as a pickup), 45 is the light pen reading dock, 4 is a button module (i.e. two buttons, this button module is made up of two buttons, the button is not necessary and can be omitted), the main body of the audio music book shown in the lower part of Figure 7 is a book, and there is a barcode on the page of the book 57. When in use, hold the mobile light pen to read the terminal 45, and use the light pen to read the terminal 45 to touch the barcode 57 on the entire page of the audio music book to read the code, and the MCU in the small housing obtains the stitching information from the read code words value and decode the playback music pronunciation according to the value of the spliced information. (the reading dock mentioned in this paragraph can obviously be replaced with electromechanical conductive code A reading dock to read the first conductive code on the entire page of the audio music book)

The above five paragraphs are all common sense. The information represented by the value of the conductive code mentioned in the above five paragraphs is information related to the value of the combined information. The information indicated by the value of the barcode mentioned in the above paragraph 1 is information related to the value of the combined information.

Generally, there is an elastic conductive rubber strip on the electromechanical conductive code reading dock (for example, the A reading dock or the B reading dock mentioned in the invention application No. 2006102010785). To be pressed, for the hand-held pickup that uses the electromechanical conductive code reading dock, in order to reduce the force of the hand, the structure of the handheld pickup can be arranged to concentrate the heavy components near the reading dock, so that it weighs less when in use. It is more concentrated on the conductive rubber strip of the reading dock. When using it, because the weight of the pickup plays a role in pressing the conductive rubber strip, it is less labor-intensive for the user to use.

The pickup described above of the present invention can be integrated with other electronic products in fact, such as with MP3 player or with repeater (such as the kind of playing tape) or integrated with mobile phone, there can be multiple Integration with mobile phones, for example (other integration with MP3 players is similar to integration with mobile phones), the integration methods generally include: 1: The main MCU used for mobile phone function control is still inside the mobile phone. This main MCU can also be used as an MCU for code reading and music processing (of course, this MCU is required to have enough IO pins for dual purposes), then you can use the reading terminal (it can be an electromechanical conductive code reading terminal or a photoelectric reading terminal) Dock, etc.) installed on the mobile phone, read the intended connection between the dock and the main MCU (the connection between the main MCU and the original mobile phone components can still be unchanged), and the memory that the main MCU can read stores the value of the segment combination information for decoding The original key of the mobile phone can also be used as the key for code reading and pronunciation control (such as adjusting the volume). For example, the original main MCU of the mobile phone or the pronunciation chip external to the main MCU can play music (for example, the music synthesis method can be used to press the pair The decoded result obtained by combining the value of the information is decoded to play music), then you can still use the original main MCU of the mobile phone to play music (in this case, the external speaker of the main MCU is a sound device) or use the sound chip external to the main MCU to play music (In this case, the sounding chip with a speaker connected to the main MCU is a sounding device), otherwise, the music chip should be connected to the main MCU to play music (in this case, the music chip with a speaker connected to the main MCU is a sounding device; this music For example, the chip can use the music synthesis method to play music according to the decoding result obtained by decoding the value of the combined information), and can also connect other chips outside the MCU to play music sound according to the music synthesis method. The original other circuits of the mobile phone can remain unchanged, so that the original mobile phone The main MCU of the mobile phone can not only complete the original communication function, but also read the code and send music concurrently; two: the original circuit of the mobile phone and the circuit of the pickup module can be arranged separately in the mobile phone body, and the two circuits are independent (the power supply can be shared). There are individual single-chip microcomputer chips for main control, each with its own key, and the pronunciation circuit is also separated. The pickup module has its own pronunciation device, and the reading dock is also installed on the mobile phone and used for the main processing of reading code and sending music. The MCU (that is, the MCU of the pickup module) is intended to be connected, so that after the integration, it will have the original communication function and the function of reading code and sending music, and these two functions do not interfere with each other; there are also other integration methods. Electronic products in these integrated ways (the electronic products mentioned below in this paragraph refer to electronic products that integrate modules such as MP3 players, repeaters or mobile phones and can read codes to play music and pronounce) can be regarded as pickups. Such a sound pickup includes all the technical features of the sound pickup described in claim 6, so any electronic product in an integrated manner (the electronic product can be regarded as a sound pickup) should belong to the scope of the sound pickup described in claim 6. (the sound pick-up module mentioned in this paragraph includes MCU, reads docks, components such as pronunciation devices, and these parts are also the parts that the sound pick-up mentioned outside this paragraph includes, and the sound pickup module may also include memory when necessary). Using the electronic product pickup described earlier in this paragraph can obviously be used to read the codewords in the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book and play the music pronunciation, and the entire page of the audio music book can be read by an electronic product pickup. All or part of codewords in all codewords for playing music can also be defined as part of the codewords that can be read by the pickup of this electronic product among the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book. The electronic product pickup can read several codewords in all codewords in the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book and play music. The shape of each electronic product mentioned in this paragraph is obviously not particularly limited. The reading docks mentioned in this paragraph can be electromechanical conductive code reading docks or photoelectric reading docks, etc., and if they are integrated with mobile phones into electronic products, they can also use the original code-reading devices of mobile phones as reading devices. For example, the original camera head of the mobile phone can be used to read the code, then generally the camera head can be used as a reading port (when the camera image processing circuit is in the main MCU, the camera head is usually connected to the main MCU, in this case the camera The code reading software involved is generally placed in the main MCU), or the camera head plus camera image processing integrated circuit is used as a reading terminal (when the camera image processing circuit is made into a camera image processing integrated circuit, the camera head and the integrated circuit They are all outside the main MCU chip. Generally, the camera head is connected to this integrated circuit and this integrated circuit is connected to the main MCU. In this case, the code reading software involved in photography can generally be placed in the camera image processing integrated circuit, and the After the image processing integrated circuit obtains the code reading result, the code reading result is passed to the main MCU by the integrated circuit), obviously the main MCU mentioned above when reading the dock situation of the above-mentioned two camera modes also doubles as the code reading broadcast For the MCU used for music master control, the code word on the entire page of the corresponding audio music book read by the camera is generally a two-dimensional barcode (because the BIT capacity of the two-dimensional barcode is large, it is possible to put a longer piece of music on the two-dimensional barcode) The value of the combined information is read by the pickup of the electronic product integrated with the mobile phone and decoded to play the music according to the value of the combined information in the code value. The code-reading software involved in photography can be modified so that the photo-reading dock can read conductive codes or one-dimensional barcodes or graphic codes, etc. (even the code-reading software involved in photography can be modified so that code words of these different code types can be photographed A reading dock of the mode reads separately); and some characters such as some data characters, alphabetic characters can be printed and arranged together to form a character code, and the reading dock of this photographic mode can be used to read this character code, of course the reading involved in photography The code software is more complicated, because each character can establish a corresponding relationship with different binary values, so the values of different pieces of combined information can be converted and expressed with different character combinations, that is, this character code can be used to represent numbers. The value (or its conversion value) of a piece of piece information, etc., so the code word on the entire page of the audio music book mentioned in this application document can be this character code. The pronunciation device mentioned in this paragraph all refers to the pronunciation device used for reading codes and playing music, and belongs to the concept of the pronunciation device of the pickup repeatedly mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual.

The record item of the phoneme database mentioned in this manual is the same concept as the record (RECORD) in the database in the computer field. There are generally multiple fields (FIELD) in a record item. Of course, each field in the phoneme database in the pickup The data format of the field is generally a data format conveniently used by the MCU of the pickup.

The 'sound combination' that appears everywhere in this application document is a complete word, for example, when it comes to 'one sound combination', then 'one' is a modified 'sound combination', such as when it comes to 'one sound combination', where 'One' modifies 'sound combination', when it comes to 'two sound combinations', then 'two' modifies 'sound combination', and when it comes to 'these sound combinations', then 'these' are modifiers' sound combination'.

The 'values of the combined information of several music sections' mentioned throughout this application document, wherein 'several' is used to modify the 'value of the combined information of the music sections'. The 'values of combining information of several segments' mentioned throughout this application document, wherein 'several' is used to modify 'the value of combining information of segments'.

In the narration of this specification, for any paragraph, any punctuation mark (full stop or comma or semicolon or colon) outside the brackets of this paragraph used for sentence punctuation is placed under the punctuation mark of this sentence outside the brackets of this paragraph The content between a punctuation mark used for sentence breaking (period or comma or semicolon or colon) is defined as a sentence (even if the content between these two punctuation marks used for sentence breaking is a sentence, it is also defined as a sentence), The content in the brackets between the two punctuation marks used to break sentences also belongs to the scope of this sentence, and there can be various punctuation marks in the brackets. The 'sentence' involved in this statement refers to the 'sentence' defined earlier in this paragraph. The punctuation marks used for sentence breaks mentioned in this paragraph do not include commas and commas between several words that are or are related to each other in a sentence; the punctuation marks used for sentence breaks mentioned in this paragraph do not include several Each is a comma and a comma between words related to each other.

If it cannot be deduced from the context of the mention that there is other meaning, the 'spectral data' that is not modified by the 'music section' mentioned in this manual refers to the spectral data of the music section by default.

Regarding the meaning of the value of the combined information of multiple sections mentioned in this application document, for example: for example, the value of the combined information of 3 sections refers to the value of the combined information of Section 1 and the value of the combined information of Section 2 The value of the combined information with the section 3; the value of the combined information of the 2 sections is also understood by analogy.

If there is no special indication of other intentions when mentioned, the pickup reads the code and plays music after reading the code. The default is that after the pickup reads a number of code words, a value of a combined information is obtained from these code words and this combined information The value decodes and broadcasts music, or obtains the value of a plurality of pieces of segmental combination information from these several codewords, and decodes the value of these plurality of combination information and broadcasts respective pronunciation respectively, and other similar statements can also be understood by analogy.

If there is no special indication of other intentions when mentioned, the value of the information in this application to play music according to the value of the segment combination information is by default to decode and play music according to the value of the segment combination information, and other similar statements can be understood in a similar manner.

The pickup mentioned in this application document plays music by broadcasting spectrum data, and the specific format of spectrum data is not particularly limited. According to different models of MCU or music chip used for broadcasting spectrum data, the specific format of spectrum data may vary. Different; the said pick-up in this application document can play music according to the mode of broadcast spectrum data, and it is the same meaning as saying that the pick-up can play music according to spectrum data. The spectrum data referred to in this paragraph is the music spectrum data obtained by decoding the value of the music piece combination information.

The music scores printed on the entire page of the audio music books mentioned in this application document can be numbered notation, staff notation, guitar notation, electronic piano notation, etc.

In each claim item in the claims, the text between each two semicolons is a description of a complete technical feature, and the relationship between the complete technical features in a claim is an 'and' relationship. The text between the two semicolons may be divided into multiple parts by several ', or,', and each part represents one of the complete technical features described in the text between the two semicolons or a selection (but there are exceptions, See the next paragraph), if you need to use 'or' or 'or' in each part, there will be no commas before and after 'or' or 'or'; but for the convenience of reading, there are paragraphs in the claims, a There may be no semicolon in the paragraph (there is no semicolon at the end of the paragraph). In this case, the text content between every two semicolons is still the description of a complete technical feature (that is, a complete technical feature may include several paragraphs. Content), if the text of a paragraph is divided into 3 parts by several semicolons, then the text content of each part is a description of a complete technical feature, then this paragraph includes a description of 3 complete technical features, such as a paragraph of text If they are not separated by semicolons, then this paragraph is a description of a complete technical feature. (but the preceding part in claim 1 and 6 which are independent claims is not suitable for the description in this paragraph). Obviously, every colon in the claims is equivalent to a semicolon mentioned in this paragraph, and every period in the claims is also equivalent to a semicolon mentioned in this paragraph.

In addition, there is a statement like this in the claims: For something (thing is a noun), how 1, or how 2, this statement refers to the relationship between how 1 and how 2, that is, how something can be 1 or how something can be 2; for example, as mentioned in the claims 'for a certain code word among the code words, the carrier of this code word can be a page of the reading material, here The carrier plane of the codeword is a page of the reading material, or the carrier of the codeword can be a small piece of planar material, the carrier plane of the codeword is the surface of the planar material, and the codeword is arranged on the surface of the planar material , this planar material is pasted on a page of the reading material;' that's it; , how 4), also understand by analogy said in this paragraph.

The meaning of the code word mentioned in this application document carrying a certain value refers to that a certain value can be obtained from the code word (generally, this value or the transformation value of this value is put into this code word), and the code word mentioned in this paragraph A word refers to a single codeword.

According to the content of this specification, it can be seen that the information represented by the code value of each code word in the code words on the entire page of the audio music book mentioned in this application document is the information related to the value of the combined information, so the audio music If there are other code words on the entire page of the reading material, but the information represented by the code value is not information related to the value of the combined information, this code word does not belong to the entire page of the audio music reading material mentioned in this application document. The range of various codewords; for example, there may be other special codewords on the entire page of some audio music books, such as codewords that only carry the control information of the pause, such as after the pickup reads the codeword, the pickup The music being played is paused, and the code word is read again with a pickup and continues to play from the pause point. The information represented by the code value of this code word is not information related to the value of the combined information, so this code word does not belong to this code word. The scope of code words on the entire page of the audio music book mentioned in the application documents.

The concept of "reading materials" mentioned in this application document (without adding the word "sound music" in front of it to modify) is somewhat different from the concept of "audio music reading materials". Reading materials refer to common books, music score books, Magazine etc. itself (the reading material itself has nothing to do with the codeword), if there are some codewords related to the value of the combined information formed (such as printing) on the entire page of the reading material (such as books, music books, magazines, etc.), then All these codewords related to the value of the spliced information on the whole page of the reading material and the reading material together form the audio music reading material, and this reading material is also the reading material as the main body of the audio music reading material. The code word mentioned in this paragraph can be the code word that directly regards the page of the reading material as the main body of the audio music book as the carrier plane, or it can be the code word on the surface of the small piece of plane material as mentioned above in this specification, and this The small piece of flat material is pasted on the page of the reading that is the main body of the audio music reading.

The code words mentioned in the previous paragraph are formed on the entire page of the reading material, which is only the final form of the audio music book product. In fact, the code word is first formed (such as printed) on several large sheets of printing paper and then the graphic text is printed ( music score) and then bound into audio music books, first print pictures and texts on several large sheets of printing paper and then form code words and then bind them into audio music books (binding in this sentence and the previous sentence refers to printing pictures and texts and forming Several large sheets of printed paper with codes are cut into multiple small sheets and bound together), first bound into the form of reading materials, then printed with pictures and texts, and then form codes to form audio music books, etc. Which of these methods It doesn't matter (the binding mentioned in this sentence refers to cutting several large sheets of printed paper that have not yet printed pictures and texts and formed code words into multiple small sheets, and then bound them together). These methods are equivalent to each other. replace. The code word mentioned in this paragraph is the code word related to the value of the spliced information.

If there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, the "full page of the audio music book" mentioned in this application document includes all pages of the audio music book by default (for an audio music book with only one page, all pages refer to this One page), if there is no other meaning when it is mentioned, the "whole page of the reading" mentioned in this application document (without "audio music" in front of the "reading"), includes all pages of the reading by default (for For a reading with only one page, all its pages refer to this one page). If no other meaning is specified when mentioned, the "page of the audio music book" mentioned in this application document refers to a specific page of the audio music book by default; if no other meaning is specified when mentioned, this The 'reading page' mentioned in the application documents (without 'sound music' in front of the 'reading') refers to a specific page of the reading by default; The 'pages of reading materials' mentioned in various places (without 'audio music' in front of 'reading materials') refer to a specific page of reading materials by default; The 'page of the audiobook' referred to refers to a specific page of the audiobook by default.

For any page of the audio music book, it can also be said to be a page of the book as the main body of the audio music book, that is, this page of the audio music book and this page of the book refer to the same thing in substance, such as a A page of an audio music book is printed with '135' on the front of a piece of paper (no other pictures and texts printed on the front), '246' printed on the back (no other pictures and texts printed on the back), and a bar code, then this page of the audio music book includes this paper and the printed '135' and '246', and the page of the book that is the main body of the audio music book also includes this paper and the printed '135' and '135' and '246' printed 246'. Regarding the materially identical things mentioned in this paragraph, for example, for an apple on the table, saying 'this apple' and 'this apple on the table' refer to the materially identical things (both refers to the 3 double apples).

It can be deduced by the last paragraph: for any page of the audio music reading material, it can also be said to be a page of the reading material as the main body of the audio music reading material (or for any page of the reading material as the audio music reading material main body, it can also be said to be this page). A page of an audio music book), that is, this page of an audio music book is exactly the same as this page of the book; for example, a page of an audio music book is printed with '135' ( There are no other pictures and texts printed on the front), '246' is printed on the back (no other pictures and texts are printed on the back), and a barcode is printed on the front. This page of this audio book includes this paper and the printed '135 ' and '246', this page of this audio music book is also a page of the book that is the main body of this audio music book, so the front of this page is a page of this audio music book, and the front of this page is also a page of this audio music book A page of the reading in the main body of the reading. Can deduce that the whole page of audiobook and the whole page of the reading as this audiomusic main body are exactly the same reference; For example, an audiobook only contains two pages (page 1 and page 2), page 1 is There is '135' printed on the front of a piece of paper (no other pictures and texts printed on the front), '246' printed on the back (no other pictures and texts printed on the back), and a barcode is printed on the front, so the audiobook Page 1 includes this paper and the printed '135' and '246', and page 2 is printed with '356' on the front of another sheet of paper (no other pictures and texts are printed on the front), and '467' printed on the back ( There are no other pictures and texts printed on the back), and a conductive code is printed on the front and back respectively, then page 2 of the audio music book includes this paper and printed '356' and '467', then the audio music book's The entire page includes the front of page 1 of the audio music book, the back of page 1 of the audio music book, the front of page 2 of the audio music book and the back of page 2 of the audio music book, as the main body of the audio music book The entire page of the reading material includes the front of page 1 of the reading material and the reverse side of page 1 of the reading material and the front side of page 2 of the reading material and the reverse side of page 2 of the reading material, while page 1 of the audio music book Equally, page 2 of the audio music book is equivalent to page 2 of the reading material, so the entire page of the audio music book is exactly the same as the entire page of the reading material as the main body of the audio music book.

The reading material mentioned in this application document has nothing to do with codewords within the scope of the reading material itself. The sheet of paper on page 1 and the printed '135' and '246', and the sheet of paper forming page 2 and the printed '356' and '467', obviously there is no codeword in the range of things included in this reading material, that is, Within the scope of this reading itself, it has nothing to do with codewords.

For any code word, if it is on the page of an audio music book, then this code word and the reading material as the main body of the audio music book are independent of each other, and this code word neither belongs to the page of this book nor The page that belongs to this reading material does not belong to the page of this audio music book, nor does it belong to the page of this audio music book, but this code word belongs to this audio music book (this code word can be directly used as this audio music book The page of the reading material of the main body is used as the code word of the carrier plane, or it can be the code word on the small piece of plane material mentioned above in this specification, and this small piece of plane material is pasted on the page of the reading material as the main body of the audio music book ). And the pictures and texts (such as printed music scores) printed on the pages of the reading material as the main body of the audio music reading material obviously belong to both this reading material and the audio music reading material (this reading material is the main body of this audio music reading material, and this reading material belongs to this Audiobook), also belongs to this book's page, also belongs to this audiobook's page. The codewords on the entire page of the reading material as the main body of a certain audio music reading are the same reference as the codewords on the entire page of the audio music reading, and the codewords mentioned here belong to the audio music reading but Whole pages that do not belong to the audiobook do not belong to the book that is the subject of the audiobook nor do they belong to the book that is the subject of the audiobook. For the part code words in the code words on the whole page of a certain audio music reading material, it can also be said to be the part code words in the code words on the whole page of the reading material as the audio music reading material main body; Part code words in the code words on the whole page of the reading material as a certain audio music reading material main body can also be said to be part code words in the code words on the whole page of this audio music reading material.

The codewords mentioned in the above 7 paragraphs are all codewords related to the value of the spliced information. The above 7 paragraphs are for the convenience of expressing this application document and are all obvious common sense. The numbers in the quotation marks of the above 7 paragraphs refer to the musical notes in the numbered notation.

The books mentioned in this application document generally refer to music teaching materials, such as music theory teaching materials.

The music score book mentioned in this application document refers to the book whose pages are mainly printed with music scores, such as "Czerny Piano Etudes 299", "Bach's Well-tempered Piano Collection", "Beethoven Piano Sonata Collection" , "Folk Guitar Collection" and so on.

The code word related to the value of the combined information referred to throughout this application document refers to the code word whose code value represents information related to the value of the combined information.

The reading materials mentioned in various parts of the claims (modified without adding "sound music" in front of it) refer to the reading materials that are the main body of the audio music reading materials, not the audio music reading materials.

The codewords mentioned in this application document are read by the pickup by default, which means that each codeword is read by a reading terminal of a pickup (each pickup has only one reading terminal) by default; Multiple reading docks of a pickup are read, and the situation that multiple codewords are read by multiple reading docks of a pickup each time is equivalent to one codeword being read by one reading dock of a pickup every time. Because of these multiple reading docks can be regarded as a very large area of reading docks together, these multiple code words can be regarded as a very large code word of an area together. (the 'many' in the 'multiple codewords' mentioned in this paragraph can be the same or different from the 'many' in the 'multiple reading docks', because for example, one reading dock can read several codewords or one The code word is once read by several reading terminals, etc.). If there is no special meaning when mentioning, the reading terminal mentioned in this application document obviously refers to a single reading terminal by default. If there is no other meaning specified when mentioning, the pickups mentioned in this application document obviously refer to a single pickup by default.

'Aforementioned' appearing in any claim refers to the preceding statement in this claim.

"Aforementioned" and "all codewords" in the "aforementioned codewords" mentioned everywhere in the claims are collocations by default, that is, as long as "partial codewords" appear behind the "aforementioned", then this' Aforesaid ' just only modifies this ' all code words ', and does not modify other content that follows behind ' all code words ', and ' all code words of the foregoing parts' refers to the ' all code words mentioned above' in the claims codeword'; similarly, the 'aforementioned codewords', 'the aforesaid pickup', 'the aforesaid audio music book', 'the aforesaid reading material', 'the aforesaid reading terminal', 'the aforesaid Pronunciation device', 'the aforementioned single-chip microcomputer chip', the 'forementioned' in each formulation of 'the aforementioned reading dock' and the part behind the 'forementioned' in this formulation (such as 'the aforementioned' and 'pickup') are all default Collocation, that is, the word "previous" in each of these formulations is only used to modify the part behind the "previous" in this formulation (for example, the "previous" in "previous pickup" is only used to modify this 'Pickup' behind 'predecessor').

If there is no special meaning when it is mentioned, the paragraphs mentioned in this application document refer to a single paragraph by default; if there is no special meaning when it is mentioned, the playback paragraphs mentioned in this application file are pronounced by default Refers to playing a single section pronunciation.

References to 'several' throughout this application mean 'one or more'.

In this application document, saying that the code value of a codeword is related to the value of the combined information is equivalent to saying that the information represented by the code value of the codeword is related to the value of the combined information.

The "value of music segment information" without quantifiers in front of this application document refers to the value of a musical segment combination information by default, and the "music spectrum data" without quantifiers in front of it mentioned in this application document is By default it refers to a piece of score data.

The "part" in the "part of the program related to the pickup" mentioned throughout this application is used to modify the "program related to the pickup", and the "part of the program related to the pickup" means that the pickup is related to Part of all programs used; 'part' of 'part of said pickup-related data' mentioned throughout this document is used to modify 'said pickup-related data', 'part of said pickup-related 'Data' refers to all data part of the pickup involved in use.

If there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, the codewords mentioned in this application document refer to the codewords in the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book by default. If there is no other meaning when mentioned, the barcodes, conductive codes, graphic codes or magnetic codes mentioned in this application document are by default also codewords among the codewords on the entire page of audio music books.

If the exact meaning is not specified when mentioned and the exact meaning cannot be deduced from the context of the mention, the codewords mentioned in this application document can be conductive codes, barcodes, graphic codes or magnetic codes by default, (and such as The context of the mention has indicated that the code word is a barcode, that is, the exact meaning can be deduced from the context of the mention, that is, the code word is a bar code).

If the "some" appearing everywhere in this application document modifies the nouns behind it and there is no quantifier immediately after the "some", then this "some" means "some" by default, which is also common sense; For example, 'a certain section' means 'a certain section'. The 'he' appearing everywhere in this application document, if it modifies the nouns behind it and there is no quantifier immediately after the 'he', then the 'he' means 'this' by default, which is also common sense; For example, 'this section' means 'this section'.

If there is no other meaning specified when mentioning and it cannot be inferred from the context of the mention, the 'sound picker' mentioned throughout this application document without a quantifier in front of it refers to a pick-up by default.

"A certain codeword in all codewords" mentioned in many places in this application document refers to a certain codeword among all codewords in the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book, Contain 3 codewords (codeword 1, codeword 2 and codeword 3) in all codewords such as part, a certain codeword in all codewords of that part refers to codeword 1 or codeword 2 or codeword 3 exactly. Similarly, "a certain codeword among the codewords" mentioned in many places in this application document refers to a certain codeword among the various codewords on the entire page of the audio music book, such as the various codewords Contain 4 codewords (codeword 1, codeword 2, codeword 3 and codeword 4) in the codeword, a certain codeword in that all codewords refers to codeword 1 or codeword 2 or codeword 3 or codeword 4.

The "any page of the audio music book" mentioned in many places in the claims refers to any page of the entire page of the audio music book. For example, the entire page of the audio music book contains 4 pages (page 1 , page 2, page 3 and page 4), any page of the audio music book refers to page 1 or page 2 or page 3 or page 4; "any page of the audio music book" mentioned in many places in this manual It is also understood in this way.

The 'said' in 'a certain codeword in said codewords' mentioned everywhere in the claims is only used to modify the 'said codewords' behind this 'said'. The 'said' in 'any codewords in said codewords' mentioned everywhere in the claims is only used to modify 'the codewords' behind this 'said'. The 'said' in 'a certain codeword among the said codewords' mentioned in the claims is only used to modify the 'codewords' behind this 'said'. The 'said' in 'any of the codewords' mentioned in the claims is only used to modify the 'codewords' following the 'said'. The 'said' in 'the code value of the said one codeword' mentioned in the claims is only used to modify the 'one codeword' following the 'said'.

The values of the codewords mentioned throughout the application documents are the code values of the codewords.

If there is no other meaning specified when mentioning, the "value of the combination information of the music segment" (or the value of the combination information indicating the pronunciation of the music segment) mentioned everywhere in this application document without quantifiers refers to a default The value of the piece's flattening information.

Some kind of code word is arranged on the entire page of audiobook that this application document says everywhere, refers to that this code word is arranged on all pages on the whole page or on the partial page on the whole page (even only has one page) above) has this codeword.

If there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, and other meanings cannot be deduced from the context of the mention, the memory mentioned in this application document refers to the main processing chip that can be used as the main processing chip of the pickup when it is used by default. The microcontroller chip reads the memory used.

Dispersing (or separating) the value of a piece of combined information mentioned in this application document and placing it in multiple codewords generally refers to separating the BIT value of the value of this piece of combined information into multiple parts and separately Put in multiple codewords, this is obvious.

The 'all codewords or part codewords in the codewords' mentioned throughout the application documents are based on the whole codeword as the minimum unit, such as containing 3 codewords in the codewords (codeword 1, Codeword 2, codeword 3), all codewords in that all codewords are exactly these 3 codewords, the possible situation of part codewords in all codewords is (codeword 1) or (codeword 2) Or (codeword 3) or (codeword 1, codeword 2) or (codeword 1, codeword 3) or (codeword 2, codeword 3); All codewords or part codewords' or other similar sayings in the word are also understood by analogy, such as containing 3 codewords (codeword 1, codeword 2, codeword 3) in all codewords of the department, the codewords of that department are all All codewords in codewords are exactly these 3 codewords, and the possibility situation of part codewords in all codewords is (codeword 1) or (codeword 2) or (codeword 3) or (codeword 1, Codeword 2) or (codeword 1, codeword 3) or (codeword 2, codeword 3).

Obviously, the 'previous readings' mentioned in any claim refer to the 'readings' mentioned in this claim, not the 'audio music readings' mentioned in this claim.

In this specification, the content of this specification and the claims is cited (for example: "..." mentioned in claim 2), and the content cited can be multiple sentences in the claims or this specification or A whole sentence, and the cited content may also be a part of a claim or a whole sentence in this specification.

The 'several' mentioned throughout the application documents refers to one or more.

All codewords of the aforementioned parts mentioned in the claims are all codewords or partial codewords in the described codewords; the described codewords can be one or more codewords; the codewords of the aforementioned parts Can be one or more codewords; ', the two 'multiple' mentioned here can be the same number or not the same number, and the number of codewords included in all codewords is greater than or equal to that contained in all codewords The number of code words (such as all code words comprise a plurality of code words, part all code words comprise a plurality of code words, ' many' in the 1st sentence in this bracket is just greater than or equal to the 2nd sentence in this bracket in the 'many'). The multiple codewords mentioned in the claims are all codewords or partial codewords in the codewords; the codewords can be one or more codewords; Part of all codewords can be one or more codewords' also be understood like this. (how many codewords and how many codewords are included in the codewords mentioned in this application document is the same expression, and how many codewords are the codewords mentioned in various places in this application document It is the same expression as how many codewords are included in all codewords, such as 'all codewords include a codeword' is the same meaning as 'all codewords are a codeword', such as 'all codewords include a plurality of codewords' Code word' and 'all code words are a plurality of code words' are the same meaning, such as 'part of all code words comprises a code word' and 'part of all code words is a code word' is the same meaning, such as 'part of all code words Word comprises a plurality of codewords' and ' all codewords are a plurality of codewords' is the same meaning)

In the description sentences mentioned in this manual, a certain component modifies another component, and the modification mentioned refers to only modification by default, that is, a certain component only limits another component, and does not limit the content other than the other component, such as This manual says that the "several" in the "transformation value of the value of the combination information of several sections" is to modify the "value of the combination information of the sections", then the "number" is only used to limit the value of the "music" here. The value of segment flattening information'.

If there is no other meaning specified when mentioning, the number of pages mentioned in various places in this manual refers to the number of pages in this manual by default.

Obviously, among the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book mentioned in this application document, as any two codewords, the code values are all the values of the combined information of several music sections. The value of the piece combination information is generally different from the values of several pieces of piece combination information in the other codeword.

The decoding program and decoding data mentioned in this application document refer to the decoding program and decoding data used to decode the value of the music segment combination information in the codeword, and the program code and decoding data of the decoding program are based on the music It is generated by the decoding rule for decoding the value of segment combination information (there is an example of the decoding rule at the beginning of this specification).

If there is no special indication of other meanings when mentioned, the claims mentioned everywhere in this application document refer to the claims of this application document by default.

The conductive codes mentioned everywhere in the claims can be on-off conductive codes or analog-to-digital conversion conductive codes, can be planar conductive codes or non-planar conductive codes, can be positively pasted conductive codes or reversely pasted. Conductive code, the code word area can be all conductive substances or both conductive substances and non-conductive substances. The electromechanical conductive code reading dock mentioned in the claims can read any of the above conductive codes. One or more types of reading docks (for the description of electromechanical conductive code reading docks, see invention application No. 2006102010785).

The pronunciation program in the pickup mentioned in this application document may be a program for playing music according to spectrum data, or a program for playing music in other forms.

All the passages of the audio music book mentioned in this application document refer to the sum of the passages that need to be played on each page of the audio music book, and also refer to the passages that need to be played on each page of the reading that is the main body of the audio music book The sum of the audio music readings mentioned in this application document refers to all or part of the sum of the music sections that need to be played on each page of the audio music reading, and also refers to the reading that is the main body of the audio music reading. All or part of the sum of the sections to be played on each page. All music sections mentioned in this application document everywhere refer to all music sections of a certain audio music book.

When this instruction manual mentions that the pickup reads the code words of a certain code type to play music, it is obviously that the reading dock of this pickup can read the code words of this code type by default. When this manual mentions that the pickup reads several codewords and plays music according to the value of the segment combination information in the code value, it is obvious that there are decoding programs and decoding data in the memory set related to the pickup by default, and the pickup can be Decode and play music according to the decoding program and decoding data.

If there is a pickup (including the pickup of the electronic product mentioned earlier in this manual), integrate the reading terminal and the MCU (for example, the pickup of the electronic product can read the code and play music, and the main MCU of the pickup of the electronic product and the camera circuit for code reading are integrated together, where the camera circuit is equivalent to the reading dock), then this situation should be an equivalent replacement of separating the reading dock and the MCU.

The BIT involved in a certain value mentioned in this application document refers to a certain value itself or the transformation value of a certain value. For example, the BIT involved in the value of several pieces of information combined refers to the value itself of the number of pieces combined information Or the conversion value of the value of the combination information of several sections.

As the BIT of the value of a music section splicing information is separately placed in multiple codewords (or the BIT of the transformed value of the value of several music section splicing information is separately placed in multiple codewords or the like), these multiple codewords Words are respectively located on the entire pages of many audio music books, and these multiple code words on these audio music books need to be read by the pickup during use, and the value of the music segment combination information is obtained to play music. This situation can be Think of these multiple audiobooks as one audiobook.

The SNC710 mentioned in this application document has the function of playing music (four-channel), which means that it has the function of playing four-channel music in the way of music synthesis.

The music pronunciation corresponding to a code word (such as conductive code, bar code) mentioned in this application document can refer to that after this code word is read by the pickup, the pickup is assembled according to the number of music segments carried by the code value of the code word The value of the information to play the music pronunciation (generally the pronunciation of these several sections), it can also mean that after multiple code words including this code word are read by the pick-up, the pick-up will read the code according to the code of these multiple code words. The value of several pieces of information that are combined to obtain the value (such as the value of a piece of information, the value of this piece of information is scattered in these multiple codewords) to play the music pronunciation (generally is the pronunciation of these several passages), etc.

In addition, there may be a certain code word on the entire page of an audio music book, and its code value is related to the value of the combination information of several music sections, but it cannot correspond to playing music, such as combining a music section of this audio music book A part of the BIT of the value of the information is placed in this codeword (no other values are placed in this codeword), and there is no processing of putting another part of the BIT of the value of this music segment into any other codeword. After reading this code word with any pick-up and then reading any other code words, all BITs of the value of this music segment combination information cannot be obtained, and the playback segment pronunciation cannot be decoded according to the value of this segment combination information. The word is also equivalent to a waste code word, and the application classifies such a code word into the situation that the value of the code word is not related to the value of the combined information (because those BITs in the code word can be regarded as some meaningless garbage BITs) , the code word that can not correspond to the pronunciation of the playing section like this does not belong to the code word in the code words on the whole page of this audio music book.

The section pronunciation (or the pronunciation of the section) mentioned in this application document everywhere refers to the musical sound of the section.

"Inside the pickup outside the chip of the single-chip microcomputer" mentioned everywhere in the claims refers to the meaning outside the chip of the single-chip microcomputer and inside the pickup. The "single-chip microcomputer chip outside the pickup inside" mentioned in this manual refers to the meaning outside the single-chip microcomputer chip and inside the pickup.

The 'other electronic products' mentioned in this application document refer to MP3 players, repeaters, mobile phones, etc.

The mobile phones mentioned in this application document include GSM, CDMA and other mobile phones, as well as PHS, local telephone and so on.

In the claims, there are many places in the claim that "the decoding program and the decoded data are used to decode the value of the music segment combination information and are decoded according to the decoding rules". Decoding' is a modification of 'decoding program and decoding data', and 'decoding according to decoding rules' is also a modification of 'decoding program and decoding data'.

If some passages of an audio music reading are called the passages of this audio music reading, then these passages are also the passages of the reading (this reading is the main body of this audio music reading); Some passages of the audio music book, then these passages are also some passages of the reading (this reading is the main body of this audio music book). If some passages of the reading as the main body of an audio music book are called the passages of this reading, then these passages are also the passages of this audio music reading; Some passages of the reading, and these passages are also some passages of this audio music book.

The coding rules involved in the value of the information about the combination of music pieces mentioned in this application document can be all written (such as the content of the coding rules is written in the form of a WORD file), or all unwritten (such as the coder according to his mind. Encoding with a well-thought-out encoding rule), or partly written and partly unwritten, the decoding rules involved in the value of the music segment combination information mentioned throughout this application file can also be all written, or all unwritten, or Some are written and some are unwritten. For example, when coding, the coder can code according to some coding methods in his mind. These coding methods are also coding rules, but this coding rule has not been formed into a document. The coding rules mentioned can also be all unwritten coding rules, or partially written and partially unwritten coding rules; similarly, the programmer writes the matching information of the pickup with some solutions in his mind These solutions are also the decoding rules, but the decoding rules have not been documented, so the decoding rules mentioned in this application document can also be this kind of unwritten decoding rules, or they can be partially written. Partially unwritten decoding rules.

If there is no other meaning from the context of the mention, the encoding rules mentioned throughout this application document refer to the encoding rules involved in the value of the information about the piece combination by default; if there is no other meaning from the context of the mention, The decoding rules mentioned in various parts of this application document refer to the decoding rules involved in the value of the music segment combination information by default.

There are several places in the claims that 'there are multiple pages and there are codewords on multiple pages', wherein the latter 'many' is less than or equal to the former 'many'.

When this specification sheet mentions storage set (do not add ' relevant to the pick-up' in front of it), it is acquiescence that this storage set is the storage set relevant to the pickup (this pickup is the pickup that is mentioned there related to the storage set).

The 'value of the piece combination information' mentioned throughout this application document is synonymous with the 'value of the piece combination information'.

Mentioned in claim 3, the value of each code word in the said part code words is the value of the mosaic information of a music section in these music sections or the combination of a music section containing a music section in these music sections The value of the message or . . . Or contain the part of the transformation value of the music section pronunciation information value of a plurality of different types including the value of the mosaic information of a music section in these all sections ', this way of writing refers to each code word in all codewords Word all has such feature: the value of code word is the value or the value of the splicing information of a music section in these all music sections or contains the value of the piece together information of a music section in these all music sections. . . Or the part that contains the transformation value of the pronunciation information value of a plurality of different types of music sections including the value of the combined information of one of the music sections. Other similar wordings in the claims should also be understood by analogy. (In this paragraph, because the quoted sentences are too long, all of them are omitted with '...')

The pickup mentioned in this application document can also read the code with the camera head that the mobile phone adopts, then generally the camera head can be used as the reading dock (this situation is that the camera image processing circuit is in the main MCU and generally the camera head is connected In this case, the code reading software involved in photography is generally placed in the main MCU), or the camera head plus camera image processing integrated circuit is used as a reading terminal (in this case, the camera image processing circuit is made into a camera For image processing integrated circuits, the camera head and the integrated circuit are both outside the main MCU chip. Generally, the camera head is connected to the integrated circuit and the integrated circuit is connected to the main MCU. In this case, the code reading software involved in photography is generally It can be placed in the camera image processing integrated circuit, after the code reading result is obtained by the camera image processing integrated circuit, and then the integrated circuit transmits the code reading result to the main MCU), and the corresponding audio music book read with the camera function is complete The code word on the page is generally a two-dimensional barcode (and because the BIT capacity of the two-dimensional barcode is large, so the value of the segment combination information can be placed on the two-dimensional bar code, the code word is read by the pickup and combined according to the segment in the code value The value of the information is decoded to play music, of course, the pickup needs to have the ability to decode and play music according to the value of the information according to the music segment), and the code reading software involved in the camera can also be modified so that the reading terminal of this camera can read conductive codes or one-dimensional Bar code or graphic code, etc. The reading terminal of the pickup mentioned in this application document can be the reading terminal described in this paragraph, and this reading terminal can be called a photographic type reading terminal. The pickup mentioned in this paragraph can be the electronic product pickup mentioned earlier in this specification, and it can also be a pickup other than the electronic product pickup mentioned in this application document.

The small piece of plane material mentioned in this application document as a code word carrier has no special limitation on its area. If a plane material with a relatively large area has one or more code words on it, this plane material is pasted on as a code word carrier. On the page of the reading material of the main body of the audio music book, the page of the reading material is generally not covered, and this plane material is also equivalent to a small piece of plane material.

The "transformation value of the value of the combination information of several pieces" mentioned in this application document, the "several" is to modify the "value of the combination information"; the "number" mentioned in this application document Transformation values of music spectrum data', among which 'several' are modified 'music spectrum data'.

The 'all codewords of a part' or 'all codewords of a certain part' or 'all codewords of this part' mentioned in this application document all refer to a part of all codewords (there are several codewords in all codewords of this part) word), rather than referring to a codeword in all codewords.

The spectral data of a musical piece is the collection of those data in spectral format used to generate the pronunciation of this musical piece.

The 'spectrum data of several musical sections' mentioned in this application document is the same expression as 'several musical section spectral data', 'the spectral data of one musical section' is the same expression as 'a musical section spectral data', and 'some Spectral data of a musical section' is the same expression as 'spectral data of some musical sections', and 'spectral data of multiple musical sections' is the same expression as 'spectral data of multiple musical sections'. The "value of the combined information of several sections" and "the value of the combined information of several sections" mentioned in this application document are the same expressions, and the value of "the value of the combined information of one section" is the same as "the value of the combined information of one section". Value' is the same expression, 'the value of the combined information of some sections' is the same expression as 'the value of the combined information of some sections', and the 'value of the combined information of multiple sections' is the same as 'the value of the combined information of several sections' Value' is the same expression.

If other meanings cannot be deduced from the context at which it is mentioned, the "value of the music segment combination information" (or "the value of the segment combination information") mentioned in this application document without quantifiers in front of it refers to a music segment combination by default The value of the information; if there is no other meaning from the context of the mention, the 'music spectrum data' (or 'music spectrum data') mentioned in this application document without quantifiers in front of it refers to a music spectrum by default data.

Apparently, certain data is stored in the pickup mentioned in various places in this application document, and by default it means that certain data is stored in the memory set related to this pickup. Storing certain data in the pickup mentioned throughout this application document refers to storing certain data in the memory set relevant to this pickup by default. The certain data in the pick-up that mentions everywhere in this application document refers to certain data in the memory set relevant to this pick-up by default. Only contain a storer in the memory set relevant with certain pickup, then each memory store in this memory set obviously refers to this storer. The 'certain data' mentioned throughout this paragraph refers generally, such as the data involved in decoding.

In Chinese, 'and' can be used as a conjunction, which is equivalent to 'and', and 'and' has this meaning as a conjunction: for example, 'some A and a certain B', and both a certain A and a certain B exist, then Saying 'A and B' is equivalent to saying 'A and B', and saying 'A and B' is the same as saying 'A' if A exists and B does not . In a single-chip microcomputer system, the main MCU needs to use programs and data, and it is rare to not use data, because for example, the data defined by DB and DW in assembler programs should belong to the data range mentioned in the previous sentence, and In the assembler program, it is rare that the data defined by DB and DW is not used, but in extreme cases, the data may not be used, so this application document uses "programs and data", "programs related to pickups and data related to pickups" , "all programs and all data" is written with "and". This application document stipulates that for the "programs and data" mentioned in this application document, if data exists, then saying "programs and data" is equivalent to saying "Programs and data", if the data does not exist, then saying "programs and data" is equivalent to saying "programs"; for the "programs related to the pickup and data related to the pickup" mentioned throughout this application document, if the pickup is related If the data exists, saying 'programs involved in the pickup and data related to the pickup' is equivalent to saying 'programs involved in the pickup and data related to the pickup', if the data involved in the pickup does not exist, then say 'programs involved in the pickup and data related to the pickup' The data' is equivalent to saying 'programs involved in the pickup'; for 'all programs and all data' mentioned throughout this application document, 'decoding program and decoding data' can also be understood by analogy. (This application document includes the claims and description of this application)

Getting a certain value from multiple codewords mentioned in this application document refers to reading these multiple codewords with a pickup and combining the values of these multiple codewords to obtain a certain value, such as combining a piece of information When the BIT of the value is placed in multiple codewords separately, when reading the code, it is necessary to use a pickup to read the multiple codewords and combine the values of the multiple codewords to obtain the BIT of the value of the segment information , that is, to obtain the value of the piece combination information from these multiple codewords, or for example, separate the BIT of the transformation value of a piece piece together information value into multiple codewords, and read the code when using it. codewords and combine the values of these multiple codewords to obtain the BIT of the transformation value of the value of this music section stitching information, and do inverse transformation to this transformation value, so that this music section can be obtained from these multiple codewords The value of the flatten information.

The values of the several pieces of combination information in the codeword mentioned everywhere in this manual, etc., refer to the value of the several pieces of combination information that can be obtained (such as obtained directly or converted) from this codeword wait.

The value of a code word mentioned in this application document is the value of a plurality of music segment combination information, and generally refers to putting the BIT sequence of the value of the plurality of music segment combination information in this code word, or interleaved here In the code word. Other similar statements can also be understood by analogy.

The pickup mentioned in this application document reads the codeword to play music (or similar sayings), actually refers to that the pickup is manipulated by people to read the codeword to play music. This is obvious, so it is said that the pickup reads The purpose of codewords to play music is to describe concisely. Obviously in claim 1, 2, the audio music reading material mentioned in 6, reading material, pickup all refers to one.

The pickup makes the pronunciation device play the music pronunciation according to the code value of a code word that is read at every turn, or makes the pronunciation device play the music pronunciation according to the code values of a plurality of code words that are read; then this action can be repeated next time, Go read other codewords and play other music pronunciations.

The said pickup of this application document reads several code words and then plays the music pronunciation (or plays the pronunciation of the music section), it may be that after the people read several code words with the pickup, the pickup itself plays the pronunciation of several sections (playing several sections of music) Pronunciation includes the situation of playing the pronunciation of the passage), and it may also be that the human reads a number of code words with the pickup and then the pickup plays several passages of pronunciation according to the key operation of the person (playing the pronunciation of several passages includes the situation of playing the pronunciation of the passage) , these methods are equivalent replacements for each other.

If there is no other meaning specified when mentioning and it cannot be deduced from the context of the mention, the speakers, speaker circuits, and music chips mentioned throughout this application document without quantifiers in front of them all refer to one by default. This is also obvious.

The music chip with a speaker mentioned in this application document refers to a music chip with a speaker connected externally.

Unless other meanings can be deduced from the context of the mention, the "broadcast" mentioned in this application document is the same as "play" by default; pronounce.

This application document describes the process of reading code words and playing music. It mainly reads several code words first, obtains the value of several pieces of information combined from these codes, and then plays music according to the value of these several pieces of information. For example (assuming that the way these 3 sentences are said is mode 1), in practice, after reading several codewords during use, the pronunciation of a music section is played every time the value of a piece of combination information is taken out (that is, for example From these several codewords, the value of 2 pieces of music segment combination information can be obtained, then first obtain the value of the first music piece combination information from these codewords and decode and play the sound of this piece of music, and then from these numbers Obtain the value of the 2nd music segment combination information in a code word and decode and play the sound of this segment), and even play a part of the music segment pronunciation every time a part of the value of the segment combination information is taken out (that is, for example, from these codes Words can get the value of the mosaic information of 1 paragraph, then first get the first part of the value of the mosaic information of this paragraph from these codewords and decode and play music according to it, and then from these codewords Obtain the latter part of the value of the combined information of this section and play the following music according to its decoding. The music played in these 2 steps constitutes the pronunciation of this section in terms of hearing), these methods are the same as the method 1 mentioned earlier in this paragraph is an equivalent replacement.

Play music and similar sayings after several code words in the code words of the pick-up reading part mentioned everywhere in the claims and this specification, except some specific situations mentioned earlier in this specification, it may also be: a music The BIT of the value of the combined information of the section is placed separately in multiple codewords in the codewords. When using the conventional code reading, you should use the pickup to read the multiple codewords in order to obtain the combined information of this music section. All the BITs of the value, and then decode and play the pronunciation of this section according to all the BITs of the value of the combined information of this section. In practice, it is also possible to use the pickup to read one or several of the multiple codewords by using the reading dock. Word to obtain the part BIT of the value of the merging information of this music section, and decode and play the part pronunciation of this music section (that is, the pronunciation of a part of the music section) according to the part BIT decoding of the value of the merging information of this music section, as said here Part of the BIT of the value of the combined information of the paragraph meets the conditions of the value of the combined information mentioned above in this manual, for example, it indicates how to use multiple phonemes to combine the pronunciation of the preceding part of this paragraph, then you can put the preceding part of this paragraph A section is regarded as another section, and the BIT part of the value of the combined information of this section mentioned here is regarded as the value of the combined information of this other section, and the value of the combined information is decoded and pronounced. Play music just can be above-mentioned this specific situation after the several codewords in all codewords of the pick-up that mentions in the claims and this specification, and it may be other more that this specification does not mention specific circumstances.

What this application document says reads a plurality of codewords with pickup, generally refers to utilizes reading terminal to read these multiple codewords (reading a codeword at a time) with pickup in turn, or utilizes reading terminal to read these in agreed order with pickup multiple codewords.

The part of the codewords on the entire page of the audio music book that can be read by a certain pickup for playing music is defined in this application as the codewords that can be read by the pickup, then Each code word in some of these code words other than the code words of this part may also be read by the pickup for playing music.

If there is no other meaning from the context of the mention, the BIT of a certain data mentioned in this manual refers to all the BITs of a certain data by default. The context of the mention can not be deduced to have other meanings, and the BIT of the value of a piece of music piece information mentioned refers to all the BITs of the value of this piece of piece piece information.

There is only one pronunciation device in the pickup mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual except this paragraph, such as a horn or a music chip with a horn, etc., and if there are multiple pronunciation devices mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual in the pickup, the pickup has Sometimes use one of the pronunciation devices mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual to play music, and sometimes use another pronunciation device mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual to play music, then you can use these multiple pronunciation devices mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual. The sounding device is equivalent to a sounding device, and the sounding device mentioned in claim 2 and 6 can be the sounding device (or the function not mentioned in this specification is similar to other parts of this specification) by other paragraphs of this specification. The sounding device of the sounding device mentioned in the paragraph) is combined, in this case, the sounding device of this combined form is still connected with the MCU intention, and refers to the sounding device (or the sounding device in this manual) mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual The function not mentioned in the specification is similar to the pronunciation device of the pronunciation device mentioned in other paragraphs of this specification) in each of the pronunciation devices mentioned in other paragraphs of this specification (or the function not mentioned in this specification is similar to that of other paragraphs in this specification) The pronunciation device of the said pronunciation device) is directly connected or indirectly connected with the MCU, and the pickup is using one or more of the pronunciation devices mentioned in other paragraphs of this manual (or the functions not mentioned in this manual are similar to other parts of this manual. When the sounding device of the sounding device mentioned in the paragraph) plays music, it is equivalent to that the pickup is playing music using this combined sounding device; The pickup sometimes uses the music chip 1 with the horn to play music, and sometimes uses the music chip 2 with the horn to play music, then the music chip 1 with the horn and the music chip 2 with the horn can be combined as one Sounding device, claim 2, the sounding device mentioned in the 6th can be exactly this sounding device, and when the pickup uses the music chip 1 with the loudspeaker therein to play music, it is equal to that the pickup is using this sounding device (music with the loudspeaker) Chip 1 plus music chip 2) playing music with speakers. Therefore, there is only one sounding device in the pickup mentioned in this application document. This sounding device can be a speaker, or a music chip with a speaker, or can be composed of several speakers, or a music chip with a speaker. Chips, or composed of several speakers and several music chips with speakers, or more. If the pronunciation device mentioned in other paragraphs of this specification or the pronunciation device not mentioned in this specification is similar to the pronunciation device mentioned in other paragraphs of this specification, it is defined as a sub-sounding device, then the pronunciation device of the combined form mentioned in this paragraph It is composed of multiple sub-pronunciation devices. The combined pronunciation device is connected to the MCU intentionally, and the intentional connection generally includes several situations: 1. The multiple sub-pronunciation devices are directly connected to the MCU. 2. The multiple sub-pronunciation devices are directly connected to the MCU. The devices are all indirectly connected to the MCU. 3, some of the sub-pronunciation devices are directly connected to the MCU, and the other part of the sub-pronunciation devices are indirectly connected to the MCU.

In general, the pickup plays the pronunciation of the passage, plays a pronunciation of the passage, plays the pronunciation of the passage, or other similar sayings such as broadcasting the passage or making the pronunciation device of the pickup play the pronunciation of the passage or the code word corresponding to the broadcast Section pronunciation, etc., what is played is the entire pronunciation of a section. In general, the pickup plays multiple section pronunciations, or other similar sayings such as broadcasting multiple sections or making the pronunciation device of the pickup play multiple sections. section pronunciation, etc., what is played is all the pronunciations of each section in multiple sections; but in practice, it may also appear that only a part of the pronunciation of a section is played according to the agreement (for example, there is a sign BIT in the BIT of the codeword) (for example, the value of a code word of audio music book has the value of the combined information of a section, and the music length of this section is 10 seconds. After the pickup reads this code word, press the value of the combined information of this section in the code word Decoding, but only play the sound of the preceding 5 seconds according to the agreement, or only play the sound of the preceding 2 seconds and the sound of the following 2 seconds according to the agreement).

This application document stipulates that the situation of playing part of the pronunciation of a piece of music as said in the previous paragraph is also called playing the pronunciation of a piece of music; if it cannot be deduced from the context of the mention that there is a specific meaning, the pickup mentioned in the front of this specification Play the pronunciation of a passage, play the pronunciation of a passage, play the pronunciation of this passage, or other similar expressions such as broadcasting this passage or making the pronunciation device of the pickup play the pronunciation of a passage or the pronunciation of a passage played by the codeword, etc. , the default can be to play all the pronunciation of this section, or to play part of the pronunciation of this section; if the specific meaning cannot be deduced from the context of the mention, the pickups mentioned in the front of this manual play multiple music Paragraph pronunciation, or other similar expressions such as broadcasting multiple passages or making the pronunciation device of the pickup play multiple passages, etc., the default can be to play all the pronunciations of each passage in the multiple passages, It can also be to play part of the pronunciation of each of the multiple sections, or to play the entire pronunciation of each of some of the multiple sections and another part of the multiple sections Partial pronunciation of each section in . And the pronunciation of playing a passage said in this paragraph is the subordinate concept of the pronunciation of playing a plurality of passages said in this paragraph, because the pronunciation of playing a plurality of passages includes the situation of playing a pronunciation of a passage; The pronunciation of one or more passages (or the pronunciation of several passages) refers to the pronunciation of one passage or the pronunciation of multiple passages. Obviously, the pronunciation of one passage is played and the pronunciation of multiple passages is played as described above in this paragraph. It is enough to understand the pronunciation of the section; the pronunciation of the playback section mentioned in the claims can be the entire pronunciation of the playback section, or part of the pronunciation of the playback section, (the above three sentences say Sections refer to individual sections). The playback pronunciation mentioned in this paragraph refers to the decoding playback pronunciation.

Note: In the description of this application document, there are references to 'above this paragraph', 'above this paragraph', 'before this paragraph', 'before this paragraph', etc., which obviously refer to the scope of this paragraph As mentioned above; similarly, if there are references to 'below this paragraph', 'below this paragraph', and 'behind this paragraph' in some places, it refers to what is described later within the scope of this paragraph. The "first two paragraphs" mentioned in some places in this manual does not include the paragraph where the words "first two paragraphs" are located, and the same is true for other similar references such as the first few paragraphs. The "two paragraphs in the back" mentioned in some places in this specification does not include the paragraph in which the words "two paragraphs in the back" are located, and the same is true for other similar references such as several paragraphs in the back.

Note: The term "this application document" in this specification includes the claims of this application, the specification and the drawings of the specification; if there is no special meaning when it is mentioned, the specification mentioned in this application document is everywhere It is obvious that 'description' and 'claims' and claim items (such as the mentioned 'claim 1') refer to this application document by default. The number of patent applications mentioned in this manual refers to the domestic patent applications in China.

Claims (10)

1. sound music reading material, its main body is a reading matter, on the whole page of aforementioned reading matter all code word is arranged, this all code word belongs to aforementioned sound music reading material, it is characterized in that:

The code value of each code word in aforementioned all the code word is altogether how to come the value of the amalgamation information that the amalgamation period pronounces relevant with phoneme with several expressions.

2. sound music reading material according to claim 1 is characterized in that:

The all code words of portion are arranged in described all the code word; Aforementioned all code word is whole code words or the part code word in described all the code word; Described all code word can be one or more code words; Aforementioned all code word can be one or more code words;

Each code word in aforementioned all code word can both be read by same acoustic pickup, each code word in aforementioned all code word is that the reading terminal by aforementioned acoustic pickup is read by aforementioned acoustic pickup, and each code word in aforementioned all code word can be read to be used for aforementioned acoustic pickup by aforementioned acoustic pickup broadcasts the period pronunciation;

Aforementioned acoustic pickup includes an aforementioned reading terminal, a pronunciation device, a singlechip chip, this singlechip chip is the main process chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup, this singlechip chip is connected with aforementioned reading terminal purpose in aforementioned acoustic pickup, this singlechip chip is connected with aforementioned pronunciation device purpose in aforementioned acoustic pickup, aforementioned acoustic pickup in use, need use the storer collection, this storer collection is used to deposit the data that program that aforementioned acoustic pickup relates to and aforementioned acoustic pickup relate to, and each storer in this storer collection can be read use by the aforementioned singlechip chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup;

Aforementioned acoustic pickup is when being used, the aforementioned singlechip chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup utilizes the aforementioned reading terminal of aforementioned acoustic pickup can read each code word in aforementioned all code word, aforementioned acoustic pickup when being used, the aforementioned singlechip chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup according to read aforementioned all code word in the code value of code word make the aforementioned pronunciation device of aforementioned acoustic pickup broadcast the period pronunciation;

For a code word in aforementioned all code word, its code value is how to come the value of amalgamation information of amalgamation period pronunciation relevant with phoneme with several expressions together, how this several expression comes in the value of amalgamation information of amalgamation period pronunciation one to represent how to come with phoneme the value of the amalgamation information of amalgamation period pronunciation with phoneme, it is the value of representing how to come the amalgamation information of amalgamation period 1 pronunciation with phoneme, the value of amalgamation information how this expression comes this period 1 pronunciation of amalgamation with phoneme is according to generations of encoding of a kind of coding rule, and how this expression comes the value of the amalgamation information that this period 1 of amalgamation pronounces with phoneme also is the value 1 of amalgamation information.

3. sound music reading material according to claim 2 is characterized in that:

The value 1 of described amalgamation information is according to the generation of encoding of described coding rule, containing compressed encoding in this coding rule handles, there is compressed encoding to handle when encoding the value 1 that generates described amalgamation information with this coding rule, only needing maybe needs a plurality of code words from described all code word that comprises a described code word just can obtain the value 1 of described amalgamation information from the value 1 that a described code word can obtain described amalgamation information, the described singlechip chip of described acoustic pickup utilizes described reading terminal to can read a described code word or described a plurality of code word and obtains the value 1 of described amalgamation information, the described singlechip chip of described acoustic pickup is to make the described pronunciation device of described acoustic pickup broadcast described period 1 pronunciation to reading the 1 execution decoding of yard value of the described amalgamation information that obtains by a kind of rule of decoding, and contain the compression coding processing in this decoding rule, the compression coding processing is arranged when with this decoding rule value 1 of described amalgamation information being carried out decoding.

4. sound music reading material according to claim 3 is characterized in that:

The value 1 of described amalgamation information is the value of amalgamation information that how to represent to come with a plurality of phonemes the pronunciation of the described period 1 of amalgamation, and has at least in these a plurality of phonemes and include different pronunciations values constantly in the phoneme;

For certain phoneme of the related use of described coding rule, can be used for the amalgamation pronunciation of different periods;

Described decoding rule is special corresponding or general corresponding with described coding rule.

5. according to claim 1,2,3 or 4 described sound music reading materials is characterized in that:

Described broadcast period pronunciation is non-whole pronunciations of broadcasting whole pronunciations of period or broadcasting period;

Described period 1 pronunciation of described broadcast is non-whole pronunciations of broadcasting whole pronunciations of period 1 or broadcasting period 1;

Aforementioned period 1 pronunciation of described broadcast is non-whole pronunciations of broadcasting whole pronunciations of period 1 or broadcasting period 1;

Described reading matter can be a book, and books are printed on the card of picture and text, papers and magazines or map;

Described sound music reading material has one or more pages and only on a page code word is arranged, and perhaps, a plurality of pages is arranged and code word is all arranged on a plurality of pages; On arbitrary page of described sound music reading material or do not have code word, or a code word is arranged, or a plurality of code words that are in any diverse location are arranged;

A certain code word in described all the code word is to be in the position that need broadcast several periods pronunciations that this code word correspondence broadcasts on the whole page of described reading matter;

A certain code word in described all the code word can be a conduction code, perhaps can be bar code, perhaps can be graphic code, perhaps can be magnetic code; For a certain code word in described all the code word, the carrier of this code word can be a page or leaf of described reading matter, the bearer plane of this code word is a page of described reading matter, perhaps, the carrier of this code word can be a fritter planar materials, the bearer plane of this code word is the surface of planar materials, and it is to stick on the page of described reading matter that this code word, this planar materials are arranged on the surface of this planar materials.

6. one kind can be used the acoustic pickup that broadcasts the period pronunciation with the described sound music reading material of claim 1, this acoustic pickup is acoustic pickup just, this acoustic pickup includes a reading terminal, a pronunciation device, a singlechip chip, this singlechip chip is the main process chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup, this singlechip chip is connected with aforementioned reading terminal purpose, this singlechip chip is connected with aforementioned pronunciation device purpose, aforementioned acoustic pickup in use, need use the storer collection, this storer collection is in order to deposit program and data, each storer in this storer collection can be read use by the aforementioned singlechip chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup, and the main body of aforementioned sound music reading material is a reading matter, on the whole page of aforementioned reading matter all code word is arranged, this all code word belongs to aforementioned sound music reading material, aforementioned acoustic pickup is when being used, and the aforementioned singlechip chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup can utilize the aforementioned reading terminal of aforementioned acoustic pickup to read each code word in all code words of portion in aforementioned all the code word, it is characterized in that:

The code value of each code word in aforementioned all the code word is altogether how to come the value of the amalgamation information that the amalgamation period pronounces relevant with phoneme with several expressions; Aforementioned acoustic pickup when being used, by the aforementioned singlechip chip of aforementioned acoustic pickup according to read aforementioned all code word in the code value of code word make the aforementioned pronunciation device of aforementioned acoustic pickup broadcast the period pronunciation.

7. acoustic pickup according to claim 6 is characterized in that:

Described singlechip chip and described reading terminal are connected directly or indirectly; Described singlechip chip and described pronunciation device are connected directly or indirectly;

Described storer collection is the set of all storeies that can be used by described singlechip chip in the described acoustic pickup; The data storage that program that described acoustic pickup relates to and described acoustic pickup relate to is in described storer collection;

Described all code word is whole code words or the part code word in described all the code word; Described all code word can be one or more code words; Described all code word can be one or more code words;

For a code word in described all code word, its code value is how to come the value of amalgamation information of amalgamation period pronunciation relevant with phoneme with several expressions together, how this several expression comes in the value of amalgamation information of amalgamation period pronunciation one to represent how to come with phoneme the value of the amalgamation information of amalgamation period pronunciation with phoneme, it is the value of representing how to come the amalgamation information of amalgamation period 1 pronunciation with phoneme

How this expression comes the value of amalgamation information of this period 1 pronunciation of amalgamation according to the generation of encoding of a kind of coding rule with phoneme, how this expression comes the value of the amalgamation information of this period 1 pronunciation of amalgamation with phoneme also is the value 1 of amalgamation information, only needing maybe needs a plurality of code words from described all code word that comprises an aforementioned code word just can obtain the value 1 of aforementioned amalgamation information from the value 1 that an aforementioned code word can obtain aforementioned amalgamation information, the described singlechip chip of described acoustic pickup utilizes described reading terminal to can read an aforementioned code word or aforementioned a plurality of code word and obtains the value 1 of aforementioned amalgamation information, and the described singlechip chip of described acoustic pickup is to come that by a kind of rule of decoding the value 1 of reading the aforementioned amalgamation information that sign indicating number obtains is carried out the described pronunciation device that decoding makes described acoustic pickup to broadcast aforementioned period 1 pronunciation.

8. acoustic pickup according to claim 7 is characterized in that:

The value 1 of described amalgamation information is according to the generation of encoding of described coding rule, containing compressed encoding in this coding rule handles, there is compressed encoding to handle when encoding the value 1 that generates described amalgamation information with this coding rule, the described singlechip chip of described acoustic pickup is to make the described pronunciation device of described acoustic pickup broadcast described period 1 pronunciation to reading the 1 execution decoding of yard value of the described amalgamation information that obtains by described decoding rule, and contain the compression coding processing in this decoding rule, the compression coding processing is arranged when with this decoding rule value 1 of described amalgamation information being carried out decoding.

9. acoustic pickup according to claim 8 is characterized in that:

Described decoding rule is special corresponding or general corresponding with described coding rule;

The value 1 of described amalgamation information is the value of amalgamation information that how to represent to come with a plurality of phonemes the pronunciation of the described period 1 of amalgamation, and has at least in these a plurality of phonemes and include different pronunciations values constantly in the phoneme;

When described singlechip chip comes value 1 decoding to described amalgamation information by described decoding rule, be to come the pronunciation of the described period 1 of amalgamation with a plurality of phonemes, and have at least in these a plurality of phonemes and include different pronunciation moment values in the phoneme;

Described singlechip chip is to come the value 1 of the described amalgamation information described pronunciation device that makes described acoustic pickup of decoding is broadcasted the period pronunciation by described decoding rule;

For certain phoneme of the related use of described coding rule, can be used for the amalgamation pronunciation of different periods;

For certain phoneme of the regular related use of described decoding, can be used for the amalgamation pronunciation of different periods;

Can be stored in the described storer collection according to decoding program and the decoded data that described decoding rule is decoded to the value 1 of described amalgamation information.

10. according to claim 6,7,8 or 9 described acoustic pickups is characterized in that:

Described broadcast period pronunciation is non-whole pronunciations of broadcasting whole pronunciations of period or broadcasting period;

Described period 1 pronunciation of described broadcast is non-whole pronunciations of broadcasting whole pronunciations of period 1 or broadcasting period 1;

Aforementioned period 1 pronunciation of described broadcast is non-whole pronunciations of broadcasting whole pronunciations of period 1 or broadcasting period 1;

Described reading matter can be a book, and books are printed on the card of picture and text, papers and magazines or map;

Described sound music reading material has one or more pages and only on a page code word is arranged, and perhaps, a plurality of pages is arranged and code word is all arranged on a plurality of pages; On arbitrary page of described sound music reading material or do not have code word, or a code word is arranged, or a plurality of code words that are in any diverse location are arranged;

A certain code word in described all the code word is to be in the position that need broadcast several periods pronunciations that this code word correspondence broadcasts on the whole page of described reading matter;

Described reading terminal is the electromechanical conduction code reading terminal that can be used for reading the conduction code on the whole page of described sound music reading material, perhaps described reading terminal is to can be used for reading the bar code on the whole page of described sound music reading material or the photo-electric reading terminal of conduction code, perhaps described reading terminal is the photo-electric graphic code reading terminal that can be used for reading the graphic code on the whole page of described sound music reading material, perhaps described reading terminal is the magnetic code reading terminal that can be used for reading the magnetic code on the whole page of described sound music reading material, and perhaps described reading terminal is to can be used for reading the two-dimensional bar on the whole page of described sound music reading material or the photographic-type reading terminal of one-dimensional bar code or conduction code;

For a certain code word in described all the code word, the carrier of this code word is a page or leaf of described reading matter, and perhaps, the carrier of this code word is the nonconducting planar materials in fritter surface, and this planar materials is to stick on the page of described reading matter;

Can make the acoustic pickup of big body band reading terminal form to described acoustic pickup and the external form of body is suitable for allowing sound music reading material be placed in the body, during use, described sound music reading material put in the body use, perhaps, can make the acoustic pickup of big body band reading terminal form to described acoustic pickup and the external form of body is suitable for allowing sound music reading material be placed on the body, during use, described sound music reading material is placed on the body uses, perhaps, described acoustic pickup can be made the acoustic pickup of hand-held, perhaps, can be placed on the desktop acoustic pickup and the small shell that described acoustic pickup is made small shell band reading terminal form; Described acoustic pickup is not integrated with other electronic product, and perhaps, described acoustic pickup is that acoustic pickup that integrate with mobile phone or described is that acoustic pickup that integrate with the MP3 player or described integrates with language repeater.

Images